《Chronicles of a Dungeon Core (Side Stories)》


 Inaris New Home Part 1 of 2 (Inari Arc)

    I am jumping up and down hugging Takeshi, I did it. I made Daddy proud! I finally let Takeshi go and then fix the Kimono that Mommy summoned for me¡­ It has a little bit of damage, but that should take care of itself. I however quickly cast clean to get the kobold blood off of it.


    A voice then echoes out drawing my attention. It is the elder¡­ I think his name is Draco¡­ Daddy told me but I can¡¯t remember for sure.


    Draco: ¡°Very interesting youngling. How could you handle even 12 crimson kobold brutes and elders with a single spell?¡±


    Inari: ¡°Well compared to Daddy¡¯s training your trial was simple. Although it would have taken me at least another hour if it would have been just 2 rooms larger, but only so I could rest to refill my magic.¡±


    Faron: ¡°Well we are very curious about your¡­ Daddy¡¯s¡­. training methods.¡±


    I am not quite sure what to say, but when I look back to Daddy one of the elders speaks.


    Dyson: ¡°Now I believe that means I win, as such I think matters concerning how the new cores are trained are my jurisdiction.¡±


    Lucille: ¡°You are not planning keeping her training methods secret even among us are you?¡±


    Dyson: ¡°Secret? Of course not, but there just isn¡¯t any reason to bore you all with the details. After talking with Two-Twelve I do intend to begin using that method on the new cores starting next year.¡±


    Draco: ¡°I will be looking forward to your report on the matter.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Matters between the elders can be settled later, for now let¡¯s deal with the task at hand.¡±


    Lucille: ¡°She is right.¡±


    Draco: ¡°Very well. Dungeon Core #602 [Ivetta] and Dungeon Core #682 [Ysaac] If you will excuse yourselves to the waiting room we will deal with you later.¡±


    The two new cores that the elders trained look nervous as they nod and head out of the room.


    Faron: ¡°Now Dungeon Core #2 [Caecillius] and Dungeon Core #514 [Ferox Marionette] Please join the others up here.¡±


    After the two join Mira and me standing before the elders the big woman that seems really interested in Daddy begins to speak.


    Madam Erin: ¡°We asked for a new elder to breathe new life into the elders, and as much as we stubbornly tried to deny his suggestions. It appears Dyson was correct. As such I wish to congratulate you 4 on becoming the newest Dungeon Cores.¡±


    She then steps down from the podium asking us to join her, she then rolls out a large piece of parchment on the table. It then appears to begin to grow, and doesn¡¯t stop till it is more than just a map but a miniature of the entire continent.


    Madam Erin: ¡°Dungeon Core #2 [Caecillius] you first.¡±


    The rat beastkin looks over the map then points to a barren land on the west coast of the map, he then disappears.


    Madam Erin: ¡°Dungeon Core #108 [Mira] you¡¯re next.¡±


    Mira steps forward almost pointing to the exact opposite of #2 heading disappearing heading to a small village on the east coast.


    Madam Erin: ¡°Dungeon Core #514 [Ferox Marionette] Your turn.¡±


    I am a little confused my number is 245 so I should be next, so why is she having her go first¡­ However what is more troubling is the creepy little girl points to the map not far away from Daddy¡¯s dungeon as she disappears¡­


    Madam Erin: ¡°Dungeon Core #245 [Inari] now is your turn, but before you go I would like to have a word with you if that is alright.¡±


    ¡°Before I agree to anything, if I stay to listen to you, you have to let me take Takeshi with me.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°The map doesn¡¯t quite work like that, but I am sure we can come to some kind of arrangement if he wishes to join you.¡±


    The big lady leads me from the room, but as I leave I see the one called Dyson heads down from the podium and begins talking to Daddy and the others. She doesn¡¯t lead me far from the room only just to the hallway.


    She squats down to be at my level but I think even if she sat on the floor she would still be taller¡­


    Madam Erin: ¡°There are quite a few curious things about you I wish to ask you before you leave.¡±


    ¡°I will answer what I can, but Daddy told me to be careful with what I say.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°First off is your race, you look to be halfway between a feral beastkin and a normal beastkin, and the only other time I have ever seen such a thing was one of Two-Twelve¡¯s boss monsters.¡±


    ¡°You mean auntie Roxy?¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Now, I seen Roxy before she became Two-Twelve¡¯s boss monster and she was a normal beastkin. Two-Twelve said her change was a by-product of becoming his boss monster, so what I want to ask did he do the same to you?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t understand¡­¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Is that the reason you are so strong. Did Two-Twelve make you one of his special boss monsters?¡±


    ¡°Of course not, I was born this way because Daddy and I are special.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°How are you both special?¡±


    ¡°Daddy wouldn¡¯t want me to say thing else¡­¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Ok how about that special spell of yours.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t have any special spells, they are all pretty normal¡­¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°What you did with the orbs.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not a spell. It¡¯s a bunch of them.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°It was more than one spell then? Did it really use every element?¡±


    ¡°That is the way it works¡­ It has to have an even amount of spells from each element. It is the special skill I got because I inherited Daddy¡¯s special trait.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Overlooking the fact that ignores the point everyone has one element they can¡¯t cast. That must cost an extreme amount of magic¡­¡±


    ¡°Not as much as casting them separately, but it adds up quick¡­ Thanks to Daddy¡¯s training though I can use it quite a few times.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°My last question, Two-Twelve was different than other cores in almost every way. You seem to have gotten some of his traits, but are you like him or like a normal core?¡±


    ¡°I know everything a normal core knows, and also the things that make me special because of Daddy¡¯s trait, so somewhere in between I guess?¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Two-Twelve was quite scary as it was¡­ His lack of knowledge seemed to be the thing that balanced things out.¡±


    ¡°I can¡¯t do all of what Daddy does. I can make boss monsters normally and they don¡¯t evolve like Daddy¡¯s do.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°So that¡¯s what it is? His boss monsters evolve even if they are from races that don¡¯t have an evolution path?¡±


    Inari: ¡°I can¡¯t say anything more about Daddy¡¯s dungeon.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°What about you then, are you an evolved form of a beastkin then?¡±


    I take out my adventurer¡¯s ID to show her.


    Madam Erin: ¡°Divine Beastkin, if that¡¯s an evolved beastkin does that mean his mysterious Divine Being is an evolved human?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Dyson wanted Two-Twelve¡¯s training dungeon core to be a divine being so bad, he doesn¡¯t like beastkin much you see, so the first divine dungeon core being a beastkin is going to really get under his skin.¡±


    ¡°But I am not the first¡­ What about Da¡­¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Are you saying Two-Twelve is a Divine Being?¡±


    Daddy is going to be mad at me, he didn¡¯t tell me nobody knew about his race¡­ He said he had an adventurer¡¯s ID like Mommy so I thought they knew¡­ I bow my head and don¡¯t answer her, but even I know that is as much as confirming it¡­


    Madam Erin: ¡°I am also wondering about how you managed to reach level 14 during your training¡­ That should be impossible for a training core.¡±


    ¡°Daddy already told Dyson how to do it, so ask him¡­¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°So it wasn¡¯t due to Two-Twelve¡¯s unique nature, just his unique way of thinking then, so Dyson wasn¡¯t lying he does plan to re-produce it?¡±


    ¡°Daddy loves humans like Mommy, but he also wants the new cores to be able to defend themselves against the mean ones.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°I guess that is all I have for now, would you mind if we talk again some time, I would like to be your friend like I am with Two-Twelve, I will even let you call me grandma if you want. Because I am sure Two-Twelve told you that I was the one that trained him.¡±


    ¡°He said Auntie Thirty-seven trained him, he just happened to be born in your dungeon.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Fair enough¡­¡±


    She the stands and looks like she is about to ruffle my hair but instead just lightly pats me on the back. She leads me back into the room and the Elder Dyson is still talking to Daddy. After reaching the map I know exactly where I want to go, but I have to do something first.


    I run back to Daddy giving him a big hug. ¡°I love you daddy. Take care of Mommy and Aunties for me.¡±


    After letting go of Daddy I look at Takeshi. ¡°Madam Erin said she will help you find me, so I guess I will see you soon.


    Takeshi: ¡°Understood, I will join you shorty¡­ Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°You just?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Your training is over, so since you asked me to address you that way I thought I better get used to it.¡±


    I quickly move over hugging Takeshi as well. ¡°I will see you soon.¡± I then head back to Madam Erin and the large map.


    Without any doubt in my mind I look for the large island off the northwesterly coast and point to a large temple right in the heart of the island.


    After the sensation of being teleported I find myself standing in the middle of an abandoned temple¡­ I thought Mommy said the Inari she took my name from was important in Shima¡­ So why is the temple run down?


    I look down at the message I have received.


    New dungeon has been formed. 50,000xp obtained


    Dungeon has utilized existing structure [Worn Shima Temple] -1000xp


    Set Dungeon Core #245 Permanent name.


    Small Polychromatic Spinel has been placed


    [Worn Temple] added to available textures for 0xp extra cost.


    Current xp consumption set as 1xp/7 days.


    Well first thing is first Mommy gave me this name and I chose this location because of it and the stories Mommy told me, so.Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    ¡°Set name Inari¡±


    Dungeon core #245¡¯s name will permanently be set to Inari. Do you wish to proceed?


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Dungeon Core #245 [Inari] Now set


    My small crystal seems to have taken root right in the middle of the temple, so I need to see what I got going on here to find out what I need to do next. Only the temple itself is part of my dungeon but there are quite a few outlying buildings on the grounds. I decide to spend xp on covering the entire grounds of the temple area costing me another 5000xp.


    I go through the list of new items available to summon but they don¡¯t appear to be anything extraordinary so I decide to have a better look around. I would have liked to have a bit more above ground, but I don¡¯t want to make a tower type dungeon.


    At least the temple is on top of a pretty good sized hill. I can¡¯t see anything through the nearby forest, but if this is a temple there can¡¯t be people to far away. The temple doesn¡¯t appear to have had any visitors in quite some time however.


    I find a small well that is on part of the area that I extended and decide to add another floor at the base of the well.


    Warning! Placing [Sub-Level 1] permanently sets dungeon to build [Sub-Levels], and locks the ability to place floors above [Ground Floor]. Do you wish to proceed?


    The temple appears to be on top of the biggest hill in the area that means everything is ground level or below so I won¡¯t have any problems there, so I agree and my dungeon now has a second floor. I guess before I do too much building I need to add a core room, so after I do that I transfer to it.


    Just under half of my xp to go, well I need to get the crystal out of the middle of the temple floor so I add a hallway at the bottom of the well without setting a texture it unlocked the cave texture. I make the cave tunnel about like Daddy¡¯s but with the water at the bottom of the well I leave a path to one side creating an underground river.


    Daddy told me during training when making a room to always utilize the full amount of a room even if you don¡¯t need it that big, as you can always add a wall for a 100xp to make it smaller, but it would take 1000xp to make a new room or at least 500xp to make the room larger if you need to later.


    I offset the room about 5ft lower than the cave, so when I connect the rooms with a small archway in the underground river the room fills with 5 ft. of water. On the walkway I add another connection to the room with a Shima style heavy wooden double door.


    Using wood flooring I make a pathway above the water in the large room. Towards the back of the room I use stone wall to make a semi-circular floor that connects to the wooden pathway. I then add a few of the stone fox statues that were around the temple and another shrine right in the middle.


    I then move my crystal into this new shrine at the bottom of the well. I add a few Shima style d¨¦cor items along the two rooms and add accommodations to the core room. When it is all said and done I still have 20,000xp left over.


    I don¡¯t know if humans even come here anymore so I better save as much xp as possible. I clean up the temple with [Menu], but I can¡¯t fix it up with it so I will have to fix it up by hand. That will have to wait as it was late when I arrived I am only minutes away from the start of the new day.


    Adding no monsters or traps yet my xp consumption is still very low, but until I find out how far away the humans are I don¡¯t want to risk rising to high. It is still so low that when midnight does hit no xp is removed, but a counter till next consumption is counting down till the end of the week.


    That big lady, Madam Erin, promised she would get Takeshi to me, but as late as it is it doesn¡¯t look like it will be tonight, so I settle into my bed. I only tried to snuggle up to Daddy and Mommy because I figured that¡¯s what a normal child would do, but now that I don¡¯t have the option any more I feel kind of lonely as I drift off to sleep.


    I wake up with a jolt the next morning with an alarm about an intruder in the dungeon. Is it Takeshi? I jump out of bed casting clean on myself, and making sure I am presentable, but I don¡¯t see Takeshi in the screen. Instead is a little old man walking across the stone pathway wearily towards the temple.


    I decide to watch him for a while. He looks somewhat scared as he makes his way across the area and into the temple, I had to use a few candles and torches last night to see what I was doing. They have long since burnt out, but the old man seems interested in them.


    He hobbles over to the shrine taking quite a while to kneel down to pray at the shrine. After getting back to his feet he checks a few more things and buildings rubbing his hand across several surfaces apparently noticing the lack of dust.


    At his slow pace it seems to take half the day, but in reality it has only been about an hour. If he is really that slow, wouldn¡¯t it taken him all night just to climb the hill to begin with? After seeming satisfied the man slowly hobbles back down the stairs leading down the hill.


    Maybe I shouldn¡¯t have cleaned everything last night¡­ Well this is my home now, so why wouldn¡¯t I? With still no word from Takeshi I decide to begin the work on making some repairs on the worn-out parts of the temple and grounds.


    My magic isn¡¯t much help with this kind of labor, and by the time noon rolls around Takeshi still hasn¡¯t arrived so I decide to summon my boss monster.


    Do you wish to procced to summon boss monster with 1000xp?


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    The core room is filled with light. When the light fades a young fox beastkin man is kneeling in front of me. He is a bit younger then Takeshi, he looks to be around my age in appearance, unfortunately that means he isn¡¯t as well-endowed as Takeshi either. He is kind of scraggily as well.


    He also has quite a bit more fox like features then Takeshi, kind of like I do, but even with his silver ears, tail, and fur, his hair is short and coal black. I open his class screen seeing what is available. After looking over a few I decide on one and select it.


    After that I select the relevant gear, summoning it but leaving it in the dungeon inventory, I do however equip him in a set of Shima clothing which appears to be a lot less detailed Kimono. I wonder if it is just because it was cheap clothing or if my kimono is the odd one.


    ¡°Well you are no Takeshi, but I guess you will have to do for now.¡±


    Fox: ¡°Is Master displeased with me?¡±


    ¡°Not displeased. You are at least a divine beastkin, so at least that is something.¡±


    I open up his status page and it actually is pretty good, he is more of an offensive type where Takeshi is defensive, so if he can manage to catch up to Takeshi he will do quite a bit of damage.


    ¡°Alright, I guess we need to give you a name¡­ How does Yuji sound?¡±


    Set Boss Monster Divine Beastkin (Fox) name to Yuji?


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Boss Monster Divine Beastkin (Fox) name set to Yuji.


    ¡°Alright, I was in the process of fixing up this place, so why don¡¯t you give me a hand.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°¡­Yes Mistress.¡±


    After a few hours of working on fixing up the temple Yuji only talks when I ask him a question or tell him to do something. He never even tries to make conversation.


    ¡°You don¡¯t talk much do you?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Does Mistress wish for me to talk more?¡±


    ¡°I just thought you might want to know more about me, or at least what I expect from you.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°What I want is irrelevant. I just serve as Mistress directs.¡±


    ¡°Are all the monsters in Shima like this¡­? Daddy told me to take good care of my monsters so they take care of me, so it isn¡¯t irrelevant. If you are happy in what you do then you will put more effort into it.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Anything Mistress directs me to do I promise to put all my effort into.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    We continue our work in practically silence the rest of the afternoon. We barely made a dent in the repair work as the sun starts to set we can¡¯t see to do much more.


    One of the little buildings seems to be some kind of living quarters so once we are finished I tell Yuji he can sleep there and I head to the core room. I watch him in the screen and he heads directly to the bed lying down¡­


    Takeshi still hasn¡¯t arrived, I hope it doesn¡¯t take him to long.


    The next morning I receive another warning about intruders, this time I don¡¯t get overly excited just checking my screen first. The same old man appears to have returned this time however there is another old man with him.


    They speak in a language different then what the humans of the Gowen Kingdom speak, but unlike Daddy I can understand what they say just as easily. The man that has returned seems to be trying to convince the other one that he thinks there is something called an Oni here at the temple.


    Old Man 2: ¡°That is preposterous. Inari would never allow a Oni in her temple.¡±


    Old Man: ¡°Her shrine has gone neglected over the years maybe she has truly abandoned us now. The Oni stepping foot on the temple should be more than enough proof of that.¡±


    Old Man 2: ¡°If it was an Oni, why would it clean up the shrine? Look it even appears that some crude repairs have been made.¡±


    Crude? I tried the best I could¡­ that was rude.


    Old Man: ¡°How else do you explain it then?¡±


    Old Man 2: ¡°It is probably some criminal or vagabond that stumbled on the old temple and thought it would be a good place to lie low.¡±


    There is a noise and the old men become skittish. I look at another screen and see Yuji as left his building and is heading to the temple. As the old men slowly move in to investigate I manage to pull Yuji to the core room just before he would have been spotted by the old men.


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress?¡±


    ¡°You almost walked right into them.¡± ¨CI point at one of the screens.-


    Yuji looks confused and I remember I haven¡¯t giving him any access yet so I set it where he can use the basic functions of [Menu].


    The old men appear a little worried now looking over the temple grounds.


    Old Man: ¡°You heard that too right?¡±


    Old Man 2: ¡°¡­Maybe it¡¯s not an Oni but some kind of Yurei.¡±


    After that old men leave as quickly as their old legs will carry them.


    ¡°Those old men can¡¯t get far. There has to be a village near by or something. I want you to keep working on the temple today while I go down and investigate.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°But Mistress shouldn¡¯t I go? If something were to happen to you¡­¡±


    ¡°A lot of good that will do, you¡¯re only level 1.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°But Mistress!¡±


    ¡°I will be fine. Daddy taught me how to act around humans.¡±


    After transferring back to the temple I wait till Yuji begins his work, I then follow the trail down the hill, in the direction the old men went. They are moving slowly enough I easily catch up with them before they reach the bottom of the hill so I hide out of sight following behind them.


    Once at the bottom of the hill we reach a tall wall of timber that runs in both directions I can¡¯t quite tell how far it goes. Once the old men reach the wall they call out and another man appears at the tall wall of timber.


    After calling back and forth for a bit a gate opens allowing the men to pass the large timber wall¡­ This might be a little harder than I thought. I don¡¯t want to walk up to the gate right behind them so I make my way up to the wall and try to find another way in.


    I am not quite sure how long I have been walking, but with everything looking the same the only way I know I haven¡¯t made it all the way around is because I haven¡¯t seen the path back up the hill. I haven¡¯t even seen anything else resembling a gateway either.


    This wall of timber could wrap Daddy¡¯s town twice over¡­ I finally see a break in the trees. I thought I made my way all the way around but this area doesn¡¯t look familiar. This does appear to be another gate though complete with a road leading out from the timber wall into the forest.


    Once I step onto the road I hear a voice calling down from the wall.


    Man: ¡°Hey! You there! What are you doing here?¡±


    Daddy told me being an adventurer allows for a decent explanation for most situations so I decide to go with that. ¡°I am a traveling adventurer.¡±


    The gate begins to creak and open slowly, an older man walks out, and then gate is quickly shut again behind him.


    Man: ¡°Adventurer? Are you some kind of hero?¡±


    ¡°A hero? No, just a normal adventurer.¡±


    Man: ¡°We get quite a few adventurers though here, but never by themselves. You must be pretty strong to pass through the forest alone. You don¡¯t look any older then my daughter though¡­¡±


    ¡°I am a mage of sorts.¡±


    Man: ¡°Your appearance is quite strange. I have heard of beastkin before, but I have never seen one before.¡±


    ¡°I thought you said you get quite a few adventurers here?¡±


    Man: ¡°Well yea but most of the adventurers are from Shima or come on a boat from Dailian.¡±


    Dailian Kingdom is the place Mommy told me that still treats beastkin as monsters. If beastkin are really rare here maybe I should be a bit more cautious.


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Man: ¡°Well if you show me your adventurer¡¯s ID we can head into town. I hate being outside the gates for too long.¡±


    I am not sure what to do. Race should be ok because beastkin are rare here, but how am I going to explain my name or favored element, but before I have to think up something some of the trees begin to shake nearby.


    Man: ¡°Hey! HEY!! There are Oni out here! Let me back in!¡±


    Two creatures that look like large red hobgoblins come crashing out of the forest from the direction I came from, each carrying a large club. There is a horn blowing from the other side of the gate while the man flails against the gate but it shows no sign of opening as the creatures charge this direction.


    I don¡¯t know what these ¡°Oni¡± creatures are exactly but they look to be roughly the size an appearance of the hobgoblin hero other than their red skin. The man doesn¡¯t look like he is going to be much help, so I will have to do what I can.


    Without knowing their strength I decide it would be best not to pull any punches so I focus my magic summoning 12 multi colored fiery orbs. I decide to focus all 12 orbs into one of the creatures just to be on the safe side.


    Most of the orbs don¡¯t seem to affect it much but the two made with the light spells seem to devastate the creature and it collapses to the ground. Light seemed like the only effective method so no reason to waste magic so I instead begin using a [Bullet of Light] spell using the [Empowered Magic] skill I used my xp to learn during my last two weeks of training I power it as strong as I can get it.


    The creature is right on top of me before the spell is fully charged making it easy to launch the spell directly at its face. The empowered spell erases the creature¡¯s head, the body then stubbles collapsing to the ground with a crash.


    The man finally calms down a bit looking a bit bloody and bruised just from his flailing at the gate.


    Man: ¡°Oh thank Inari¡­ I thought we were goners for sure. You really must be a powerful adventurer to take on 2 Oni at once like that.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re welcome¡­ Now, can we go into town before any more of them show up?¡±


    Man: ¡°What about their things, are you not going to collect it?¡±


    ¡°It only looks like they had them club things¡­¡±


    Man: ¡°I am not talking about the clubs, although they do sell for a pretty good price, I am talking about the tusks, liver, and heart I mean practically their entire bodies are used as some kind of alchemy reagents.¡±


    ¡°That is disgusting¡­¡±


    Man: ¡°Oh the number of Oni you had to of killed to make it through the forest alone¡­ I wish I was the person who finds your trail¡­So you don¡¯t mind if I?¡±


    The fear he had before the Oni attacked and during has seemed to completely vanish after I tell him to help himself. He then moves over and begins cutting into the creatures. It isn¡¯t long till the gate opens up and two more men come trotting out of the wall they begin to argue with the man and he seems adamant on staking a claim to the bodies¡­


    ¡°I guess I will just find my own way¡­¡±


    The men ignore me as they have seemed to have come to some sort of agreement and the other two men begin cutting on the second body. I make my way through the open gate to find a well-built man dash up to me.


    Chiseled-Man: ¡°What is going on?! Why is the gate standing open?¡±


    ¡°I killed two Oni that attacked just outside the gate, the guards at the gate seem to be divvying up the spoils¡­¡±


    Chiseled-Man: ¡°Thanks for the help stranger.¡±


    The man then bows to me then finishes his jog to the gate and begins yelling at the men outside.


    Chiseled-Man: ¡°What if you were overrun while playing around out there you idiots! How many times have I told you the gate cannot remain open for more than 10 seconds!¡±


    The gate that looks like it would take several men to move is now swiftly slammed shut but the one well-built man. You can hear the panic begin on the other side of the gate as the 2 younger guards and 1 older guard seem to realize the situation they are in.


    The well-built man however ignores their pleas until he climbs to the top of the wall peering out in the forest. After looking out for quite a while he then heads back down opening the gate. The three men then begin dragging the bodies inside past the gate then the man slams the gate shut again.


    Chiseled-Man: ¡°You idiots could have been killed! Worse yet you put the entire town at risk!¡±


    I decide to leave them to their fate and head deeper into the town. The town isn¡¯t quite what I expected, I thought it had to be much larger then Daddy¡¯s town, but even the farms are within the wall making the buildings spread quite far apart. That must be why I was unable to see it from on top the hill.


    I follow what seems to be the main path. Most of the villagers seem to do a double take when they see me. Like they were not interested but once they spotted my ears and tail they begin to stare. Everyone seems to be wearing kimonos as well, but none are quite as intricate as mine. Most don¡¯t even appear to have half of the layers this one does¡­


    Once I reach what I assume is the heart of the village it is only 4 large buildings. One looks to be an inn, another seems to be a smithy that is even better than the one at Daddy¡¯s town, a third is a general store, and the last is a adventurer¡¯s guild.

 Inaris New Home Part 2 of 2 (Inari Arc)

    After reaching the village square I decide to head into the adventurer¡¯s guild, and find it like most small town and village adventurer¡¯s guilds it also serves as a tavern, but the building however is surprising full giving the fact the village is so small.


    Adventurer: ¡°What do we have here? That isn¡¯t something you see every day.¡±


    Adventurer 2: ¡°Not many beastkin around here. Look at her trying to fit in with that Kimono.¡±


    Adventurer 3: ¡°She is pretty cute though. Did the village just get a caravan in?¡±


    Adventurer 4: ¡°They shouldn¡¯t be here for two more days.¡±


    I ignore the adventurers and head to the commission board. I don¡¯t know how the currency differs here in Shima, but if it is the same as it is back in Gowen I see why the men threw such a fuss over the Oni. Though several commissions one Oni would be worth about 10 gold. In Gowen it would take a dozen kobolds to reach that value.


    It looks like every single commission pertains to either general labor or Oni extermination. There is also a note on the board saying commissions will be paid in gold, goods, or services at the guild¡¯s discretion.


    I can no longer ignore the adventurer¡¯s chatter now that one grabs my arm pulling me from looking at the board. He is actually pretty strong and I am unable to pull myself free after jerking back a few times.


    Adventurer: ¡°I said don¡¯t ignore me!¡±


    ¡°I will say this once, and once only. Take your hand off of me please.¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°Oh now you are so polite after ignoring me while I tried talking to you. I say you should apologize with your body.¡±


    ¡°What exactly did you have in mind?¡±


    I say wile stepping closer to him rubbing my free hand down his stomach and across his crotch. After finding his sadly pitiful little member with my hand I grab ahold of it and say. ¡°I think maybe you should cool off.¡± I then cast [Freeze] on his crotch.


    Needless to say he quickly lets go of me dropping to his knees clasping his crotch that has begun to ice over. I am not quite sure what to expect next, so I start to prepare for a fight but between the jeers and laugher of the other adventurers it doesn¡¯t seem like a fight is coming.


    Adventurer: ¡°What¡¯s the matter Goro, did the little doggie give you blue balls?¡±


    The whole room busts out laughing. I don¡¯t know what would be more painful the ice forming over the man¡¯s junk or the fact he is attempting to punch the ice from his own crotch as he rolls around on the floor squealing.


    The well-built man that was at the front gate earlier now enters the guild and the adventurers quickly quite down once they see him. He walks up to me and says. ¡°Good, after the front gate I thought you might be ok, but after the receptionist came running up saying that Goro was stirring up trouble I wanted to make sure.¡±


    He then squats down next to Goro as calm as can be while Goro thrashes about. ¡°Goro, did you learn your lesson?¡±


    Goro: ¡°Please! Tatsuo help me!¡± ¨CHe says begging the well-built man.-


    Tatsuo the well-built man then begins casting a spell and the ice quickly disappears from Goro¡¯s crotch, as it does Goro grunts seeming feeling some relief.


    Tatsuo turns back to me. ¡°I am sorry, about earlier and just now. I promise they will behave themselves from now on. Where are my manners I haven¡¯t had the chance to introduce myself. I am Village Chief Tatsuo Ito.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s a pleasure to meet you.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°May I ask your name?¡±


    I knew he was going to get hung up on that¡­ I could do like Daddy and use my number. Wait I got an idea.


    ¡°On account of my ears and tail, my parents named me Inari.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I see, so you have been in Shima for quite a while then?¡±


    ¡°Actually no, but my mom was the one that gave me the name saying I reminded her of the stories she heard.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°We used to have quite a nice temple dedicated to Inari¡­ Of course that was before the Oni. The Oni never could step foot on the holy ground, but we just couldn¡¯t be sure the villagers would be safe so we had to abandon it.¡±


    ¡°That is unfortunate.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I heard reports that the Oni may have begun to move in on the site now, so perhaps that is proof enough Inari has finally abandoned us like the rest of the old gods.¡±


    ¡°Who knows, Inari might surprise you.¡±


    Tatsuo seems to cheer up a bit. ¡°Thanks for that¡­ I guess the village chief shouldn¡¯t be all gloom and doom.¡±


    Tatsuo then shakes his head and smiles: ¡°Anyway, so do you plan to stick around very long? I promise Kabemura is the safest village in all of Shima.¡±


    ¡°For a while, I would like to hear more about that Inari temple up on the hill.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Well I have only heard the stories as I was too young at the time the Oni arrived, but there are a few older villagers left.¡±


    ¡°It has been abandoned that long? By the stories my mom told me I had a bit higher expectations.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I am sure you have seen, but Shima has practically belonged to the Oni since they began to appear 30 years ago¡­ If it wasn¡¯t for the adventurers we would have all starved or died outright by now.¡±


    Mommy and Takeshi never said anything about the Oni¡­ I am started to wonder if it was the right choice to choose a dungeon in Shima.


    ¡°Where do the Oni come from? I haven¡¯t heard anything about a dungeon sending that many monsters out before.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Nobody knows, but when they first began to arrive I heard they took out the dungeons before they began to take the land from the humans.¡±


    Something like this should be wide known¡­ I can understand if Daddy didn¡¯t know, but how come I wasn¡¯t born with knowledge about this¡­? Even if for some reason I didn¡¯t Takeshi was summoned with Shima knowledge so he should have known, but he didn¡¯t ever say anything.


    ¡°I guess I knew less about Shima then I thought¡­ What else can you tell me about the Oni?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Well I am not sure there is much I can tell you more then you already know. I mean you had to have killed dozens passing through the forest, so you probably know more than we do for that matter.¡±


    ¡°You said they wiped out all the dungeons, what about the ones that formed after that?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°the only one I have heard that has formed since the Oni arrived appeared within the gates of the capital¡­ That is the first and only time the Oni ever tried to breach our walls just to eliminate the dungeon.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    He continues to tell me about the situation with the Oni and it sounds like they stick to the forests only attacking when humans wander outside the walls, but what is more troubling is it sounds like they actively seek out dungeons¡­


    Yuji is the only defense I got up at the dungeon. I didn¡¯t think I would have to worry about dungeon seeking monsters, so I thought we would be fine for now. Maybe I should get back and put up some more defenses.


    ¡°Thanks for the information, maybe I will talk to the other villagers next time I stop by, but I should take a few of the commissions and get to it.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°You¡¯re not going to stay here?¡±


    ¡°Well I will be in the area, but my group has a camp out there, I came to see what the commission situation was here and get a bit more information on the area. I don¡¯t want to leave them alone for too long.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°¡­ Well you are more than welcome to bring them here to rest where it is safe.¡±


    ¡°Well I appreciate it.¡±


    I then leave Tatsuo taking a few of the commissions for the Oni and then prepare to head up to the temple. I find the gate the old men arrived from earlier that leads up to the temple. The guards were so worried about me leaving the wall by myself they almost didn¡¯t allow me to leave, but I eventually managed to talk them into letting me out.


    I head up the path up the hill to the temple. When I arrive I find Yuji is working away on the temple without a care, and I receive a message


    Monsters have returned from battle.


    Battle Results:


    Acquired: None


    Losses: None


    100xp gained from external source. 10xp bonus for Inari (Dungeon Core) participation


    110xp total rewarded


    I set up Yuji¡¯s equipment that I summoned for him where he has access to it and then tell him. ¡°I set [Menu] so that you can equip the gear I summoned for you. There are some pretty dangerous monsters in the forest. Don¡¯t let you guard down.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress! I am so glad to see you made it back!¡±


    ¡°Did you hear me? Have you seen anything suspicious?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°No¡­ It has been pretty quiet all day.¡±


    ¡°Well just to be safe put on your equipment.¡±


    Yuji taps on his [Menu] equipping a set of black clothing that covers his entire body including his face, the clothing is re-enforced with leather. It looks kind of strange to me, but when I summoned it I searched for equipment relevant to his class and that¡¯s what it showed so it should be normal.


    He also has two steel swords that have the basic construction the same as Takeshi¡¯s sword but one is 2/3 the size and the other is even smaller. After looking over the equipment he seems satisfied and pulls a piece of cloth covering his mouth down below his chin then returns to work on the temple.


    ¡°Well I am going to the core room for a bit to see about coming up with a bit of defenses, because from what I heard we seem to be lucky the monsters haven¡¯t attacked us yet.¡±


    I transfer to the core room and then begin looking through [Menu] I thought about surrounding the temple with a wall, but by what Tatsuo said they will go through a wall to get to a dungeon. The elemental creatures would be the strongest to form a defense, but they seemed to shrug off most attacks except the light spells.


    Unfortunately light monsters are all really high level, so I won¡¯t have any of them for a while. I made sure to tell Tatsuo I had a group so maybe I should just summon a few more beastkin. They don¡¯t reach a max level but their power level compared to normal monsters are a lot lower for their cost at the beginning.


    If Takeshi was here we could train them and it would make it quite a bit easier. For now I think that would be the best bet so I put in 4 beastkin (fox) with random traits.


    After the light fades I am left with 2 female and 2 males. The first being a male has quite impressive build, but still isn¡¯t no Takeshi¡­ he has brown colored hair and fur. The next two are the two females, even though they both have long red hair, fur, and could easily pass as twins in facial features their bodies appear almost completely opposite.


    Even though they both appear to be around 20 years of age, one is short petite with almost no breasts, while the other ones body is almost a fox version of Auntie Bell. The last is the other male has white hair and fur although where mine is snow white his is far closer to a grey color.


    As they start to look around their surrounding the white haired one seems instantly interested in the big breasted one next to him, the petite girl quickly begins to blush as red as her fur covering herself with her hands and tail, and backing up from the group.


    The first male seems to be blushing as well covering his crotch with his hands and looking up and to the side away from the rest of the group.


    While the big breasted one appears to have a body of Auntie Bell, her personality seems closer to Auntie Zoey because her first movement is to wrap her arm around the white fox male pressing her breasts against his shoulder.You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    He seemed to be interested before but now even he begins to blush as he tries to hide his crotch as he begins to have an erection. For future reference I will have to remember to only summon one at a time¡­


    After summoning clothes on each of them they fall back into the line, they all then take a knee and bow their heads.


    From left to right I point to each one giving them names and confirming it with [Menu] the brown haired male I name Satoshi, the petite redhead is Saki, the Auntie Bell like one is Akane, and the white haired male is Ryota.


    Group: ¡°Yes Mistress.¡±


    ¡°Alright Satoshi, let¡¯s see what classes you have available¡­¡±


    The classes available are Shima related¡­ I don¡¯t know what half of them mean, but a monk I think is about the same as a martial artist, and it looks like it would be the best fit for him so I choose it. I then bring up his status page and search for relevant equipment.


    It looks like I was right, it doesn¡¯t appear there is much in the way for weapons or armor for the monk class. Next I move on to the petite redhead, even though I still have a younger appearance she is still slightly shorter than me.


    ¡°Saki, let¡¯s see what would be good for you.¡±


    Again the classes mean nothing to me, but I spot one that appears to be magic related, and magic classes are the hardest to learn so I quickly select that one. After searching equipment for by class it appears I was right because it looks like the Miko class uses a staff of sorts and even though it doesn¡¯t appear to be a robe it is classified under that section of equipment.


    Using [Menu] it should be the correct size but the outfit looks to just add a few layers to her kimono including a weird bulky layer that looks almost like pants¡­


    ¡°Well Akane you remind me of my Auntie Bell, but I already gave Satoshi a monk class so let¡¯s see what we can find for you.¡±


    Her list of available classes is the best so far, however none appear to be magic based, so one of the classes is in the advanced category I select it. The armor for the Sohei class is leather, but the weapons cover a wide verity, but I choose the first on the list that turns out to be a spear looking thing called a naginata.


    ¡°We ended up with a lot of attacking classes it looks like, hopefully we can get another defensive class or a magic class for you Ryota.¡±


    Ryota: ¡°¡­¡±


    Nothing seems to jump out at me in Ryota¡¯s options, Takeshi has pretty good defense so when I see his class available I select it, but when I check equipment available I am quite surprised, Takeshi told Daddy medium armor and a big sword, but by what is available to the class it seems like it is everything from swords and shields, to spears, and even bows. I spend the most xp of any of them so far to give him a heavy armor, sword, and a shield.


    ¡°Well I don¡¯t know when will be able to start your training but for now, we got some work to do.¡±


    I transfer the 5 of us back to the temple, and call Yuji over. I then introduce him to everyone and then begin to have them help with the repairs. I then head back to the core room to see what else I can do.


    The building Yuji slept in last night isn¡¯t big enough for everyone, one of the other buildings on the grounds looks like a large storage building, after spending about 300xp for beds, and another 200xp for other miscellaneous items, and I manage to turn it into a barracks with half a dozen beds.


    The smaller building has enough room to squeeze in one more bed for 50xp, and the other one was in pretty poor shape so I break it down then summon another bed for 50xp. Now the girls can use that building as their room.


    I am the only one that can cast magic except Saki and she had a favored element of light, but she doesn¡¯t know the [Clean] spell. I am not going to cast [Clean] on everyone all day so I spend another 250xp to convert another small building into a bathhouse.


    I then spend 1200xp on adding some traps down in the well to protect the crystal. After that is done I look at the time, it looks like I have hit the 48 hour mark since I started my dungeon. What is taking Takeshi so long¡­I thought an elder would have been able to teleport him relatively easy.


    I transfer back to the others. I first grab Akane and Saki and show them where they will be staying, I then show them to the bath and tell them to go ahead and clean up. While the girls are busy there I gather the guys and show them the barracks.


    ¡°The girls are in that building over there, I turned it into a bathhouse. After they are done you guys can get washed up. I guess if Takeshi isn¡¯t here by morning we will start training you guys.¡±


    After leaving them I check out the work they managed to accomplish on the temple. It is coming around quite nice, and even once of them seems to have found some incense in which they have burning at the shrine.


    I walk over to the shrine and put a hand on it.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if you were a dungeon core, something humans made up, or an actual god, but I will take this name of ours and I will do my best to make that name mean something again to the people of Shima.¡±


    I then make my way from the temple patting one of the fox statues on the head as I go. I then head to the edge of my boundary looking down the hill to where Kabemura is located. Even after knowing it was there I couldn¡¯t really make it out though the trees, but now that the sun has begun to set I can see a few lights in the distance that must be coming up from there.


    As I start to turn around walking back towards the temple I think I see some of the trees rustle but, after preparing for battle and then waiting for a few more minutes nothing else happens. Just in case something really is there hiding in the trees I make sure I step out of view of the tree line before transferring to the core room.


    I continue to watch though the screens for over an hour. The only thing I manage to see is two of the guys trying to sneak a peek while the girls bathe. Ryota I wasn¡¯t actually surprised about, but the one with him was Yuji, which I was quite surprised about.


    Saki however notices them almost instantly and screams. They ran off with their tail¡¯s between their legs after that, but apparently it was too soon because Akane seems to spend the next few minutes seemingly inviting their gazes before peeking out and noticing they are long gone.


    I am going to have to tell her she needs to show more restraint¡­ At least until I decide if I want any of them first... I got a feeling if I keep waiting on Takeshi, I will be waiting a long time¡­


    Well I guess I was just seeing things in the forest¡­ After the girls let the guys know the bath is free they go to bed, and so do I. I wake up the next morning without an alarm so seems the old men aren¡¯t coming back today.


    Yuji and Satoshi already seem to be hard at work, but the girls and Ryota are still sleeping. This Kimono I got from Mommy is the best, but I have already been wearing it for three days now so I decide to summon another one.


    After having to put them on by hand for the first two weeks, using [Menu] is so much easier. After casting [Clean] on myself I equip the new kimono, then clean the other and leave it lying on the bed for now while I transfer to the courtyard near Yuji and Satoshi.


    Being a monk I didn¡¯t summon anything else for Satoshi, but even Yuji is just wearing his normal clothes again and not his armor.


    ¡°Yuji! What did I tell you about your equipment...? Well I guess it is alright, but make sure you can use [Menu] to equip it quickly just in case.¡±


    I walk up to Satoshi, he seems to be cutting some lumber down to size, but when I get close he stops. I straighten out his kimono a bit. I then loosen it up a bit to expose a bit more of his muscular chest. He blushes a bit but doesn¡¯t say anything as I walk away he returns to work.


    ¡°Yuji you haven¡¯t seen the old men this morning have you?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°No Mistress, but if it is as dangerous as you said, they might not want to risk it 3 days in a row.¡±


    ¡°Well it was only the one guy the first day, but maybe you are right. Why don¡¯t you go get Ryota up?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Yes Mistress¡­¡± ¨CHe scampers off towards the barracks.-


    I go check on the girls and when I enter Saki appears to have already awaken and was preparing to leave the building wearing her entire outfit including the bulky layers, Akane on the other hand is spread across her bed in a very undignified manor.


    Saki: ¡°Good Morning Mistress.¡±


    ¡°I thought you were both still asleep, do you mind waking Akane before you get started?¡±


    Saki: ¡°I¡­ Yes Mistress.¡± ¨CHer ears droop as she turns back around.-


    Though her appearance is that of someone older than me she is still a bit shorter so I can¡¯t help patting her on the head and scratching her behind the ears. She doesn¡¯t object, as a matter of fact it causes her ears to perk up a bit and she is smiling even though her head is bowed and she is blushing.


    When I quit one of her ears twitch and she then turns to wake up Akane, I then head out of the building back to where Satoshi was working. Yuji has seemed to have returned and Ryota has joined them, but he is just standing there sleepily.


    ¡°Well I guess once Saki manages to get Akane up we will then go try to do a bit of training.¡±


    Ryota yawns as he says. ¡°What about adventurer IDs won¡¯t we need them if we are hunting monsters for a commission.¡±


    ¡°I told them in town I had a group, but nothing else. Even the basic adventurers in town appear to be at least level 10, so I think we should get you guys at least to that before we risk getting you guys IDs.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Won¡¯t that be suspicious in itself?¡±


    ¡°Maybe a little, but not as much as being level 1 wandering the forest I think.¡±


    It takes about 5 minutes before Saki and Akane arrive, and even though Saki¡¯s attire was flawless a bit ago it looks just as ruffled as Akane¡¯s. Once they reach the group Saki attempts to fix it, but there is a sudden loud noise that causes everyone to jump.


    Voice: ¡°HELP!!¡±


    ¡°That was down the path down the hill!¡±


    After a quick fumbling of [Menu]s everyone is equipped in their gear. I wish I had my staff Daddy made for me, I checked inventory after I first arrived but the only thing I had was the clothes on my back¡­ Oh well nothing I can do about that now.


    I rush to the edge of the hill looking down the pathway. There seems to be 5 figures a ways down the stairs, 2 on the ground and three towering over them. I think the three are Oni. I rush down the stairs as quick as I can, but as soon as I hit the first step all three Oni instantly stop their attack on the other two and turn in my direction.


    They seem completely oblivious of the two they were attacking just seconds before and now all three are charging up the stairs towards me. Other than my magic abilities my endurance and agility are my second best stats so I quickly leave the others behind.


    Most of the elemental attacks seemed not to do a lot of damage, but I they might at least distract them. As soon as the Oni come into range I summon 12 of the balls, I use the strongest light spells, but use smaller spells in the other elements to try to conserve magic.


    The two brightest balls target one Oni, while the other 10 split hitting the other two. The Oni hit by the two light spells instantly stops moving crumbling to the ground sliding down a few of the stairs. The other two just appear angry.


    A small little [Piercing Light] spell passes by me and I notice that the others have begun to catch up. Saki is standing there with a troubled expression after casting the spell. The small spell hits the Oni, and for being a spell from a level 1 spell it actually seems to do a fair amount of damage.


    These Oni appear really weak against light attack spells. Everyone is only level 1 so I am afraid they will die after a single swipe from these things so I quickly summon another 12 balls in the same configuration as last time.


    This time however 10 balls hit 1 Oni, and the 2 brighter light balls hit the other killing it as well. Even with all 10 hitting the other he barely seems fazed, I don¡¯t know if it is due to the lower power spells or just they are strong against other types of magic.


    ¡°You are not ready yet, don¡¯t try to block! Let it focus its attacks on me while you just try to damage it.¡±


    I was a little worried about them catching a stray blow, but after a few seconds I come to realize this Oni thing has a singular unyielding focus right on me¡­ At the moment it is proving beneficial as I just side step and hop back dodging its blows as the others slowly build up damage against it.


    ¡°Saki, you go check on the humans and see if they are still alive or need healing!¡±


    Saki nods and continues down the stairs while I decide to save my spells unless it decides to change targets, but after a couple more swings it still doesn¡¯t lose its focus on me and it starts to get on my nerves to the point I begin casting a light spell taking it out.


    ¡°Alright gather their tusks, heart, liver, and their right ears. I am going to go make sure Saki has things under control.¡±


    They look a little confused at first but nod and begin to work on the Oni while I continue down the stairs. Once I reach Saki she is healing wound on Tatsuo¡¯s chest, while a familiar looking old man looks beyond the point of being able to heal.


    Tatsuo wincing in pain chokes out the words. ¡°Damn old man, I told him that old temple wasn¡¯t worth it¡­¡±


    I begin casting a healing spell as well speeding up the process a great deal. After his wound is finally healed he pulls himself to his feet.


    Tatsuo: ¡°It¡¯s you¡­ Sorry I was just a little surprised, I should be grateful anyone was around.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s alright, what were you two doing?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°The old man had some crazy idea about the old Inari shrine, saying Inari was back, and something about the shrine starting to heal or something. I was just trying to humor the old man, but it looks like we ran out of luck.¡±


    ¡°I am sorry¡­¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I should of known better, but he was just so insistent¡­Wait is this your group? Are they all foxes?¡±


    ¡°Well what kind of Inari would I be if I wasn¡¯t surrounded in foxes?¡±


    Tatsuo chuckles a bit. ¡°The old man would have gotten a kick out of you¡­ So is this all of your group then?¡±


    ¡°Well at least for now, I am still missing one for sure, but I don¡¯t know.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Are they your siblings?¡±


    Royta comes walking up covered in Oni blood holding the Oni body parts in his stretched out Kimono. ¡°I got them all Mistress!¡±


    I sigh. ¡°No, more like servants, but they are all still pretty green¡­¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I see¡­ Not to sound ungrateful or anything, but what were you guys doing out here?¡±


    ¡°Well I told you because of my name I was interested in Inari, so we were up checking out the shrine when we heard the racket.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Well I better get the old man back to the village.¡±


    ¡°You need any help?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°After everything you have done already, I would hate to put you out anymore.¡±


    ¡°Satoshi! Come give Tatsuo here a hand.¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Yes Mistress!¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Satoshi?¡±


    ¡°Yes, this is Satoshi. The one that helped with your wound here is Saki. The one covered in blood there is Ryota. That black thing over there is Yuji, and the voluptuous one there is Akane.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°¡­Not only their equipment, but their names are from Shima as well?¡±


    ¡°Yea¡­¡±


    Satoshi helps Tatsuo carry the old man heading back to the village, we get attacked once more on the way but this time it is only one Oni. Once at the village I grab a sack having Ryota put the Oni parts in then cast clean on him.


    Several of the guards help Tatsuo, and he bids us farewell taking the old man. I have the new monsters wait at the wall having Yuji bring the sack of Oni parts and we head to the adventurer¡¯s guild. Instead of gold when turning in the parts I receive 4 slips of parchment that are each good for 10 gold worth of gold or services in Kabemura.


    We then head to the smithy, and we trade the 4 clubs from the Oni for another one of the slips of parchment. The smithy looked better than the one in Daddy¡¯s town, and on the inside it is leaps and bounds ahead of Daddy¡¯s.


    Where Daddy¡¯s smithy had a single smith dealing with the adventurer¡¯s repairs along with the townsfolks repairs, this smithy has 2 smiths just to handle adventurer¡¯s gear and 1 for miscellaneous tasks. One of the smith¡¯s wives even takes care of leatherworking.


    For now I take my 5 slips of parchment and Yuji and I return to the others. We head back out of town heading back up the hill towards the shrine, but we end up having to deal with 2 more Oni along the way.


    I was starting to wonder if they were exaggerating about the Oni presence but now that we have hit 5 already this morning maybe I was wrong, I debate a bit about taking the remains back to the village but decide once I store them in the dungeon inventory they will keep as long as need be without rot so it should be ok.


    Once we cross the threshold of the dungeon I receive a message.


    Monsters have returned from battle


    Battle Results:


    Monster Yuji (Boss) has gained 4 levels Monster Satoshi has gained 4 levels Monster Saki has gained 4 levels Monster Akane has gained 4 levels Monster Ryota has gained 4 levels


    Acquired: 2 Oni Hearts, 2 Oni Livers, 2 Oni Right Ears, 4 Oni Tusks, 2 Kanabo


    Losses: None


    300xp gained from external source. 30xp bonus for Inari (Dungeon Core) participation, 30xp bonus for Yuji (Boss) participation,


    360 XP total rewarded


    ¡°Well I wanted to give you guys some training this morning, but that wasn¡¯t quite what I had in mind.¡±


    The next few days continue that way, training the monsters in the morning, and working on the temple during the afternoon. We have been pretty lucky as the monsters enter the forest to gather lumber they haven¡¯t encountered any Oni.


    However any time I step one foot off of the top of the hill there is always a rush of Oni to attack me. It makes me wonder about few points what I heard down in the village. They said the Oni never have entered the temple grounds before, so maybe we are safe here.


    It also seems true they hate dungeon cores more than normal people or monsters as they always will bypass everyone just to come after me. It has proved to be beneficial though as it means using me as a shield the monsters have gained quite a few levels already.


    Nobody from the village has made any more attempts to visit the temple, but I have heard talk when I go down to the village about more and more Yurei sightings at the temple however¡­


    I still haven¡¯t messaged Daddy or Mommy, I want to wait at least a month to prove that I can do this, but I still haven¡¯t heard from Takeshi so I am getting worried, and wondering if I shouldn¡¯t break the silence.


    Late on the evening that marks my 14<sup>th</sup> day however I receive a message.


    Intruders have entered dungeon.


    It is awfully late. I quickly scan the screens and am filled with joy. I quickly transfer from the core room appearing not a few feet away startling him. He is carrying several large sacks that he lightly sets down while I wrap my arms around him burying my face into his broad chest.


    ¡°I am so glad you are here Takeshi!¡±

 Welcome Home Takeshi (Inari Arc)

    After a long hug and a few tears I try to kiss Takeshi but he stops me.


    Takeshi: ¡°Thank you for the sentiment Miss Inari, but that is something I cannot allow.¡±


    ¡°You are ruining our reunion¡­I have worked very hard the last two weeks, to have you finally arrive only to shun me.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I promised I would be your shield as long as you will have me, but that is the one line I cannot cross.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Who are you?! Unhand Mistress!¡±


    Takeshi quickly lets me go and takes a step back almost tripping over one of the large bags he set down behind him.


    ¡°Yuji quiet! This is Takeshi. He has finally made it home!¡±


    Yuji approaches skeptically. ¡°This is Mistress¡¯s lover?¡±


    I smile grabbing the front on Takeshi¡¯s shirt and blush, but Takeshi brushes off my hand saying. ¡°I am indeed Takeshi, I am Miss Inari¡¯s shield, I however am not nor will I ever be her lover.¡±


    ¡°You will have to excuse Takeshi he is a bit shy.¡±


    They both seem to ignore my comment as they begin to circle each other sizing the other up. Takeshi however ends it when he bows to Yuji causing him to jump a few feet back.


    Takeshi: ¡°You must be Miss Inari¡¯s boss monster. I thank you for taking care of her in my absence. Your training appears to be coming along quite well, but you still have a way to go before I can call you my equal, so I look forward to working with you.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress Inari spoke highly of you, so I hope you live up to our expectations.¡±


    ¡°Will you two quit the katana measuring contest, Takeshi and I have a lot to catch up on. Besides I assure you Takeshi wins that as well.¡±


    Takeshi then beings to blush, and Yuji looks disappointed. I meanwhile had over to the large sacks Takeshi arrived with to peer inside. ¡°So what did you bring me?¡±


    Takeshi rushes over and pulls the bag away. ¡°Hold on, I want it to be a surprise.¡±


    My face quickly sours and he picks them both up. ¡°Let¡¯s at least go inside first, I heard it isn¡¯t very safe for dungeon¡¯s out in the open like this.¡±


    ¡°How rude, this is my dungeon, but if you want we can take it inside, I will gladly show you to my bedroom.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Well if you are sure.¡± ¨CHe sets the bags back down.- ¡°Your father thought you might like to have this.¡±


    Takeshi removes my staff from one of the bags, kneels, and then presents it to me. I quickly snatch it up and hug it. ¡°Thank you Takeshi¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Your mother also sent you 10 more kimonos, I got my gear, I brought a communication parchment as [Communication] doesn¡¯t appear to work well way out here, and a few other things from your parents and even a few from Elder Madam Erin.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean [Communication] doesn¡¯t work well out here?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°That is what took so long for me to arrive, Shima is completely cut off from the other dungeons. You haven¡¯t tried sending your father any messages?¡±


    ¡°Well I wanted to wait a while to prove I could take care of myself. Is that why it took you so long to arrive?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Yes. After they told me they would not be able to teleport me to you I angered your father by telling Madam Erin how the communication parchment worked. However after finding out how close the adventurer¡¯s guild magic was to dungeon magic she was able to connect the teleport spell though the adventurer¡¯s guild network instead of the dungeons.¡±


    ¡°But you said you brought a communication parchment, shouldn¡¯t we be able to use [Communication] the same way?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Madam Erin isn¡¯t 100% sure on how well the communication parchment will work, but we know that there will still be up to 24 hours of a delay between messages in [Communication] even with using the adventurer¡¯s guild magic.¡±


    ¡°I wanted to wait two more weeks till I sent a message to Daddy, but maybe we should at least try it both ways just so we know for sure.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°You may want to wait till morning, not only is it getting late, but Madam Erin said that it is later on the mainland then it is here.¡±


    ¡°It was so late when I first arrived I didn¡¯t even notice¡­¡±


    Takeshi takes out two sheets of communication parchment, after taking a quick look at them he hands me the first. ¡°This one is for your father, and this one.¡± ¨CHe hands me the second.- ¡°That one is from Elder Madam Erin, and it looks like she already left you a message.¡±


    He is right. Taking the second parchment I see some writing on it in rather fancy handwriting.


    Dungeon Core #245 [Inari], I would like to apologize for taking so long to hold up on my end of the bargain, and I hope you do not take offense to it. I realize I should have mentioned the trouble in Shima after hearing your name, but that too was an oversight on my part. I had a nice chat with your Takeshi before I completed the teleportation spell, and discovered the miscommunication between his knowledge and the current Shima. It appears the dead zone that Shima resides in even extends to the knowledge that new monsters that are summoned under the Shima region as his knowledge of Shima appears to be rather dated. I don¡¯t know how much Shima has changed the last 30 years, but I hope you will be able to fill us in on the details. I hope Takeshi finds you in good health, and I would like to speak with you further at your earliest convenience.


    Dungeon Core #36, Elder Madam Erin


    ¡°Well I will send her a reply in the morning as well I guess. Takeshi I would take you to the core room but even though we have acquired a fair amount of xp from the Oni in the forest, your xp will also be beneficial to the dungeon until I can convince you to join me.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I am sorry Miss Inari, I promise to be your shield, but that is something I cannot do.¡±


    ¡°You being unable to gather xp with the rest of my monsters, and being unable to take you to the core room will be quite disadvantageous.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I can help train your monsters, help around here at the dungeon, and besides I am your shield so I can protect you while your dungeon monsters are away.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t plan on sitting on the sidelines like father.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Then I can protect you by protecting your crystal while you are away.¡±


    ¡°¡­Fine, Yuji, show Takeshi to one of the beds in the barracks.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Yes, Mistress. Takeshi, if you will follow me.¡±


    Takeshi nods picking up the larger of the sacks, handing me the other, and then following Yuji to the barracks. I take the other sack and transfer to the core room. I set the two communication parchments on my desk, and then dump the contents of the sack on my bed. There are indeed 10 more well-made kimonos each with their own unique design and color.


    I gather them up, quickly look in [Menu] finding an armoire, summon it into the core room, and then hang them all up within. I then take the other one I was wearing when I first arrived from mommy and hang it as well. Maybe the other girls will like the one I have on and the other two I summoned, they maybe not as good as mommy¡¯s but they are better than the ones they have.


    For now I just set the two spare kimono¡¯s on the desk next to the communication parchments, and make my way back to the bed to check out what else remains. There are few bottles of perfume, a brush, and a few other items that are obviously all from mommy. I gather them up putting them all on a small table next to my bed.


    One of the other items that catches my eye is an oddly wrapped package. There is nothing written on it but I feel it has to either be from daddy, or auntie Zoey with the way the package was wrapped. I decide to open the package and inside I find a stuffed snow white fox¡­


    I am not sure if daddy thinks it is a good gift to give beastkin stuffed animals that resemble them, or he does it as a joke, but I think most of my aunties have similar ones just like it. It does smell like daddy though so I find myself hugging it.


    When I set it on my bed I notice an odd jingling sound. I then notice it has a beautiful choker on it that appears to be too large for the stuffed animal, and stuffed inside is a little note.


    Hope you like the gift, Madam Erin said things are pretty hectic in Shima so I hope this finds you well. I decided to make you a choker like your mommy¡¯s necklace, but as I don¡¯t know what kind of monsters you will summon I just left several empty spaces for additions.


    Sure enough when I look back at the collar on the fox I notice a small beautifully carved fox made from pure diamond, and next to it is another fox made of amber. There are also quite a few other small rings that appear to be spaces for more if I decide to add them.


    I quickly set the letter down and remove the collar from the stuffed fox and wrap it around my own neck. I then take the stuffed fox up in my arms again hugging it while giving it a big whiff before setting it back down, picking the letter back up, and then continue reading it.


    Your mommy also sent along some items she thought you might like, I said you could summon your own, but she insisted that she send them anyway. Takeshi is strong so I doubt it will matter much so I didn¡¯t see the harm in it. Takeshi should have told you but just in case I will as well. Madam Erin requested we try communication parchment as it may prove easier to stay in touch than with [Communication] so I gave her the one she wanted and then included one myself. The one labeled No. 10382 is the one to contact me, and No. 10383 will be the one to contact Madam Erin.


    I would also remind you to be careful of Madam Erin. She may be an elder and she helped take Takeshi to you, but don¡¯t let your guard down when speaking with her. As I told you during your training that she once sent adventurers into my dungeon leaving me in a bad way just to gather information. Although I would still call her a friend I don¡¯t know if she is completely trustworthy either. Just keep that in mind if you decide to have further dealings with her.


    Mommy told me to tell you we both love you and to be careful. Remember that there are always others out there stronger then you, so make sure to make friends. Always keep a fair amount of xp on hand in case of an emergency and never overextend yourself. Try to use rift monsters as much as possible, and if you keep a balance on the mortality rate in your dungeon you have a better chance avoiding having heroes poke around in your dungeon.


    Dungeon Core #212 [Daddy]


    P.S. Please don¡¯t make Takeshi do anything he doesn¡¯t want to. He will take good care of you as long as you take care of him.


    ¡­I could of gone without the P.S.. The last few items appear to be a few books, a small stone fox, and a dagger. I am not sure what they are for, but maybe they are the items Takeshi said Madam Erin sent. For now I place them on the desk on the other side of the communication parchments.


    I quickly take a look around through my screens. Everyone except Takeshi and Yuji appear to be asleep already, and they still appear to be puffing their chests to one another, but it doesn¡¯t appear to be hostile. I then take off my kimono casting [Clean] on it, folding it up, and placing it with the other two I summoned on the desk.


    I then slip in between my sheets, I hug the stuffed fox, and then after watching Takeshi for a while I drift off to sleep.


    When I wake the next morning I look at the notice about xp consumption and xp acquired. I got 80xp from Takeshi, and my consumption is still only 3/week so I should be good for a while. Maybe I should start thinking about building the actual dungeon in the well now.


    I crawl out of bed, cast [Clean] on myself, as I walk across the room to choose a kimono for today. Takeshi shunned me again last night, but he is at least here so I am in a pretty good mood so I pick one that is of bright colors with pink petals making up the design on it.


    I equip it with [Menu], which is so much easier than doing it by hand. I then check out the items mommy sent for me. I find one of the perfumes that smells like flowers to match my kimono. There is also quite a bit of make-up, but I forgo most of it only putting on some stuff on my lips that make them glisten.


    After I am sure I am happy with my appearance, I check the screens to see how the others are faring this morning. Everyone except Ryota and Akane appear to be awake already. Saki appears to be praying at the shrine inside the temple, while the other three men are outside working on repairs.


    Satoshi appears to be working normally, but Takeshi and Yuji seem to be trying to one up one another. Both are bare-chested and are working enough that Takeshi is working up quite a sweat, although because Yuji is a dungeon monster his scraggly body is so dry it almost looks embarrassing.


    I sigh and transfer down next to Satoshi, I lean on his back while he works. He acknowledges my presence by saying ¡°Good morning Mistress.¡± But he just continues working with me leaning against him.


    The other two seem so preoccupied they haven¡¯t even noticed me so I call out. ¡°Yuji! What are you doing? Put your clothes back on you are embarrassing yourself.¡± I then put a little bit more of my weight on Satoshi as I say. ¡°But I am sure it would suit you rather well.¡±


    Satoshi appears to stop working for a second, but after putting his thumb in his mouth and making a grunting sound he then returns to work with a simple ¡°Thank you Mistress¡­¡±


    Takeshi and Yuji both are startled when I call out and both quickly drop what they are doing while Yuji puts his arms back in the sleeves of his kimono putting it back on with a sour expression, Takeshi hurries over picking his shirt up off of one of the rails pulling it back on over his head.


    I scratch Satoshi behind the ears while watching the other two fumble about, and then get up off of Satoshi walking towards the other two. ¡°I didn¡¯t say you had to put yours back on Takeshi¡­ I think I liked it better the other way around.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I¡¯m sorry Miss Inari, but I have to refuse.¡±


    Both men then quickly head over to me and kneel before me. ¡°You know I don¡¯t mind if you don¡¯t kneel, and Takeshi, I thought I told you to just call me Inari.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I¡¯m sorry Mi¡­ Inari, force of habit and all that.¡±


    Yuji looks a little upset but he simply says. ¡°Mistress, what would you have me do this morning?¡±


    ¡°Well it looks like the work is going a lot quicker now that Takeshi is around, but I think it is almost time for you all to start your training for the day. If you will go get Ryota up, I think I will show Takeshi around, and make sure he has been introduced to everyone.¡±


    Yuji¡¯s shoulders slump a little, but he nods, stands, and then heads off back towards the barracks.


    ¡°Well Takeshi, you met Yuji, and I am sure you met Satoshi this morning? What about Saki, did you meet her yet?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Indeed, Satoshi almost beat me up this morning, and I did see a young woman enter the temple earlier she seemed hesitant to approach so I left her be.¡±


    I nod and then lead Takeshi inside the temple. Saki doesn¡¯t appear to be praying anymore but she is lighting a few incense, and placing them at the shrine. ¡°Morning Saki, I heard you almost met my dear Takeshi this morning?¡±


    Saki quickly joins us blushing, while avoiding eye contact. ¡°Good morning Mistress¡­ I¡¯m sorry about earlier Takeshi-sama¡­ I saw you working with Yuji-san¡­ It was rude of me, sorry for not introducing myself.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°That is quite alright¡­ We were in a bit of a state, and I am sorry if I may have startled you.¡±


    They are both now avoiding eye contact while blushing, and I am growing bored, so I tell Saki, I am going to go wake Akane, which appears to brighten her day quite a bit. Takeshi and I then depart heading for the girls barracks.


    When we arrive Takeshi quickly stops in his tracks though. ¡°What are you doing?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°That is the ladies barracks, I can¡¯t go in there.¡±


    ¡°What is the difference, you even stayed in the core room with me for two weeks.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°We didn¡¯t have much choice in the matter.¡±


    I sigh¡­ ¡°Fine.¡± I enter the barracks, and find Akane spread out across her bed. The only one of my monsters that has less strength then me is Saki and she is even stronger than a normal human, so I grab ahold of bed and toss Akane from the bed without trouble. .Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.


    With a loud crash she falls to the floor, but without even opening her eyes she grabs around for one of her pillows. I quickly kick it out of her hand as she finds one and attempts to go back to sleep.


    ¡°It¡¯s time to start your training for the day. Get up.¡±


    Akane grumbles then says. ¡°Oh, Mistress. I thought it was Saki. Give me five more minutes and I will be ready.¡±


    ¡°Now!¡±


    Akane: ¡°Alright alright...¡± ¨CShe slowly pulls herself up from the floor. With her disheveled kimono and hair she sleepily walks out the door.-


    As I begin to follow her out, I hear her say. ¡°Oh¡­What do we have here?¡± in a seductive tone, and I find Takeshi standing outside the door blushing turning his head away from Akane¡¯s appearance.


    ¡°This is Takeshi. Takeshi this is Akane. She may look a little rough around the edges, but even with your level difference I am sure she could give you a run for your money.¡±


    Akane quickly grabs Takeshi pressing her large breasts that are already basically falling from her kimono onto him. ¡°So this is Mistress¡¯s lover? Mistress has good tastes.¡±


    Takeshi through his embarrassment says. ¡°I am indeed Miss Inari¡¯s shield, but I most certainly am not nor ever will be her lover.¡±


    Akane: ¡°In that case¡­¡±


    ¡°You most certainly will not, and while I am at it Satoshi is also off limits as well.¡±


    Akane: ¡°But Mistress! That¡¯s not fair! That only leaves Yuji and Ryota¡­¡±


    ¡°Well what¡¯s wrong with them?¡±


    Akane: ¡°I guess with a bit of work Ryota will be ok, but Yuji is a bit¡­¡±


    ¡°Well none of that matters right now, as it is time for you to begin training for the day.¡±


    Akane finally let¡¯s go of Takeshi, then quickly equips her gear with [Menu] forgoing the kimono for a short tight set of leather armor, with the low quality of the armor there are quite a bit of visible skin. It never bothered me before, but now I decide to summon a pair of normal clothes equipping them on her under her armor.


    Akane: ¡°Mistress, what is this?¡±


    Inari: ¡°It¡¯s almost winter. You can¡¯t be running around without any clothes on.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Can¡¯t I at least get a say in¡­¡±


    ¡°No!¡±


    Takeshi appears to be at ease a bit more now, and the three of us then head back to the area in front of the temple grounds. Saki has joined Satoshi talking and blushing happily as she holds a one sided conversation with him. Our arrival however silences her.


    ¡°Where is Yuji and Ryota?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Yuji-sama has yet to return Mistress.¡±


    ¡°I would say you two were already ready, but with [Menu] it should have only taken them a second longer. Akane, you got check to see what is keeping them.¡±


    Akane: ¡°But I was hoping to speak with Satoshi a little before¡­¡±


    ¡°Now!¡±


    Akane: ¡°Yes Mistress¡­¡± ¨CShe then disappears back around the building.-


    Takeshi: ¡°Are things like this every day? It seems as chaotic as your father¡¯s house¡­¡±


    ¡°They are at the point now they are just starting to get comfortable with their place, so now they are trying to push their boundaries. I just wish they were all as reliable as Satoshi and Saki.¡±


    Satoshi finally stops his work standing up. He rubs his large hands though Saki¡¯s hair causing Saki to blush, but she seems to be enjoying it. They both then join Takeshi and me.


    Satoshi: ¡°Are we going to continue like we have been Mistress? Or now that Takeshi has finally arrived are we going to return to town?¡±


    ¡°We are going to start off like we have been, but I will explain the rest when the others arrive.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I am actually quite surprised. With the way Madam Erin spoke about Shima I was afraid things would have been far more dangerous then they appear.¡±


    ¡°Well we aren¡¯t exactly sure why, but the creatures the villagers call Oni won¡¯t step foot on the hill top here, so we have been relatively safe within the dungeon, but once we step outside it¡¯s a completely different matter.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I see, Elder Madam Erin tried to catch me up as much as possible about the things going on here in Shima, but as Shima is a dead zone to the dungeons, she only heard the rumors.¡±


    ¡°We actually were very lucky, I hear the Oni destroy dungeons as soon as they form, and by the way they swarm me when we step foot off the hill I believe it. The fact I chose Inari¡¯s temple as a location for my dungeon might have very well been the deciding factor that we are still alive today.¡±


    Yuji finally returns with Ryota in toe, but neither is even in their combat gear yet.


    ¡°Yuji! What are you doing? We are waiting on you two and you finally show up, but are still unprepared.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I apologize Mistress¡­ I will get ready straight away.¡± ¨CHe slumps his shoulders as he quickly equips his gear with [Menu]. Ryota yawns and sleepily does the same.


    Akane: ¡°A shame any of Mistress¡¯s monsters would act with such disrespect is beyond me¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°You are one to talk, Mistress had to drag you out of bed personally, at least I have already been up and working for a few hours.¡±


    ¡°Enough! Now that Takeshi is here I would have liked to do things a bit differently, but unfortunately due to him not being bound to the dungeon it leaves us with little options. I have however decided with the progress you have all made, and the arrival of Takeshi will finally turn in some of them slips of paper we have been accumulating from the village. After your training today we will go down to the village, get all of you your adventurer¡¯s IDs, and spend the rest of the evening celebrating Takeshi¡¯s arrival.¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°You said you were going to start our training normally, but then we are going to do something different today?¡±


    ¡°Yes, as Takeshi cannot gather xp with you all to bring back xp to the dungeon, and you have all managed to reach level 10 I have decided after the initial first wave of Oni after stepping off the hill top you will all then proceed on your own for a few hours. I will then go with Takeshi showing him the area a bit more, and allowing him to get some xp of his own. We will then regroup at the base of the hill and then enter the village together.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°You are going to let me be in charge of the group?¡±


    ¡°Actually with her skills I believe Akane will be better suited for that task, but I expect you to make sure she stays on track.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°¡­Yes Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°Then if you are all ready, let¡¯s get started.¡±


    I head to the edge of the hill, and although it is a straight shot down the hillside as far as I can see though the trees without any appearance of Oni, I know as soon as I take a step forward that will change.


    I use [Menu] to pull my staff from the dungeon inventory, and when the others are in position I step forward. Things then continue much like they have the last 10 or so days. Roughly a dozen or so Oni appear from the tree line and make a mad dash straight for me.


    12 is still a bit much for the group to handle so I start picking off a few with a couple of them with my [Bullet of Light] spells, I use empowered magic skill to strengthen each spell powerful enough to drop one with each casting.


    Saki quickly joins me casting a weaker, but still effective [Bullet of Light] spell she too even uses empowered magic skill, but it still takes her two shots to take one down. Using the empowered magic skill causes the casting time of the spells to go up quickly, so by the time the Oni reach us there are still 7 remaining.


    That should be enough for the group to handle, but I just got my staff back and I am itching to use it again, so I dive into the fray along with Ryota, Satoshi, and Akane. Yuji has seemed to disappear, but I know it is just part of his skills as he randomly appears from the shadows, or a throwing knife will be flung from seemingly from nowhere to cause decent amounts of damage.


    Yuji has gotten good enough that even with the skill [Keen Eye], I still lose him in the shadows. After we take care of the 12 Oni more begin to filter in here and there and we take out a total of 15 before no more remain.


    The group then splits up to collect the required pieces from the oni. Saki is the only one that doesn¡¯t get her hands dirty, but she periodically casts [Clean] on the others. I was happy when she learned that spell¡­


    ¡°Alright, you all follow Akane¡¯s instructions for your hunt, and we will meet up at the base of the hill near the gate of the village in a 4 hours.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Alright you heard Mistress, let¡¯s get going everyone.¡±


    ¡°Now Akane, I am counting on your skills. Don¡¯t let me down, and bring everyone back safe.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Don¡¯t worry Mistress, I won¡¯t let you down.¡±


    The group then disappears into the trees. I then turn to Takeshi who is still waiting at the top of the hill. ¡°So are you ready for a tour?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°That was rather intense, are you sure they will be ok on their own?¡±


    ¡°They never attack in groups more than 3 or 4 when it is just the others. Its only when I am around that they roll out in large numbers, so just remember being with me might mean we have to deal with far more then they will.¡±


    Sure enough it isn¡¯t long and there are a 3 more oni exiting the forest heading straight for me. Takeshi draws his blade, and for the first time in a while we battle side by side again. With a group this size I try to conserve my magic just in case we begin to get swarmed so I dive in the middle of all three along with Takeshi.


    Takeshi has to work extra hard trying to protect me as they all have the singular focus on me, but with my staff now I am no longer worried about 3 simple Oni.


    Takeshi: ¡°This is quite difficult¡­They appear to be nothing more than large red goblins, but their actions are quite peculiar.¡±


    ¡°Like I said, they seem to really hate dungeon cores, so they always prioritize me as a target, even when it is disadvantageous for them. So far it has been a bonus because it allowed me to train the others up to level 10 without worry of them dying.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°That is worrisome for me however¡­¡±


    ¡°We have yet to see anything any stronger, just masses of these Oni things, so as long as that is all we have to deal with I think we will be fine. Now their tusks, hearts, livers, and right ears are all commissions down in the village, so if you collect them real quick we can get back to the tour.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°¡­Yes Miss Inari.¡±


    Takeshi then starts cutting open the oni. There isn¡¯t much to show him as there is only forest as far as the eye can see, but I mainly get to enjoy fighting Oni with him. After a few hours he has worked up quite a sweat, and we have killed no less than 20 Oni as we reach the village gate.


    While waiting on the others we end up having to fight 5 more oni much to the worry of the guards waiting just inside the gate, for worrying them I let them drag in the carcasses for the commissions. After all it sort of is my fault they appeared.


    The other group finally appears and although they seem to be bickering quite a bit they don¡¯t seem to be any worse for wear.


    ¡°So, how did your group make out?¡±


    Akane appears like she is about to answer but Yuji quickly steps ahead of her saying. ¡°We managed 10 Oni Mistress!¡± ¨CHe says with his chest puffed out.-


    ¡°That is it? Takeshi and I got 25¡­¡±


    Yuji¡¯s chest quickly deflates as Akane pushes him to the side.


    Akane: ¡°We may have only taken out 10 Oni, but we were careful and did so without much harm to anyone, and I feel confident in our ability to continue hunting on our own in the future.¡±


    ¡°And how did everyone do? Did they follow your lead?¡±


    Akane gives Yuji a bit of a sour look but she then says. ¡°Yes, everyone did like I asked and performed very well.¡±


    ¡°Well good. Now what are we waiting for, let¡¯s go have a celebration!¡±


    Everyone cheers, and we then call for the gatekeepers to let us in. This is the first time I have taken more the just Yuji with me to the adventurer¡¯s guild, and even though they knew about the others they are still quite surprised when we all enter the adventurer¡¯s guild.


    I turn in the Oni parts and then acquire an adventurer¡¯s ID for all of the monsters. Each one takes one of the slips of parchment but between what we have gathered so far we still have 75 slips of parchment left.


    The receptionist seems rather shocked that each of my monsters are only level 10, and she is rather impressed by the sheer number of Oni we have managed to take down. I have made a habit of coming in to turn in the oni parts every 2 to 3 days over the last two weeks, but she said that each time I bring in the oni parts it is usually equal to what normal groups do in a week.


    After speaking with the receptionist for a brief period, Tatsuo quickly enters the adventurer¡¯s guild.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Oh managed to catch you this time, your past two visits have been so short before I heard you have arrived, you had already departed again. And you brought all the others with you this time.¡±


    ¡°Yes, their training has paid off, so I decided to allow them all to get their adventurer¡¯s IDs.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I see, although the moment they fought against an oni and survived I am sure they were more than qualified¡­¡±


    ¡°Well I wanted them to at least reach level 10 before we got their IDs.¡±


    Tatsuo looks a little confused as he says. ¡°Well how could you know what level they reached without an ID?¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­Well¡­ I am a pretty good at judging such things¡­¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I see¡­ Well I had some matters to discuss with you, if you are not in too much of a hurry to get back to it.¡±


    ¡°Well since they acquired their IDs we were planning to have a small celebration, so we will be here for a while at least.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Good, that would help with one of the things I was wishing to speak with you about. It seems several of the shop owners began to worry about you not spending any of the gold you acquired from the commissions.¡±


    ¡°Well I have yet to acquire any gold. They have always given me these slips of parchment.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Well that is a pretty common practice in Shima, as gold is rather heavy, and with the oni about the caravans have to be as light as possible, the parchment actually is widely accepted around Shima.¡±


    ¡°At each one being for 10 gold, I don¡¯t see that effective for daily necessities.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Well they come in various sizes. Something you would have learned if you ever used any. You have been coming here for now just at two weeks now, so that leaves me to wonder how are you surviving all this time without even buying any supplies?¡±


    I see this conversation might take a while, so I hand Takeshi quite a few of the parchment slips and let him take the others to begin the celebration.


    ¡°Well we brought quite a bit of supplies with us, and the forest provides quite a bit as well. Our supplies however are beginning to dwindle so I do believe we will have to restock before too long.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I also noticed there is one in your group I haven¡¯t seen before.¡±


    ¡°Yes, he was the one I was saying that was running behind. He finally arrived last night, which is another reason for the celebration.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Another one making it all the way into central Shima completely alone, your group never ceases to amaze me.¡±


    Takeshi returns to me while the others have begun their celebration. ¡°Miss Inari, the others should be fine for a while now.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°You are the new one right? I am the villager leader here in Kabemura, my name is Tatsuo, Tatsuo Ito. It¡¯s a pleasure to meet you.¡±


    ¡°This is my lover Takeshi.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°It is a pleasure to meet you Tatsuo, and although I do protect Miss Inari, I assure you I am not her lover¡­¡±


    ¡°He is just shy.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I assure you that is not the case. Now Miss Inari, after the events with your Aunt Zoey, and Aunt Katie, I would rather not join the others in drinking. If it is alright with you I will instead take a few of these gold parchments and go acquire some supplies.¡±


    ¡°But you have to drink. I order you to drink with the others!¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I¡¯m sorry Miss Inari, but I must refuse. I promised to protect you, but I am not obligated to follow your orders as the others are.¡±


    ¡°Fine! Be that way!¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°¡­¡±


    Take bows to Tatsuo and myself then departs out the door of the adventurer¡¯s guild, and when I turn back to Tatsuo he seems at a loss for words.


    ¡°Was there something else you needed, it appears my evening has already been ruined, but I can at least salvage some of it with the others.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Oh¡­Yes¡­ It is about the old Inari temple. I know you showed an interest in it and now even from the wall it is possible to see repairs have been made to it. I was curious if your group was responsible?¡±


    ¡°Yes, we have been using it as a staging area and place to sleep. To thank Inari for using her temple we have been making the repairs.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°So it is true the oni don¡¯t attack on the temple grounds?¡±


    ¡°So far that does appear to be the case, but the area between the temple and the village has grown quite dangerous as you already know¡­¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I am sure some of the older villagers might be upset with you using the temple grounds, but as nobody else can really approach it, and you are fixing it up, so I don¡¯t think anyone has room to complain.¡±


    ¡°I assure you we are treating the temple with respect, Saki over there she was the one that healed you that one day, she is a priestess of sorts, and she has taking to praying and taking extra good care of the shrine itself.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Well you won¡¯t hear any complaints from me. I guess that is all the questions I had for now, so I will let you join your friends, they seem to be having a good time over there.¡±


    I then join the others in the celebration, it appears the fact none of them have ever eaten anything before is quite apparent as after this short time almost all of them are already drunk. Even Saki is sitting there with flushed cheeks as she slowly sips a tall mug.


    ¡°I know we are celebrating, but don¡¯t drink too much because we still have to get home after leaving here.¡±


    Ryota: ¡°But¡­ Mistress couldn¡¯t we just stay at the inn tonight?¡± ¨CHe says with slurred speech.-


    ¡°You know we can¡¯t. Now if you want to pack some up with you and bring it along, and drink it once we make it back then I have nothing against that. That¡¯s what I plan on doing.¡±


    They end up acquiring far more alcohol then they will need, but even after all that we are still far from hurting on the gold parchment slips. Takeshi returns shortly after with a large sack filled with supplies and he then returns the remaining gold parchment slips to me.


    ¡°Well that took far less time then I imagined, but we better head back before it gets too late.¡±


    It takes a while to gather the group back together, and they are not very coordinated, but we manage to get them outside and heading through the village. When we reach the gate however the guards are hesitant to let them out due to their condition.


    Once we finally do get out of the gate we are swarmed by several oni. It is nothing that Takeshi and I can¡¯t handle so we deal with them swiftly. I don¡¯t feel like messing with them at the moment so I leave the carcasses behind for the town guards and try to get the group up the hill back to the temple.


    We are attacked several more times along the way, and I learn even drunk and practically defenseless the oni still ignore the others trying to attack me. With the attacks and leading the drunken group it takes enough time that the sun has already disappearing behind the trees when we finally reach the dungeon.


    Monsters have returned from battle.


    I quickly scan through the battle results, but unfortunately it was as I feared. All the oni killed while I was with Takeshi didn¡¯t amount to any xp. I did at least get the bonus xp for my participation on the ones the others killed.


    Now that we have arrived at the dungeon Ryota, Yuji, and Akane quickly begin searching though their things pulling out some of the alcohol they brought with them. Satoshi and Saki however appear they have had enough.


    Saki: ¡°Mistress¡­ I am going to take a bath then head to bed if that is alright¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Oh that is a good idea. I will take one with you.¡±


    Saki looks conflicted but almost agrees before I interject. ¡°Yuji, sit down and drink your alcohol. Don¡¯t worry Saki I will go with you, and Takeshi can make sure the others stay out of trouble.¡±


    I do however snatch one of the bottles away from Ryota before following Saki to the bath. I haven¡¯t used the bath since I made it. I have just stuck to using the [Clean] spell, but I haven¡¯t really talked to the others much so this would be a good chance for me to bond with Saki a little bit.


    Besides I think she has just enough alcohol in her that I could get her to answer honestly without her normal shy reserved manner. Once we enter the bath I help her out of her kimono, then take mine off folding it nicely setting it on a rack.


    We forgo the cleaning as I just cast [Clean] on both of us. I light the fire to heat up the water, but I speed up the process with heating the water itself as well, and within no time we are both soaking in the large steamy bath.


    I then take a drink of the alcohol I snatched away from Ryota, and almost choke. This stuff is quite a bit different then the alcohol I drank with Auntie Zoey and Auntie Katie. Saki sits across from me with her blushed face sipping away slowly on some alcohol I poured for her.


    I kind of feel sorry for her. Even though her face is more mature then mine and quite attractive, her body is quite small and pitiful. She is a little shorter than me. Maybe about the size of that stupid rabbit of daddy¡¯s, but even daddy¡¯s stupid rabbit had breasts two maybe even three times the size of poor Saki¡¯s.


    ¡°So how do you feel things are going around here Saki?¡±


    Saki: ¡°I am glad Inari-sama has been taking good care of the shrine, I am glad to be part of the bringing Inari worship back to the people of Shima.¡±


    That is the first time I think she has ever said my name, although she did use that Shima form of mannerisms that she does. I know Yuji doesn¡¯t use them, but now that I think about it I don¡¯t think I have heard any of the others refer to each other by name, so I am actually not sure if any of the others do it as well.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you feel if the people of Shima return to worshiping Inari, they might mistake me as the actual Inari?¡±


    Saki: ¡°I have asked myself that question quite a few times. As Inari never answers my prayers, I can only base it on what I believe, but I think it might actually be a good thing.¡±


    ¡°How is that?¡±


    Saki: ¡°It has been so long since the time of the old gods, and nobody has heard from them since the birth of the dungeons, but I believe they are out there still somewhere. The fact the oni still cannot step foot here I think more than proves that. I think if the people of Shima see Inari-sama as a messenger of Inari, or even as Inari itself then it will give people hope. That is as long as Inari-sama doesn¡¯t disrespect Inari¡¯s name.¡±


    ¡°That seems like quite the burden you have placed on my shoulders¡­¡±


    Saki: ¡°I may not actually hear Inari speak, but I choose to believe that Inari has the confidence in Inari-sama, or Inari wouldn¡¯t have allowed Inari-sama¡¯s dungeon on its holy land.¡±


    ¡°And what are your thoughts on the oni? They look like weird large red goblins to me¡­¡±


    Saki: ¡°There have been legends on oni in all the history of Shima, but the truth is who really knows. Maybe the oni have always been a sub-species of goblin, or maybe these creatures are not true oni at all.¡±


    Saki seems to be looking at her cup in a strange manner so I refill it and she happily begins sipping it again. I don¡¯t know how much she drank before at the village, but I can¡¯t at least let this little thing put me to shame here, so I too take a few drinks.


    ¡°Well how do you feel about the others?¡±


    Saki: ¡°Inari-sama¡¯s other monsters? I haven¡¯t had a chance to get to know Takeshi-sama yet, but Yuji-san and Ryota-san are a bit troublesome. Akane-san is a strong and smart, but she is far more troublesome then the other two combined.¡±


    Saki takes another sip of her drink then grabs her cheeks blushing a bit while saying. ¡°Now Satoshi-san. I like Satoshi-san, but Inari-sama looks at Satoshi, like Yuji-san and Ryota-san look at Akane-san. I thought maybe it would be ok once Takeshi-sama arrived, but now I am not sure. I can¡¯t compare to Inari-sama¡­¡±


    I take another big drink of the alcohol. I knew to be careful about Akane, but now even Saki. I continue to talk with Saki for a while, and we continue to drink more. I have never heard Saki say a negative thing before, but while drunk she complains quite a bit about Akane.


    We almost finish off the bottle, but before we get the chance to Saki tries to crawl out of the bath only to roll around on the floor. I then get out of the bath and try to get her dressed. I can¡¯t be certain of how good of a job I did, so I just transfer her straight to her room and put her to bed.


    I then decide it would be a good idea to go to bed myself, so after putting Saki to bed I transfer to the core room and go straight to bed.

 New Arrivals (Inari Arc)

    It has been a few weeks since Takeshi¡¯s arrival and things are starting to reach a since of normality. After using a bit of xp to upgrade the protection of my crystal a bit my xp consumption has raised to 1xp/day, but with the amounts of xp that is easily available due to the Oni I see little problem.


    The village finally cut us off not allowing us to acquire any more compensation from the Oni parts, as we have single handedly caused a surplus of the items. Between Takeshi, me, and then the rest we have taken out a couple thousand Oni already.


    There still doesn¡¯t seem to be any shortage of them however. As every time I step foot off the mountain top we are still being attacked. All the Oni we have killed has managed to raise my monsters and Takeshi to a higher level then myself, but with their slower progression I still remain confident in my abilities.


    We have also finally managed to complete the repairs on the Temple and grounds to the best of our abilities. Upon its completion I received a new skill called Inari¡¯s Blessing (Rank 1), and it granted a sizable bonus to my abilities, but not anything else.


    I am starting to wonder though with the protection that is around the hilltop, and gaining this skill. Is it possible that the old gods truly do exist?


    We receive our first bit of panic from the villagers when a large group enters the temple grounds one morning. Since we have supplied the village with so many Oni parts the adventurers that haven¡¯t moved on now have to seek other types of commissions, so they were left escorting a group of the older villagers to the temple.


    Old Villager: ¡°It looks just like I remember it¡­¡±


    Saki: ¡°Thank you, we have tried our best to restore it since Inari is allowing to use the grounds.¡±


    Old villager: ¡°I have to admit, when I heard foreigners. Beastkin adventurers no less¡­ Moved onto the temple grounds I was infuriated, but I now see you really seem to be mindful of respecting Inari.¡±


    Saki leads the old villagers to the shrine to pay their respects, and after a few hours of talking to the shrine and Saki they seem pleased as they leave heading back to the village.


    After that the villagers have reached their own conclusion about us... With our sudden appearance from nowhere, moving in and repairing the Inari temple, and helping in driving back the Oni there are rumors being to be spread that our group might actually be messengers for Inari.


    We never actively deny the rumors as they benefit us, but when we are confronted directly with it we change the subject or laugh it off being mindful to never confirm it either just in case. The villagers always treated us respectfully as adventurers, but since the rumors began to spread the respect towards our group seem more genuine then in the past.


    The training of the others has begun to slow considerably as not only does it take a lot more Oni for them to gain a level, but unless I am with them they actually finding it pretty difficult to locate any. We must really be making an impact on their numbers.


    The hunt for Oni has become scarce enough that the others are now going out to hunt a few days at a time instead of sticking close enough to return by nightfall. Even I managed to go down to the village yesterday without even getting attacked.


    With the addition of some of the elder villagers being escorted to the temple by adventurers, Tatsuo has even begun to make a weekly appearance to the temple. His attitude towards me has changed since the rumors begun. He always seemed to like me more than the villagers did, but with the rumors now he almost seems wary of me when he visits.


    This visit however he seems extremely nervous as he makes his way up the steps while speaking with a huge wolf beastkin woman. However when she reaches the top of the hill she wears a confused expression standing just outside the grounds of the temple.


    ¡°Elder Madam Erin? What are you doing here?¡± ¨CI say as I approach the pair.-


    Tatsuo: ¡°So you do indeed know this woman?¡±


    ¡°Of course, she is my father¡¯s¡­ Well she helped him out when he needed it.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Well I am glad to see you doing well. I haven¡¯t received any messages from you in a few weeks.¡±


    ¡°I apologize¡­ Nothing has really changed, and I figured you were too busy to hear about the day to day things going on¡­¡±


    Tatsuo seems confused at the conversation, but he is remaining quiet.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Maybe we should step inside? We haven¡¯t seen any Oni thus far, but I would hate to stand out here in the open and press our luck.¡±


    Madam Erin looks at the top of the landing in front of her. ¡°Perhaps Inari will join us back at the village for a conversation?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°We just made it here¡­ Surely we can talk in the safety of the temple grounds?¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°I like to speak over a drink, and a temple is not exactly a place for such behavior now is it?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°But after coming all this way¡­¡±


    ¡°I will let the others know I will be gone for a bit.¡±


    I head into the temple then message Takeshi. ¡°Elder Madam Erin has shown up unexpectedly, she for some reason doesn¡¯t want to speak inside my dungeon, so she has requested I meet her down in the village.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Are you sure that is wise? Remember what Mistress said.¡±


    ¡°I understand, but she has come all this way, I should at least hear her out.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Very well, I will get ready immediately.¡±


    ¡°No, the others only left yesterday, and shouldn¡¯t return for a few more days. I need you to stay here and keep an eye on the place while I am gone.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°But I am your shield.¡±


    ¡°And by being my shield you will protect the dungeon while I am gone. I seriously doubt an elder would attack me, and with her around I doubt we have much to worry about from any outside threat.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Very well¡­ But Miss Inari, please be careful.¡±


    I take my staff from the dungeon inventory, and change my kimono to a lightly reinforced one that I had them make me down in the village, and I then rejoin Tatsuo and Madam Erin. After my return we begin to head back down to the village.


    Madam Erin and Tatsuo didn¡¯t say anything about being attacked on the way, and nothing came out of the forest when I left the hill top, but I thought with two dungeon cores the Oni wouldn¡¯t have been able to resist.


    Maybe we have thinned out their numbers so much they don¡¯t have the numbers to attack¡­ That line of thinking is however quickly dismissed with the appearance of a dozen Oni and another creature that shares their traits but appears far larger and more menacing then any Oni I have seen before.


    Tatsuo begins to panic when the Oni begin to pour out of the forest, but with the appearance of the larger more menacing Oni his face loses color.


    Tatsuo: ¡°It can¡¯t be¡­ There has never been an Oni General seen anywhere near these parts¡­¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°This looks quite fun. Do you got it, or do you need some help?¡±


    I look to Tatsuo and then say. ¡°I think we should take this threat seriously Madam Erin.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Fine, fine¡­¡±


    Without another word Madam Erin practically disappears as she leaps through the air so fast I can¡¯t even follow her movement. She clears the entire group of Oni to land next to the larger more brutish Oni.


    They are roughly the same size, but Madam Erin simple grabs the creature¡¯s head in one hand and beings beating the normal Oni using the larger one as a club. I quickly begin to cast [Bullet of Light] spells at the Oni that are being flung around like dolls.


    They don¡¯t stand a chance, but they don¡¯t ever give up either. They just keep getting back up and charging either Madam Erin or myself until there isn¡¯t a single one left alive. Madam Erin finally drops the larger more brutish Oni with little more than his head and half of his torso still connected together.


    After rubbing her hands together she says. ¡°Well I guess that took care of that, we should go before the other group makes it to us.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Other group?¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Yea, the others will be here in a few hours if they maintain their current speed.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Wait¡­ A couple hours? How do you know that?¡±


    Madam Erin brushes her nose with a finger. ¡°Being part wolf has its advantages.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Well if Madam Erin says it to be true, so I take her word for it. We better hurry then.¡±


    Tatsuo is speechless as we continue our way to the village. Once arriving in the village we make our way to the adventurer¡¯s guild and have a seat. Madam Erin orders a couple drinks and once we sit down she looks over to Tatsuo who has joined us.


    ¡°I appreciate you showing me the way to the temple, but now I think its best if I spoke with Inari alone.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Oh¡­ Of course¡­¡± ¨CHe looks hesitant, but he gets up and starts to walk away but stop.- ¡°But if you need anything I will be just over there.¡±


    Madam Erin nods and waits till after he is out of earshot before talking.


    Madam Erin: ¡°You seem to be fitting in quite nicely around here.¡±


    ¡°I was extremely lucky with my placement, anywhere else and I think I would have been overrun.¡±If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Madam Erin: ¡°I see¡­ I am interesting in hearing more about your ¡°Base¡±. ¡°


    ¡°Well there isn¡¯t much to tell. Anytime I step foot off the hilltop I am attacked like earlier, but there seems to be some kind of protection around the temple grounds that the Oni can¡¯t cross, so as long as my ¡°Base¡± is there I should be safe from them¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°I have seen others choose old temples or churches as locations for their base, but I have never seen anything quite like yours. Does it have any added benefits other than the local monsters being unable to enter?¡±


    ¡°You think I would just freely give that kind of information about my own base?¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Well it was worth a shot, but I think I found out the information I wanted just by paying you the visit, so it was well worth the trip.¡±


    ¡°That must have been some bit of information you found out, as this couldn¡¯t have been an easy trip.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Not at all. After your little friend gave me the helpful information about the adventurer¡¯s guild magic, I can come and go as a please now.¡±


    ¡°Well I am glad you seem to be enjoying yourself, but is there something you actually want to talk to me about?¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°As we have discussed, Shima has been much of a dead zone since the arrival of these goblin like creatures the locals are calling Oni. Now that there is an active core in the area I thought it would be a good time to do some digging.¡±


    ¡°They seemed to no problem for you though, so why wait all this time to investigate, it just seems odd to me that after all these years only now you decide to check it out.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Well with no cores in Shima before now there was little reason to, and it¡¯s not like Shima is the only place where cores die not long after their birth, but after your messages about the behavior of the Oni creatures I thought it would be worth checking out.¡±


    ¡°I too would like to know why they seem dead set on single-mindedly killing me, after all they only attack humans if it¡¯s convenient. Like the walls around this town, if they wanted to they could walk right though them but they are enough to deter them from trying.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°I am also curious about their reluctance to enter the temple grounds. If there really is power remaining from the old gods, is this temple of yours a unique instance, or are there other shrines or temples dedicated to the old gods out there that still hold some of the old god¡¯s magic?¡±


    ¡°Well, all I know of the old gods is they predate the dungeons, and haven¡¯t been heard of since the arrival of dungeons. In that sense Faron might have been right, maybe the dungeons are a replacement for the old gods.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Well Faron doesn¡¯t need any help letting the power of the humans worshiping him going to his head, but perhaps you are right. As far as I know this old god Inari, wasn¡¯t even one of the major gods though, so why is this temple still active when most of the others, including those according to the humans are of far greater power, and have still faded from existence.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know, but what I do know is as long as this power remains I will continue to treat Inari with respect.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Well then I guess that concludes our discussion then, besides we have gained a few extra pair of ears as well.¡±


    At that mention not only Tatsuo, but several of the others in the building quickly advert their gaze. Madam Erin then rises from her chair and walks out the building. After Madam Erin is gone Tatsuo returns to the table with a troubled expression.


    Tatsuo: ¡°I apologize if I may have heard some of your conversation, but I was wondering if I could ask you a few questions?¡±


    ¡°Well I thought we had a bit of a better relationship to you resorting to eavesdropping, and as such I don¡¯t really feel inclined to fill in blanks to a conversation you were not even a part of.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Well I did apologize, but forgoing the conversation. Can I at least ask you some other questions then?¡±


    ¡°Well when we came down here Elder Madam Erin said there was a large group of Oni that would arrive in a few hours, so I would suggest your time would be best used in preparing for that. That being said I must get back to the temple as well just in case.¡±


    Tatsuo looks a little upset at me, but he eventually nods, and I then depart from the guild as well heading back towards the dungeon. I have to deal with a few stragglers on the way back but nothing a few [Bullet of Light] spells can¡¯t handle,


    When I arrive back at the dungeon I quickly read though the ¡°monsters returned from battle¡± message and then closes it. I then go to find Takeshi who I find sitting quietly in the temple.


    Takeshi: ¡°I am glad to see you return unharmed.¡±


    ¡°Well like I said, I doubt an Elder would come all this way to cause any harm, but I am still left to wonder what exactly she did want for paying us a visit why out here.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°So you were unable to uncover any useful information?¡±


    ¡°Concerning Elder Madam Erin, unfortunately no, but we did come across a tougher version of the Oni on the way down to the village, and by what Elder Madam Erin said it appears there are quite a few more heading this way.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Do you think they will enter the dungeon?¡±


    ¡°Well I can¡¯t say how strong the protection around this place is, but I think we should at least be on guard just in case. I will also send a message to the others to return as soon as possible. Elder Madam Erin seemed to make the tougher Oni look like they were nothing, but by Tatsuo¡¯s reaction I don¡¯t think we should underestimate them, and I am not sure if the others are ready to take on something like that.¡±


    Takeshi nods and then returns to what he was doing. I watch him for a minute and he appears to be taking care of the shrine much in the way that Saki usually does when she is here. I send Akane the message to return along with the warning of the tougher Oni.


    ¡°Takeshi, what exactly are you doing?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Saki asked me to care for the shrine in her absence, so when they go out training I make sure it is taken care of.¡±


    ¡°The shrine sat neglected for 30 years or longer, I doubt a few days will make a difference.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Saki is very partial to the shrine, and I figured that was the least I could do to help out. Besides I would think with the protection Inari provides you would be eager to keep Inari pleased with your presence in her temple.¡±


    ¡°I am not saying when Saki isn¡¯t around to disrespect the shrine, I am just saying I don¡¯t see the need to keep the incense burning and such.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Well Saki asked me to, so I am. Unless you plan to order me not to, but even then it isn¡¯t like I am one of your monsters that is required to follow your commands.¡±


    I narrow my eyes at Takeshi and am about to reply when I receive a message back from Akane that distracts me long enough that I miss the chance for the comeback.


    Akane: ¡°Yes, we have already noticed the great increase in numbers of Oni. In fact we were already on our way back to report the change and to regroup. We haven¡¯t seen any stronger Oni like you mentioned, but we have noticed they do seem a bit more aggressive, if not a little more intelligent as well.¡±


    I click my tongue and then tell Takeshi. ¡°Fine do what you like.¡± I then head out of the temple and then send another message to Akane.


    ¡°Great increase? I heard there was a large group coming, but for you to be able to notice the increase in numbers, just what size of a group are we talking about?¡±


    Akane: ¡°I honestly don¡¯t know, but I wouldn¡¯t use the word group as much as I would wave. They don¡¯t seem to be traveling like an army, but you can tell the groups slowly increasing in numbers. I think it would be fair to assume if they keep moving in the same pattern they are now they will easily replace the numbers we have cleared out the last few months, and then some¡­¡±


    ¡°You are saying there is literally thousands of Oni heading this way?¡±


    Akane: ¡°Like I said it¡¯s hard to be curtain with them traveling in no more than groups of 5 to 10, but I do think that would be a fair assumption.¡±


    ¡­Of course that might not be anything to an Elder, but thousands is just a large group to her¡­ Just how strong are the Elders?


    ¡°Alright, just get back here quickly and we will have to take some precautions just in case.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Yes Mistress, we should arrive at least a good hour before the Oni begin to arrive.¡±


    ¡°That is cutting it pretty close, but do what you can.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Understood.¡±


    I then head back into the temple. ¡°Takeshi, maybe you should get your gear ready. Elder Madam Erin, apparently downplayed the situation quite a bit, things might get pretty rough here pretty soon.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°How bad is it?¡±


    ¡°As long as they don¡¯t all hit us at once we should be fine, but hopefully the protection from Inari holds out¡­¡±


    Takeshi equips his gear and we wait for the others to return, when they finally arrive we can see the extent of the Oni from their appearance. None of them are injured, but by the state of their armor and kimonos you can tell they must have been in quite a battle.


    Their battle results message confirms it for the most part, the xp I acquired from them just from their two days out is equal to what they have been getting in a full week of training in the last few weeks. Once on the grounds most of them collapse with a sense of relief, but Akane quickly approaches.


    Akane: ¡°You were right about the tougher Oni, we encountered one about an hour ago. They are very formidable, we might have been able to defeat it if it was alone, but with all the normal Oni surrounding it, we were forced to retreat.¡±


    ¡°Wait you each can easily deal with one of the Oni on your own now, but to say it would take all 5 of you to deal with the new ones?¡±


    Yuji is lying sprawled out on the ground. ¡°I am sorry Mistress, but Akane is right¡­ If it wasn¡¯t for Satoshi¡¯s skill to transfer his magic to Saki and being able to heal as well we would of lost Ryota and Saki¡­¡±


    Saki: ¡°I am sorry we failed you Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°I should have warned you when I first heard of the Oni approaching. I underestimated them due to the way Elder Madam Erin mentioned them. Rest up for a bit then prepare, we don¡¯t know if the protection around the dungeon is going to hold out if that many head this way.¡±


    Akane nods and finally collapses with the rest. Curiously Takeshi moves over to Saki helping her back up and talks to her while helping her into the temple¡­ I must really have underestimated Saki as well, I am going to have to keep a closer eye on them two.


    For now though I need to focus on the dungeon, I have been putting off increasing the defenses of the dungeon because of the protection, but I better not put it off any longer. I transfer to the core room to work on the dungeon a bit.


    I bring up a screen of the temple and see Takeshi help Saki to a pillow in front of the shrine and as exhausted as she must be the first thing she does is begin to pray at the shrine while Takeshi takes a seat further back just watching her.


    Maybe I was concerned over nothing¡­ I keep the screen in view however as I begin to work on the dungeon. I haven¡¯t added much since my initial building of the dungeon, so there is a few traps set up in the rooms down the well, but I have little in the means of monsters.


    I haven¡¯t used much xp so I have a fair amount, but I still opt out of going deeper for now and add a few more rooms, filling them with more waterways and traps. I also decide to start summoning some monsters to protect me as well now.


    I add several schools of carnivorous fish into the waterways in each of the rooms. Light favored element monsters would be the most effective, but they are also the hardest to summon, so I have little available to summon.


    There are some weak spirit and wisp type monsters that favor the light element but even with their advantage I think it would take quite a few to take on a single Oni. I am not like Daddy so my only option for now is to summon a couple dozen of them and hope to unlock some stronger types, but even with exhausting half of my stored xp I still haven¡¯t unlocked anything.


    I didn¡¯t notice it before but my available monsters has a lack of non-elemental based monsters, like goblins, slimes, and such, so even though the Oni are strong against elemental attacks I still summon a few different types of elemental creatures to hopefully keep them busy while the wisps and light spirits do their thing.


    I still have quite a reserve of xp, but I decide to stop there to be on the safe side. I check on the others through the screens and they have begun to move around now going about their business. Saki is no longer praying at the shrine but she is still tending to things in the temple while Takeshi has appeared to step out for now.


    After a final look though the screens I transfer down to the temple grounds.


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress, we are ready if they attack. We will make sure they get nowhere near the well.¡±


    ¡°Well first thing this is to open of an area, if they manage to pass the barrier we will fall back into the well so we can bottleneck them, it would be pointless to try to defend the open area.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°But what about the temple?¡±


    ¡°They have always been focused on me anyway, so if we are down in the well I doubt they will even bother with it. Besides the temple can be rebuilt, but if they take out my crystal it would be all over.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I understand, but do you think Saki would agree?¡±


    ¡°Well maybe we won¡¯t have to even worry about it, but I am more worried about the village. Akane said they appear more intelligent than before, so they might actually attack the village now, and that wall will do little to stop them if they really tried to get through.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Well let¡¯s make sure we are safe first¡­¡±


    Time passes while we all gather in front of the temple waiting till late that evening, but we never hear or see any of the Oni.


    Akane: ¡°Surely by now many have already arrived in the area, do you think they just keep moving?¡±


    ¡°Well maybe, but I am more inclined to think their arrival wasn¡¯t an accident. We have been clearing them systematically from the forest, and I feel this is the response to that.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Maybe we should check to see if they are out there then?¡±


    ¡°Well the biggest problem is in preparation of making sure they don¡¯t storm the dungeon, I am sure they have had plenty of time to build up numbers outside in the forest there. Well we won¡¯t find anything out waiting in here, before we lose any more light we might as well check it out.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Maybe we should go first?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think we will really know what¡¯s out there unless I step out there.


    Takeshi: ¡°I don¡¯t know if that is such a good idea¡­¡±


    ¡°I also want you to stick back, we can¡¯t bring any xp back to the dungeon if you fight, so unless it¡¯s a life or death situation I want you to stay out of it.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°¡­¡±


    Saki lightly places her hand on Takeshi¡¯s chest. ¡°Don¡¯t worry Takeshi-sama. We have gathered quite a bit of strength, we won¡¯t let anything happen to Mistress.¡±


    Takeshi still looks a little concerned but he forces a smile then ruffles Saki¡¯s hair. Saki¡¯s sweet demeanor made me think she wasn¡¯t a threat like Akane, but she might be after Satoshi and Takeshi.

 Repercussions (Inari Arc)

    Author notes: (I wanted to start out with an apology it seems I somehow screwed up with the last Inari chapter and posted it before it was complete. Hell somehow it looks like it was even mid-sentence¡­ Another thing worth noting is after talking with a friend I decided to change the way Inari¡¯s monsters address her as Mistress instead of Master. I know that is technically the correct usage, but with the over sexualization of the use of Mistress I didn¡¯t think it sounded right, so going forward I plan on using the Mistress term instead.


    Anyway as always thanks for reading.


    Dragon_knight79347)


    With that we are then ready. When I cross the threshold of the dungeon all hell breaks loose. I don¡¯t know the number but it seems like a flood of Oni come charging up the stairs, and at least 1 out of every 10 are the new tougher Oni.


    I know we have no way of defeating this many so I step into the dungeon. Luckily as soon as I do they begin to slow their movement until they completely stop, and then they return to the forest on either side of the stairs.


    ¡°Well that is something they seem to at least not be able to pass the barrier still. I just don¡¯t know how what to do next. If we can¡¯t leave the temple grounds things will eventually turn pretty grim.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress, please allow us to go out.¡±


    ¡°Even if it is a small fraction that comes after you all you already said it would take all 5 of you to deal with one of the new type Oni, so you would have no chance against all that.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°But if we can step out and pick off a few at a time we might be able to at least start to dwindle down their numbers.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know by the way they acted it was as if I disappeared when I stepped back on the grounds, so if we push it to much they might be able to find a way in themselves.¡±


    Saki: ¡°Have a little faith Mistress, Inari will protect us.¡±


    ¡°One time¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, you can¡¯t actually be considering it?¡±


    ¡°We can hold up in here forever if we need to, stepping out and killing one Oni could last us weeks, but you will eventually need food. If we can¡¯t get back down to the village it will put us in a tight spot.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Then at least allow me to accompany them.¡±


    ¡°It will do us no good if you do.¡±


    Yuji seems proud of himself as he puffs out his chest.


    ¡°Alright Akane take them out slowly.¡±


    Yuji¡¯s chest then deflates.


    When the group first exits the dungeon it doesn¡¯t look good as quite a few Oni leave the tree line and charge, but luckily it is so far only the minor ones. The group quickly starts the battle and gets well over half of them dispatched before more Oni begin to arrive.


    They continue to battle for quite a while, but no matter how many they dispatch there seems to be no end of the Oni, so far however none of the Oni are of the new stronger and smarter type.


    After Saki appears to be drained I recall them back into the dungeon grounds and the Oni then start to disperse again. The battle results are quite high and everyone in the group has even been able to gain a level.


    ¡°Well it still looks pretty bad but if we can just keep it up like that maybe we will eventually be able to decrease their numbers at least until everyone is strong enough to deal with the tougher Oni. I believe to be on the safe side we should set up a watch tonight just in case.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I will take first watch!¡±


    ¡°I am still fresh so Takeshi and I will take the first watch, you guys get some rest and restore yourselves if they attack while you are all drained of magic it won¡¯t matter if there is a watch or not.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Yes Mistress¡­¡±


    After the others go to bed Takeshi and I take watch over the grounds. After a while nothing happens so I decide to ask him what has been bugging me for a while now.


    ¡°Takeshi, what are your interests towards Saki?¡±


    Takeshi appears to be a bit flustered, and then says. ¡°I don¡¯t know what you mean¡­¡±


    ¡°That is exactly what I mean, I thought I might have to worry about Akane, but Saki?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°She is just charming and dedicated, I admire that, and that¡¯s all there is to it.¡±


    ¡°Well I wonder¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°You should know me well enough that if I wanted to pursue a romantic relationship with one of your monsters I would come to you to ask for permission first.¡±


    I eye him suspiciously, but he does have a point¡­ Maybe I am just blowing this out of proportion.


    ¡°Well even if I were to trust you, there is still the matter of her. If you really are not interested in her you should back off a bit, because she is interested in you.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I assure that you are wrong, but if you are really concerned about who Saki is romantically inclined to pursue I would bet it would be Satoshi. She talks about him every chance she gets.¡±


    ¡°That may be troublesome on its own as well.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Well that is the risk you run by summoning sentient monsters for your dungeon. It should have been something you were well prepared for after all the drama at your father¡¯s.¡±


    ¡°Well sentient monsters start off weaker than normal monster, but they level indefinitely so they have already made their cost worth it by the strength they have obtained already.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°And the tradeoff is their independent wills.¡±


    Takeshi and I sit there and talk for the rest of our watch, but mostly becomes about the training of the other monsters and just what the plans are going to be with the new Oni in the area. By the time I get the message about the daily xp consumption I decide it¡¯s time to switch with the others


    I send Takeshi to wake the men and I start with Akane. Saki wakes as I try to wake Akane and then helps me get Akane out of bed. After I am convinced they are awake enough I let them know nothing happened but tell them to keep up their guard and then I head to bed myself.


    I am awoken by an alarm from [Menu] about intruders, and I quickly jump out of bed to find out what¡¯s going on. It appears the sun has already begun to rise and we don¡¯t look to be under attack, but it appears Yuji and the others are talking with a few people that are a little worse for wear down by the entrance.


    I make sure I am presentable and then transfer down to the temple and then make my way outside to the rest of the group.


    ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°A group of adventurers, they set out from the village this morning with a new commission about the new tougher Oni, but as they got in trouble they fled and as the temple grounds were closer they decided to come here.¡±


    ¡°How bad is it out there?¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°Well the talk of the town was these new Oni are quite fierce, so we thought we were playing it safe with three groups with a total of 15 people, but only the 6 of us made it this far¡­¡±


    Adventurer 2: ¡°We are sure lucky the Inari temple was here, because with that many Oni chasing us there was no way the village would have opened the gates.


    Saki: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you are safe now. The Oni seemed to wonder off just after you passed into Inari¡¯s protection.¡±


    ¡°I am glad you are all ok, but this could become problematic, if every adventurer that gets in trouble ducks into the temple grounds we can¡¯t be for sure just how long the barrier will keep them out.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress, if its ok with you I think me and the other should make another attempt at it, we did alright yesterday, but we are going to need to keep clearing them out if we have any hope of these adventurers getting back to the village.¡±


    ¡°You have all been keeping an eye on things for most of the night, if you want to rest for a while first I understand, but if you are sure you are up to it.¡±


    My group of monsters then make sure their gear is all prepared and then they step out of the temple grounds. It appears the Oni haven¡¯t spotted them yet as they make their way about 20 feet down the stairs.


    While keeping an eye on them I turn to the adventurers.


    ¡°So how are things in the village?¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°So far they haven¡¯t attempted to pass the gates, but Tatsuo posted the commission for a recon first thing this morning. I fear the numbers are far greater than we thought though.¡±


    The first Oni has seemed to spot the group now and several are now charging at them, it is still only the smaller Oni so they should be fine.


    ¡°Yes, are there any ideas as to why this happened?¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°About once a year the Oni always seem to be replenish, but we are still a few months away from that time, and never before have the larger Oni traveled this far before.¡±


    ¡°So the wave of new Oni are not uncommon it is just worse this time as it was in the past?¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°Yes its much worse, and sooner.¡±


    Adventurer 2: ¡°with this many Oni out there, I fear the supply lines might be broken. They usually suspend during the time of the year the Oni travel, but there is no telling what is going to happen now.¡±


    About that time one of the larger Oni finally breaks the tree line engaging with my monsters, so I decide to focus my attention to that instead. My group has gotten pretty good at fighting the Oni but that my in turn be a weakness, because with so much training on one specific type of enemy they might struggle up against a different type.


    Saki continues to focus on the smaller Oni with [Bullet of Light] spells while the rest of the group surrounds the larger Oni. Ryota and Akane attempt to hold its attention while Satoshi and Yuji kite around it slashing and punching it.


    I might have been worried about nothing, because they seem to be handling themselves quite well. That is until Akane fails to dodge one of the attacks and takes a pretty good sized blow the chest knocking her back and to the ground.


    Saki then begins to panic and disengages with the smaller Oni to begin healing Akane. That only makes the smaller Oni begin to target the others of the group and they manage to get up behind Ryota and Satoshi.


    The battle then quickly takes a turn for the worse. I guess I have no choice but to risk stepping out myself, but who knows how many of the Oni that will bring in. With these adventurers here as well I would like to avoid them seeing the way the Oni react to my presence.


    I decide I have no choice and quickly pull my weapon from [Menu].  The adventurer¡¯s look on pretty amazed when my weapon appears from thin air, but I am sure after everything is over I can store it the same way and convince them I did it with magic.


    Before stepping from the grounds I begin to empower a [Bullet of Light] and when I pass the threshold I let it loose at one of the smaller Oni and also release a [Bullet of Light] stored within the orb of my staff. Before the first two spells even connect I start casting another [Bullet of Light] while releasing a few more of the other elemental spells stored in the orbs of the staff.


    All the Oni of course quickly shift their target, but I am hoping with all the spells I flung it might appear that I just seemed like the bigger threat¡­ The first two [Bullet of Light] spells connect with two of the smaller Oni finally causing both of them to drop.


    And my group quickly realizes what is going on. By the time I release the second [Bullet of Light] they have already begun to start their retreat. Quite a few more Oni have begun to appear from the forest now, and it¡¯s starting to look quite problematic if the group doesn¡¯t hurry up¡­


    I continue to rain the spells down from the top of the stairs while the group slowly retreats towards me. I manage to take out all of the small Oni they were originally engaged with leaving only the one large Oni and all the new ones that have begun to appear.


    Once the group reaches my side I order them to hold while we at least try to drop the one large Oni before retreating. I only manage one more [Bullet of Light], and that seems to do far less damage then it does to the normal Oni, before it is bearing down on us.


    I quickly dodge to one side avoiding one of its blows while I slash at it with my staff. I then start channeling a spell though my staff while attacking and dodging the large Oni. With only a few more seconds before the new groups of Oni reach us we need to end this quick.


    Even though it does less damage I try to gather as much magic as possible to summon 12 elemental balls slamming all 12 into the large Oni. Surprisingly each spell appears to do the same amount of damage, which is a bit worrying because now they seem resistant to all types of magic, but even still resistance and all the 12 direct spell hits are enough to drop to on knee and Akane quickly takes the opportunity to behead the creature.Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author.


    We then retreat into the temple ground and the rest of the Oni slowly stop then begin to disperse. With a sigh of a relief and the eyes of the shocked adventurers on me I twirl my staff in a showy manner and store it right after tossing it in the air causing it to disappear.


    Adventurer: ¡°That was most impressive¡­ Even 15 of us couldn¡¯t handle ourselves that well and you just did it with 6¡­¡±


    ¡°Well we are lucky that Inari¡¯s protection seems to be holding out or that next group would have put us in quite a state.¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°I heard the rumors of your group, but I don¡¯t see how anyone that isn¡¯t one of them mainland heroes to be able to use magic the way you do.¡±


    ¡°I have a talent for magic, but I am nowhere near one of their strengths. My father did pretty much begin training me since birth though, so I have had quite a bit of practice.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°What are we going to do now?¡±


    ¡°We have quite a bit of food, but with this many extra people we will go though it pretty quickly, so we need to think of something pretty quick. I think we can keep doing like we just did, but I am afraid if we push our luck to many times they will eventually be able to pass the barrier.¡±


    Saki: ¡°The large Oni also seemed to not only be resistant to the other elemental spells, but also the light magic as well.¡±


    ¡°Yea I am a little concerned about that one myself.¡±


    Finally after all the excitement Takeshi finally arrives from bed¡­


    ¡°Nice of you to finally join us¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°What happened?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°You slept in and there we had quite a bit of difficulty with some of the Oni.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari¡­ I apologize¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. You know how over dramatic Yuji gets. These adventurers just arrived in a bit of a predicament and the others went out for a bit of training.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°But I am your shield, if there was danger I should have been here.¡±


    ¡°The situation was under control, and now we were just discussing what we are going to do next, because with these adventurers here we will run out of food quite quickly.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Well how bad is it outside the temple grounds?¡±


    Saki: ¡°We dealt with quite a few of the smaller Oni, but it took our Mistress¡¯s help to be able to bring down one of the larger ones, and we had to retreat back on the temple grounds after that.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari participated? I should have been here!¡±


    ¡°I barely left the grounds, besides as I was saying we have more pressing matters now.¡±


    Akane: ¡°I may be able to offer a solution on helping the adventurers return to town, but I will have to speak with you privately about it first.¡±


    I am not sure what Akane has thought of, but with no better plan it is at least worth hearing her out so she and I retreat to the temple where we can talk.


    ¡°So what is it you have thought of?¡±


    Akane: ¡°We know the Oni flock to your location, what if we lure them to the back of the grounds by having you step out and then the humans can then make their retreat.¡±


    ¡°We don¡¯t know what kind of range of effect it has though. They still might not make it.¡±


    Akane: ¡°We could go down with them to see that they do.¡±


    ¡°Then how will you make it back?¡±


    Akane: ¡°We can keep in contact with [Communication], so tell you how it is going and when to step out, it will also help us determine the range of effect.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ I think we can hold them here a few days and summon food for them without them getting suspicious, and that will give us time to lower the numbers of Oni by quite a bit.¡±


    Akane: ¡°I don¡¯t feel comfortable with the adventurers in the dungeon¡­¡±


    ¡°Well my father has an entire town in his, so I think we will be alright with just a few adventurers. After a few days if we still haven¡¯t come up with a better plan yours will still work, so I say we hold off for now.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Yes Mistress¡­¡±


    Akane looks a little down but we then return to the others.


    ¡°Well for now I say once everyone is rested you all try it again, we keep working on their numbers as much as we can. We should have enough supplies for a few days and after that¡­ Well then we will know if we can make it down to the village to resupply.¡±


    Before the adventurers do too much exploring around the temple grounds I summon some items that we might require while the adventurers are here. We then move the girls into the barracks with the guys so the adventurers can use the girl¡¯s room. It isn¡¯t ideal, but I would rather have the adventurers separated from my monsters for the time being.


    ¡°It may be a tight fit, but it¡¯s at least a roof.¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°I¡¯m sorry we are putting you out like this¡­¡±


    ¡°Well this is Inari¡¯s temple and we are just borrowing it after all so I guess we don¡¯t have room to complain.¡±


    My monsters make 5 more attempts though the day on the steps heading down to the village, but without my help they are still unable to bring one of the big Oni down. If there is one thing the attempts have done it is to provide us with quite a bit of xp. Especially with the fact I have to help them when a large Oni gets involved we get the participation bonus for me fighting in the battle.


    We are only getting 3 times the amount of xp from 1 large Oni as the smaller Oni, but as far as strength wise they are probably at least 5 to 10 times stronger. Even though the group managed to each gain a level during last night¡¯s battle, at the end of the day they are already a quarter of the way in with this one as well. If they keep up this progress they might even be able to hit level 20 before the adventurers leave.


    With the adventurers here we make sure to set up another watch, to watch for Oni and the adventurers just in case. In the end though it seems like the only thing it accomplished was causing us to miss a few hours of extra sleep.


    Even during the second day the adventurers are pretty quiet, they seem in shock at our group¡¯s ability especially once the group managed to take down their first large Oni without my help just after noon on the second day.


    By the third day though they has started to get a bit more comfortable around everyone and are starting to ask questions. Most of them are common questions you would normally ask of people you are trying to get to know, but some seem more directed towards the rumors that were going around the village about being messengers of Inari.


    And by the fourth day my monsters reach level 18 during one of their trips out of the dungeon, and it looks like the adventurers are starting to get restless. I think we are going to have to do something sooner rather than later.


    I decide to gather everyone together to tell them of Akane¡¯s plan or at least part of it so we can attempt to get the adventurers back to the village, but once everyone is gathered we can hear was sounds like the clangs of bells off in the distance.


    ¡°What is that?¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°It¡¯s the village, that sound is the warning bells. The gate must have been breached!¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re saying the village is being attacked?¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°I don¡¯t know, but that is what the bells are for.¡±


    Adventurer 2: ¡°That is impossible they have never breached the walls before.¡±


    Adventurer 3: ¡°What do we do?¡±


    ¡°We can¡¯t do anything from here.¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°She is right we have to go down and help them!¡±


    Adventurer 2: ¡°But if they have breached the gate what hope can we expect to have against them?¡±


    Smoke begins to rise though the tree line in the direction of town, and the adventurers are now really beginning to panic.


    ¡°Calm down everyone, we need to learn what the situation is. I was going to do this to help you get down to the village in the morning, but we might as well do it now. Takeshi and I are going to try to lure as many of the Oni from the stairs to the back side of the temple grounds. While we do that you adventurers and the rest of our group will head down to the village and find out what is going on.¡±


    Adventurer 4: ¡°I can¡¯t¡­ We won¡¯t make it.¡±


    Adventurer: ¡°Without the supply line in the village we will eventually starve anyway, we don¡¯t have any other choice.¡±


    Adventurer 4: ¡°I would rather starve then be slaughtered by the Oni¡­¡±


    Akane: ¡°I am going to go help the village, any that want to go can. The rest are on their own. Just give us the word Mistress and we will move out.¡±


    The rest of the monsters prepare for battle although Saki seems a bit nervous.


    Saki: ¡°What about you Mistress are you going to be alright?¡±


    ¡°Of course I got Takeshi, what could go wrong?¡±


    It doesn¡¯t seem to ease her tension but she at least smiles a bit and nods. Out of the 6 adventurers it appears only the 1 will not be joining the rest he instead went to go hide in the building they have been sleeping in.


    ¡°Takeshi you stay just inside the temple grounds and follow me around until I get to the back side then you assist me while the others move down the steps.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Understood.¡±


    ¡°I will send up a spell in the air as the signal that I have their attention. When I do the rest of you quickly as you can make your way down the stairs. I don¡¯t know how long I can hold them off before retreating back into the temple grounds.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Leave it to us.¡±


    Takeshi and I then prepare and of course as soon as I step outside the edge of the temple ground quite a few Oni appear from the trees. I target one with a [Bullet of Light] and then begin to run along the outside border of the temple grounds.


    It takes me a bit of time to reach the far back but when I do I summon my magic launching one of the fire orbs straight into the air while targeting several Oni with the others. After I send the orb up I get a message from Akane saying they are underway and then Takeshi joins me outside the perimeter to fight the Oni.


    I don¡¯t know how long Takeshi and I have been fighting, but I am almost completely out of magic, and have suffered a great deal of damage, but not near as much as he has. We have managed to kill who knows how many of the smaller Oni, and at least 3 of the larger ones, but we are forced to finally retreat back into the temple grounds.


    The Oni quickly lose interest when we reenter the grounds, so I send a message to Akane warning her that we did all we can and then collapse on the ground. Lying on the ground I look back towards were the village is and there is a lot more smoke billowing up now then there was before.


    I start to worry about the safety of the others, but get a quick message from Akane saying they have met with little resistance and have almost reached the village. Time then seems to slow as we can do nothing but wait while watching the smoke though the treetops.


    It is almost 30 more minutes before I hear from Akane again.


    Akane: ¡°We have a huge problem, but there isn¡¯t time right now. If you can distract the Oni again even for a few minutes it will help a bunch, we are on our way back.¡±


    ¡°Alright Takeshi, it looks like we are up again. Are you ready?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I am your shield and will not fail you.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s my Takeshi!¡±


    I then step back out of the temple grounds and as soon as I see the first Oni through the trees I start using my 12 orbs to cause as much destruction as possible. I keep the light spells for the Oni that start to get to close and hit the ones further way with the other spells.


    Needless to say even switching to using my staff I am quickly out of magic as I didn¡¯t have time for it to fully recover, so Takeshi and I are forced to retreat within the grounds again. I quickly send Akane another message telling her I did all I can.


    Akane: ¡°It helped a bunch, we are almost there.¡±


    Takeshi and I then make our way across the temple grounds waiting for the others to return, but when we catch the first glimpse of them I can see what she meant by a huge problem.


    With Saki, Yuji, and Akane leading the group a large group of at least 75 to 100 people are making their way up the stairs each carrying as much as they can possibly carry. Several adventurer groups are on the outside edge fighting with Oni as they approach but the group is so large the Oni make it through quite often taking a few of the villagers out at a time before the Oni are pushed back again.


    Takeshi: ¡°This isn¡¯t good¡­¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s draw them out back again.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, you are completely out of magic, there is no way you can do anything else¡­¡±


    ¡°I may be out of magic, but even if it¡¯s just 30 seconds that is that many more villagers that will make it.¡±


    I then make my way back to the back of the temple grounds stepping out. The Oni quickly begin to pour from the trees and even though I said it 30 seconds is just about all the time we can hold the ground. I hate to risk it so close to another but I step out again, this time only able to buy another 15 seconds, and then again for under 10 seconds.


    Takeshi: ¡°No more Miss Inari, they are not retreating like they were before, I fear we may have already risked the protection from the barrier as it is.¡±


    I get a message about monsters returning from battle and then Takeshi and I start to make our way back up front. The battle results are quite low, but that is probably due to most of the fighting being with the other adventurers and villagers.


    There is one thing in the battle results that really sticks out.


    Monster Ryota has perished.


    ¡°Ryota¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari?¡±


    ¡°They lost Ryota¡­ Come on let¡¯s find out what¡¯s going on.¡±


    By the time we make it around the shrine there are villagers and adventurers everywhere many of which are collapsed on the ground breathing heavily. I see Satoshi comforting Saki as she appears to be crying, and once they see me Yuji and Akane quickly approach.


    Akane: ¡°Thank you Mistress, we can tell you made quite a few attempts to draw them off, but I am sorry to say we still lost Ryota.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I¡¯m sorry Mistress it¡¯s my fault.¡±


    Akane: ¡°I was in charge, if anyone was at fault it was me, but that being said with all that happened only losing one of our Mistress¡¯s monsters compared to what the other adventurers and villagers lost is somewhat of a miracle.¡±


    ¡°Well we can worry about that all later, what exactly happened?¡±


    Akane: ¡°It is as you probably imagine. When we arrived the village was already well under attack, it looks like even at the distance of the village when you left the temple grounds it caused the attack to stop long enough for the villagers to gather.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°The adventurers that were up here the last few days said that the temple grounds were still protected and that¡¯s when the villagers decided to try to flee here. I know there had to be close to 200 people when we left, but only a quarter of them remain now.¡±


    ¡°And Tatsuo?¡±


    Akane: ¡°He is in pretty bad shape but he is still alive.¡±


    ¡°Ok, you guys rest. You earned it.¡±


    Yuji and Akane then collapse together sitting back to back on the ground. I then make my way through the group. I haven¡¯t really met most of the villagers everyone I interacted with were either the vendors or the adventurers at the guild building, so most of the battered and bruised people are unfamiliar.


    I do see a few people I recognize like one of the blacksmiths and the leather worker, but the leather worker was married to one of the blacksmiths and I don¡¯t see him or the third blacksmith either. I also see the waitress from the adventurer¡¯s guild but not the receptionist.


    I finally find Tatsuo and he is being cared for by one of the young women from the village, he appears to be in bad shape but he isn¡¯t in any apparent danger of dying. As a matter of fact it doesn¡¯t like a single person has gotten away without a scratch. Once I approach Satoshi and Saki, Satoshi quickly stands.


    ¡°It¡¯s ok, just rest for now.¡±


    Satoshi nods and then goes back to sitting next to Saki.


    Saki: ¡°I am sorry Mistress I was unable to save Ryota, Satoshi and I were in the middle of the group and by the time I heard that he fell it was impossible to get to him¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s alright Saki we will worry about all that later¡­ Just rest, because it looks like quite a few people are in need of your magic once you are able.¡±


    Once everyone has gotten to rest a bit people begin to wander around most are looking for friends or loved ones that they lost in the climb. As soon as I have the magic I focus on healing Tatsuo, because as the village leader he should be able to get things under control.


    I exhaust my magic again, but it¡¯s enough for him to open his eyes and sit up.


    Tatsuo: ¡°I guess this is the second time you have saved me. Well third if you count your group showing up in the village at just the right time.¡±


    ¡°It looks like pretty bad, I don¡¯t know if we were able to help much¡­¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°If they didn¡¯t show up when they did I don¡¯t think anyone would have made it, and I am sorry about your servant Ryota¡­ Before I blacked out I heard he fell in the battle. He was a hell of a fighter, and it was an honor to fight next to him.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think anyone made it out without losing someone, so I should consider myself extremely lucky only one of my servants fell.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°They have a good Mistress that trained them well. I heard you and Takeshi stayed behind to hold off as many as you could so they could make it down to the village?¡±


    ¡°Well so far it looks like Inari¡¯s protection is holding out, so when things got bad I just ducked back inside, so I was in far less danger then everyone else.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°But without knowing if the protection would hold it was quite the risk. I just hope it continues to hold or I don¡¯t know what is going to happen.¡±


    ¡°Well I hate to put it on you, but if you can stand we need to start getting things under control. I will try to take some of the burden off you as my magic returns.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°You¡¯re right, it is my reasonability.¡± ¨CHe grimaces as he gets up but he manages to pull himself to his feet.-


    We spend the next few hours trying to get things squared away. There isn¡¯t much in the way of supplies, so if we don¡¯t do something soon we are going to be in the same mess we were with the adventurers. Saki has begun to use her healing magic on the worst of the wounded villagers but she is quickly out of magic again, with the villagers pawing at her asking for her help.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Everyone just calm down, we will make sure to get everyone treated, but like our supplies magic is in short supply, If anyone can use any type of healing magic I ask you get with Saki there and we can get as many people healed as we can as fast as we can.¡±


    ¡°Right now I think are biggest concern is shelter, we have enough supplies to last at least a day or two, but it¡¯s still the middle of winter, and it doesn¡¯t seem to get near as cold here as it does from where I am from, but the temperature does get pretty low at night.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°What about the temple we can probably fit at least half in there.¡±


    ¡°Well right now the only thing keeping us alive is the protection from Inari, and I would think it¡¯s best to run any ideas like that past Saki, I would hate to make Inari mad and we lose the protection.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°It¡¯s hard to think of it as more than a building after all these years, but as we are here safe for the moment I can¡¯t really refute it¡­ Well then what other buildings are there?¡±


    ¡°There is the bathhouse which I guess if we emptied out we could put quite a few people in, and the men¡¯s barracks could hold a good size more, the female barracks though could only hold about 10 people tops.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°What about you and your people, you are the ones that fixed everything up, I would hate to throw you out after being the only ones that actually cared¡­¡±


    ¡°I think we will take the female barracks, it might be a bit tight, but we would then be out of all of your hair.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I am sorry to impose¡­¡±


    ¡°After everything you and your people have lost today a little discomfort on our part is hardly comparable. I would just ask no matter what, respect the Inari temple, and respect the little privacy we have left.¡±


    After spending the xp on the bathhouse and the barracks it hurts a little to see the villagers remove the items to make room, but with 50 people inside the dungeon I am sure to be acquiring that xp back and then some. I just have to make sure we are able to keep our secret.


    It still takes quite a while to get everyone settled in the best we can, but for now we are going to take shifts on sleeping while keeping an eye on the well and temple to make sure the humans don¡¯t do anything stupid.

 Kabemura Village (Inari Arc)

    It hasn¡¯t even been 48 hours since the humans have taken shelter at the temple, and they are already dangerously low on supplies. The humans supply far less xp then I would imagine, but it is enough to summon food for them if I have to. I just wouldn¡¯t be able to explain how I got it. I decide until there is no other choice I will wait on that.


    My monsters have been taking shifts day and night keeping the temple and well secure. After that first night Saki practically hasn¡¯t left the temple since. With Akane and Yuji currently taking watch I receive a message from Yuji saying Tatsuo was asking for me.


    I transfer from the core room back to the old woman¡¯s barracks. With Akane and Yuji on guard right now, and Saki in the temple that leaves Takeshi and Satoshi sleeping in the barracks. Both of their faces are quite tempting while they sleep, but I guess I need to take care of business first, so I leave the small building to find Yuji waiting just outside.


    Yuji: ¡°Tatsuo is in the temple with a few of the villagers. He wants to talk to you about the situation with the supplies.¡±


    I nod and make my way to the temple. When I enter there are at least a dozen of the villagers praying at the shrine, some of which are in tears that haven¡¯t quit since they arrived. Tatsuo is leaning against the wall it looks like he is just making sure the villagers are being respectful.


    Saki is rushing around the temple speaking with villagers, and she looks to have lost quite a bit of sleep and seems exhausted. When Tatsuo sees me enter he stands up straight and then walks over to me, he motions to step outside and we exit the temple.


    ¡°How is everyone holding up?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Including myself only 47 of a village of over 200 made it, and that¡¯s not even including the adventurers. Families have been torn to shreds, fathers, mothers, children everyone has lost someone. I could flex my muscles and run the village when the wall was there, but now¡­ They don¡¯t need physical strength, and I just don¡¯t know if I am the person they need right now.¡±


    ¡°Humans are more resilient then you think, it won¡¯t be easy but you will all get through this.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I wish I had your confidence¡­ Speaking of making it through this, we have begun rationing the remaining food, but even still it won¡¯t last another two days. A trade caravan should have been due in town today, but with the Oni who knows anymore. Even if they did manage to arrive ok they would see the state of the village and would have no way of knowing we have relocated here.¡±


    ¡°Well I think I am going to make sure my group gets a good night¡¯s rest tonight and send them back to the village in the morning to see if they can scrounge up any supplies. They should then be able to leave something behind to let caravans know that the village had to moved.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°We barely made it here the first time. Are you really willing to risk your servants like that?¡±


    ¡°I have a bit of a plan for that, but I will have to see if it is going to work or not, but for now is there anything other than food that is needed from the village?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Food is our primary concern right now.¡±


    Tatsuo and I talk a while longer, but most of it is just information about the villagers that made it and which didn¡¯t. After leaving Tatsuo I go speak with Saki telling her about my plan to send the group out in the morning and to get some rest. She tries to refuse, but I tell her the group will need her at her best, and if she is tired her magic won¡¯t replenish near as fast. With that I am able to convince her to get some sleep.


    I then let the others know what is going on as well then head back to the dungeon core room to check on something. It has been made clear the Oni actively hunt dungeons just by the way they react to me, so I wonder if I place a room outside of the temple grounds if it would lure them to it. If so we could use that to our advantage.


    I decide to start off really small making it 10 feet by 10 feet just outside the temple grounds. When I attempt to finalize I receive a warning.


    Dungeon within [Inari¡¯s Providence] effect, rooms connected to the dungeon outside of [Inari¡¯s Providence] will create an opening disrupting the effect at point of entry.


    I quickly cancel the room. The good news is I now know [Menu] acknowledges the protection from Inari, and the bad news is my lure plan will not work. I then come up with another idea.


    I move off from the edge of the temple grounds about 25 feet and try to place a 10 foot by 10 foot area.


    Rooms created without a connection to the dungeon will provide no xp to the dungeon, restrictions placed on items available to summon within. Once room is connected to the dungeon restrictions will be lifted.


    Unique: Room is outside of [Inari¡¯s Providence] effect. If connected to the dungeon [Inari¡¯s Providence] effect will be disrupted at point of entry.


    This might actually work. As long as I don¡¯t connect it to the dungeon it should be fine, but just to be safe. ¡°List restrictions.¡±


    Restrictions to rooms placed with no direct connection to the dungeon include. Inability to place rifts within Inability to place traps within Inability to acquire xp from slain hostiles Inability to acquire xp from hostiles in room at start of day Inability to transfer monsters that are summoned within If connection is not established and room is connected to another dungeon the connecting dungeon will acquire ownership of room and all within. (Dungeon core, boss monsters or monsters with names that can move beyond the dungeon are not affected.) If the closest point on the room¡¯s distance from the dungeon exceeds 100ft the room will begin to decay.


    And one last thing if [Menu] acknowledges Inari¡¯s protection as an effect it should be able to tell me about it. ¡°Search [Inari¡¯s Providence].


    [Inari¡¯s Providence] Information restricted.


    With the exception of the few things only elders can do there shouldn¡¯t be such things as restricted information within [Menu]. Even then the information isn¡¯t restricted just not there for normal cores.


    I am tempted to ask Madam Erin about it, but she wouldn¡¯t enter my dungeon either when she visited yet has no trouble entering daddy¡¯s dungeon. If she was affected by [Inari¡¯s Providence] as well maybe I don¡¯t want to give her any information about it if I don¡¯t have to.


    ¡°Oh Inari please lets this work¡­¡±


    I then hit the finalize button on the screen before me adding the room. Instantly Oni pour from the forest and within seconds of receiving the intruders warning every inch of the newly added room is packed with Oni.


    Opps¡­ It looks like one of the humans seen the gathering of Oni and is screaming. I quickly transfer to the female barracks and head out into the temple grounds. The humans are quickly gathering and already panicking.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry! It¡¯s my fault! They are not going to get in! Calm down!¡±


    Tatsuo quickly makes his way through the group.


    Tatsuo: ¡°What is going on?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry¡­ We really need to get down to the village like we talked about, so this was the plan I was talking about. Using magic I was able to make a lure of sorts, and as you can see it seems to be working.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°But with that number of Oni¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know how long the lure is going to keep them distracted, but as long as they are gathered around the lure they are not trying to get in here.¡±


    All my monsters have gathered as well, and they are all fully equipped, I guess I should have warned them what I was doing as well.


    ¡°Alright, since you guys are already geared up, we might as well see how well this lure is going to be. I want to you slowly make your way outside the temple grounds and see what happens.¡±


    They look a little nervous but Akane and Yuji both quickly agree.


    Takeshi: ¡°What about me Miss Inari?¡±


    ¡°You wait here with us just in case.¡±


    Leading the group Akane, exits the temple grounds along with Yuji, Satoshi, and Saki, and a few of the stray Oni who can¡¯t fit within the 10 by 10 area quickly being to rush the group, but those inside the area seem singularly focused on occupying the area going as far as digging into the ground at their feet.


    A few of the humans get nervous but the stray Oni are picked off by the group. It seems like every time one falls another replaces it, but the ones in the dungeon area still show no signs of caring what goes on. Well on to the next step I guess. As I start to step forward Takeshi grabs my shoulder.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari you¡¯re not thinking of going out there are you?¡±


    ¡°We won¡¯t know what kind of effect this lure has if I don¡¯t.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Please at least allow me to assist¡­¡±


    ¡°I need to you stay in the grounds, but if things start to take a turn for the worse then you can help, but only if things get bad.¡±


    I pretend to cast magic as I use [Menu] to pull my staff. I then start casting a spell as I exit the temple grounds. Summoning the 12 elemental balls I fire them directly into the middle of the dungeon area and all the Oni. Then I use the light orb on my staff to fire a [Bullet of Light] out at one of the Oni coming from the forest.


    As the Oni in the square die more from the forest quickly squeeze their way onto it, while the other Oni all turn their attention to me. The others pick up their pace trying to eliminate the Oni heading my direction as I continue to l summon and release my 12 magic orbs at the Oni.


    The Oni no longer seem to have a singular drive to end me and now are equally just as focused on the small square section of ground. Any time one of them are killed their spot is instantly filled. The larger Oni are in smaller amounts and most of them head for the closer square room even if they have to shove one of the smaller Oni out, but after 30 or so minutes the larger ones start to head my direction as well so we are forced to take shelter back within the temple grounds.Stolen story; please report.


    The battle results are excellent in just 30 minutes I easily made two or three times the amount of xp to pay for the cost of the room, so even if I break it down so the Oni will scatter we still won¡¯t be out anything.


    I spin my staff around a few times tossing it in the air and store it with [Menu] causing it to disappear.


    Tatsuo: ¡°That was quite an impressive display, but if the Oni keep gathering like that I don¡¯t know if any of us are going to be able to sleep comfortably.¡±


    ¡°Well like I said it was to test out the lure, this one should last probably another 30 minutes. Other than food, another thing we have plenty supply of if we can¡¯t just get to it is lumber, so if I was you I would get the adventurers on guard duty and take every abled body man and try to gather as much as possible until the effect wears out. Tomorrow morning I will use another lure and I will send the group down to the village to see about gathering food, and you can gather more lumber then as well.¡±


    Tatsuo doesn¡¯t look completely convinced, but he nods and quickly begins rounding up people. They are not able to gather much, but after a while I tell them the lure is about to expire, and then I break down the room causing the Oni to spread out back into the forest.


    The next morning there are quite a few villagers ready to begin work while others are waiting to watch me use the lure. I decide to get creative with it pretending to cast a spell then after casing light on the rock out in the forest I use [Menu] to quickly add a room, I bump up the size a bit this time to a standard room to hopefully hold more Oni while my monsters then quickly begin making their way down the stairs toward the village.


    Once the Oni start collecting in the space the villagers likewise begin to work moving into the forest to collect lumber.


    Tatsuo: ¡°You really sure you are not The Inari, or at least one of Inari¡¯s messengers?¡±


    ¡°Well I¡¯ve never talked to a god before, but who¡¯s to say maybe the reason my mother gave me this name was due to some influence, which led me to come here, and it¡¯s not all part of some plan.¡±


    Tatsuo laughs and say. ¡°Well I better get out there I can help gather lumber as well.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll send Takeshi as well while I keep an eye on the lure.¡±


    I am a little disappointed that I don¡¯t get to watch Takeshi all sweaty as he works, but I wouldn¡¯t have had any other excuse to not help, and if I left the grounds we would be swarmed so I made the excuse to keep an eye on the lure.


    When my monsters return later that afternoon they said they met with very little resistance from the Oni, but they still have to deal with a few. They managed to gather quite a bit of food supplies but I am not sure just how long these ones will last.


    Things continue on like that for the next few weeks and things really start to progress. Eventually the supplies left in the village run out and I start summoning food supplies for the group to return with, but that is only a temporary solution.


    The temple grounds have turned into quite the small little village already while the buildings aren¡¯t that great they will at least get the villagers by for now. We have been asked to acquire a few items from down in the village, one of the first of which was the device the adventurer¡¯s guild uses. After that a few commissions are placed, but instead of the little parchments for rewards they give out extra food rations or favors.


    They say tragedy has a way to bring people together and there have been quite a few unusual relationships born in the remaining villagers. Even my own monsters don¡¯t seem immune when I notice Akane and Yuji has seem to reach an amicable relationship, but even I am surprised when I catch them though one of the screen in the dungeon core room having sex.


    I feel like transferring down and scolding them, but I did tell Akane to just leave Takeshi and Satoshi alone, but it¡¯s no fair they get to have fun and I am still no closer to getting any. Instead I just use it as a learning experience and just enjoy the show.


    They hide their relationship around me and the others, and they think they are getting away with it, but I might lose the show if they think I know about it, so I let them keep thinking that it¡¯s a secret. Saki is a lot like aunt Scylla, so I don¡¯t think I have to worry too much about her putting the moves on either Takeshi or Satoshi, but I am still pretty sure she is interested one or the other if not both.


    With their training progressing rapidly, Takeshi and I start working with a few adventurers. I don¡¯t get any xp that way but Takeshi does and it lets me spend time with him so it¡¯s not too bad. Besides xp is the least of our problems I have had so much of an abundance I have been adding to the dungeon just so my xp consumption will go up.


    I managed to learn a few more skills but so far they are all pretty ordinary, and I finally gain my first level since I left training. It was level 15 so my skills ranked up as well giving me quite the boost. After that I then put a plan in effect.


    Since the village fell there have been no signs of any caravans, so one morning Tatsuo knocks on our door saying something has happened on the temple grounds. I act surprised when he shows me one of the large stone blocks that make up the temple grounds has seemed to break revealing a set of steps.


    After we carefully traverse the stairs we find a large open area with rich soil and a waterway, the roof is even glowing producing artificial sunlight making the area perfect for growing crops. There is even a stairway leading deeper that is rich in ore.


    Two things happened that day even the most hard headed people that refused to acknowledge Inari, began praying at the shrine, and I received a new skill [Inari¡¯s Acolyte].


    Inari¡¯s Acolyte (Rank 1): Helping to lead to the restoration in faith to Inari has granted the holder special abilities. This skill does not rank based on level but by deeds performed in the name of Inari. At rank 1 the holder is recognized as a follower of Inari and can summon two spectral foxes, 1 receiving magical power whiles the other physical ability. Each can be summoned once a day and lasts until dispelled or suffer damage equal to ? of the skill holder¡¯s hp.


    After that the villagers seem to start regaining hope, and the moods begin to improve. By the time summer draws to a close the village has begun to prosper again albeit on a much smaller scale.


    ¡°It¡¯s hard to believe it¡¯s almost been a year since we first started out¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°It¡¯s been a challenge that¡¯s for sure.¡±


    ¡°We have come a long way though.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°But the Oni still show no signs of easing up, if anything there are even more.¡±


    ¡°But most of them aren¡¯t even a problem anymore. Even the normal adventurers can handle the Oni Generals without too much difficulty now. Besides we count on their continued supply of xp if they stopped we would be in serious trouble.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°But we haven¡¯t had any contact with the outside world other than to your parents or Madam Erin though the communication parchment.¡±


    ¡°Are you getting lonely? Don¡¯t worry Takeshi I will hold you.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari you jest, but don¡¯t you think we should at least try to reestablish ourselves in Shima? After all we just don¡¯t have enough people to sustain a village in the long term.¡±


    ¡°The longer I am off the grounds the more Oni that swarm, even with them no longer being a challenge after a few hours of being outside the temple grounds there are just to many Oni.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Then send Akane¡¯s group, or some of the adventurers.¡±


    ¡°Some of the things we have done here we have passed as Inari¡¯s blessings, but if we get a bunch of new people especially those from outside of Shima they are sure to see through what has happened.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Your dungeon is already pretty deep and it still hasn¡¯t even been discovered yet, so I am sure if they realize it¡¯s a dungeon you can protect it. Besides with what you have done with the village the village might protect you as well.¡±


    ¡°How about a deal then, you give me a kiss and I will send out the group tomorrow morning?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°Well a girl can hope can¡¯t she¡­?


    It takes several weeks after the group¡¯s departure before they return. From what Akane¡¯s group learns it appears the forest was the only area effected by the increase in Oni the rest of Shima hasn¡¯t seen any changed, but man where they surprised to find out Kabemura was still around.


    Trading has slowly began to be reestablished, but with the cost it takes for guards strong enough to guard the caravans though the forest the items that come though are quite expensive, so we stick to only items we can¡¯t produce or make ourselves.


    To commemorate the completion the rebuilding of Kabemura¡¯s blacksmith shop they made me some chainmail armor that is so light that it functions as just another layer to my kimono. Without the wall Tetsuo also decided to change the village¡¯s name, but it wasn¡¯t any more imaginative as it is now called Seidomura instead¡­


    Tatsuo: ¡°I have to admit when things were at their worst I really had my doubts, but to have come so far now. Our biggest concern now is the few farmers there are left are struggling to work the areas Inari has provided for us.¡±


    ¡°What about sending out a commission in the next caravan requesting people willing to settle here?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Well the problem is the space¡­ We have already maximized our available area as best as we can, unless we start setting up residences underground, but Inari has already provided us with so much and we don¡¯t know how long she will continue.¡±


    ¡°I know that look you are giving me¡­ I really can¡¯t speak for Inari though¡­ But if you just want my opinion I would say to ask Inari yourself. Go to the shrine and maybe just maybe¡­ Inari will hear your prayers.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°If you told me that a year ago I would just scoff at you, but now¡­¡±


    We talk for a while longer before departing. Tatsuo starts to walk back towards his home, but he stops looking at the temple. He looks to be debating for a minute before changing directions heading towards the temple.


    I check with Saki later to make sure he actually prayed at the shrine and then I decide with my overabundance of xp to get to work. I have already worked the dungeon down to sub-level 4 just to add more rooms so I can level faster.


    Daddy might be disappointed in me because the rooms I added after sub-level 1 I didn¡¯t put any effort to make, sub-level 2-4, special just filling them with square rooms connected to one another and filling them with monsters.


    The villagers still haven¡¯t discovered the dungeon so it¡¯s not like it really matters anyway. The mine was pretty much just a spiraling tunnel with several ore deposits that slowly respawn. At the end of the tunnel I decide to add another set of stairs behind an ore deposit that won¡¯t respawn. Now when they mine that deposit they will discover the stairs.


    The new floor is a maze of tunnels the end of which leading to one more staircase. The last floor for now is just a large room filled with several types of ore. Once I decide to expand further I will just remove one of the respawning ore deposits and make more tunnels behind them.


    I then start working on the farm. The current farm floor has worked pretty well for most crops and the farmers dug a large area to plant rice, but it¡¯s not as effective as it could be, so when I add one more farming floor I gear it more for rice.


    From the stairs there is a small pad of dirt then a small ledge. With the way I set up a waterway though this floor, with a few sluice gates, they can flood the entire lowered area for rice growing. I even add a few bridges over the waterway in several points.


    That should cover more food production, but now they need places for new residents to sleep. I add one more floor going down. I make the ground on this floor a little sturdier, but still leave it dirt just in case they want to make their own gardens, plant flowers, or something to that effect.


    I could just add some walls sectioning it off, but with the building of the buildings on the temple grounds I have managed to unlock the ability to summon a small house. With each wall costing 500xp it is actually cheaper to summon the complete houses, so I start placing them in rows.


    I pack them pretty tightly but there is still plenty of room to move around, I then add a waterway along the edge of the room for washing clothes or drawing water. I think I might have gone a bit overboard with the houses but it¡¯s not like they won¡¯t get a use out of them.


    I just don¡¯t know what their reactions are going to be when they see them¡­ I also noticed that my xp consumption skyrocketed with the addition of the houses. If the amount of Oni ever slows I am going to have a lot of trouble maintaining my dungeon¡­


    I add one more set of stairs going down, but for now just leave an open area. I can always expand it later for future development, and I guess for now they can use it to storage. When I finally hit the confirmation it receive quite a bit of notices and watch a massive amount of xp disappear¡­


    Among other things my [Inari¡¯s Blessing] skill gains a rank, and [Inari¡¯s Acolyte] gains 3 ranks¡­ The rank in Inari¡¯s Blessing just increases my abilities further, but for Inari¡¯s Acolyte it increases the strength of the two foxes I can summon and now they can even take physical forms if I want them to.


    I haven¡¯t really used them much because they looked pretty ominous like two shadowy spirits, so with them able to take form I might be able to use them around the villagers now. Better yet I can probably use them as ¡°Inari¡¯s Messengers¡±.


    I decide to summon them both and now that they have form. Instead of shadowy spirits they now look to be two snow white foxes one with sharp green eyes, and the other with soft blue eyes. Without any orders the one with blue eyes curls up in my lap while the one with green eyes lies next to me.


    I decide to go over [Menu] to make sure I got everything taken care of. Once one of the villagers discovers the new floor in the farm area there is sure to be an uproar, so I better get some rest while I can. When I move to the bed the blue-eyed fox has no qualms about jumping right into bed with me, but the green-eyed fox only moves next to the bed resting it head on the corner of the bed staring at me with sad eyes.


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind¡­ Come on¡­¡±


    The green-eyed fox then quickly jumps on the bed, but still curls up at the foot of the bed. The blue-eyed fox meanwhile is sprawled out over the bed, so I pull it to my chest using it as a pillow. It makes a few chattering barks then lays its head back resting it on my collarbone. Scratching it under the chin I then drift off to sleep.

 Seidomuras Growth (Inari Arc)

    I wake up the next morning pretty refreshed¡­ No messages or anything yet¡­ I slide out of bed and the two foxes hop off the bed following me around the core room as I look though the screens. I understand the mine, but surely they noticed the change in the farm as soon as they went to work this morning.


    In the screens showing the farm I can see a few of the farmers working away, but the entrance to the next floor remains undisturbed¡­ I check the mine and there seems to even be two of the villagers working away there, but surely they should have at least seen the entrance when they went in the mine¡­


    Looking through several other screens it looks like nobody shows any sign of anything being out of the ordinary. Well I thought about using the foxes to be the messengers so I guess it is a good time to see if it will work.


    I quickly access [Menu] summoning two small leather bands one in green another in blue putting them on the foxes necks like collars. I summoned each one with a name on them so now unimaginatively the green-eyed fox is Midori, and the Blue-eyed fox is Aoi.


    I tested the intellectual ability of them before when they were both just shadowy figures and they seemed to be able to understand me pretty well, and could follow complex instructions after all Aoi is even capable of casting spells.


    I tell them to both sit and they do as they are told I then I explain to them exactly what I want them to do. They both stare at me so intently while I explain to them, that I wish my other monsters listened to me this well¡­


    When I finish Aoi makes a few short chattering barks and Midori stands. I then look over a few of the screens till I find an area that looks unoccupied where I can send them down without being spotted. I find Tatsuo in his house finishing his preparations for the day and find a spot just to the back of his house and send the foxes down.


    I watch both the foxes on one of the screens as they make their way around the house, Midori starts to scratch on Tatsuo¡¯s door while Aoi lets out a few short barks. From inside the house I see Tatsuo with a confused look on his face, as he tries to determine where the sound is coming from.


    Once he figures out it¡¯s the door he moves over and opening it looking around. Aoi darts into the house circling his leg and darts back out the door while Midori sits just outside the door.


    Tatsuo: ¡°What in the world! What are you two doing here¡­¡± ¨CHe says looking at the two foxes and quickly looks around outside.-


    Midori then stands walking a few feet before looking back at Tatsuo over its shoulder, while Aoi prances around. Tatsuo still has a confused look on his face, but then something seems to don on him and he quickly slides into his shoes stepping out the door.


    Both the foxes then start heading for the farm stopping every few feet to look back to make sure Tatsuo is still following them. By the time they reach the stairs for the farm they have drawn quite the crowd as people keep asking Tatsuo what is going on and he just shrugs his shoulders.


    It¡¯s kind of an odd sight watching almost a dozen of the villagers following the two little foxes as they make their way across the farm ground. Once they start getting close to the stairs down they dart off towards the stairs.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Hold on! Not so fast!¡±


    Tatsuo quickly starts to sprint to catch up with them but once the dart down the stairs he quickly skids to a halt.


    Villager: ¡°Tatsuo¡­ That wasn¡¯t there yesterday was it¡­?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ I am pretty sure we would of noticed it if it was though.¡±


    The two fox¡¯s poke their heads back up from the stairs and Aoi lets out another series of chattering barks.


    Villager: ¡°Do you think it¡¯s safe¡­?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°They seem to want us to go down, and I don¡¯t think even Inari-sama could deny that these two are messengers of Inari.¡±


    Villager: ¡°Maybe we should ask her to be safe, or at least Saki-san.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I don¡¯t want to risk making Inari mad¡­ I am going to go down, one of you go back and try to find Saki-san or Inari-sama.¡±


    None of the villagers makes a move, so he finally has to tell one of them to go, and then he heads for the stairs.


    Tatsuo: ¡°I hope you aren¡¯t leading me into trouble little ones¡­¡±


    Aoi lets out a few more chattering barks and then they both head down the stairs. The next floor is just the better farm, so I don¡¯t think it is that big of a deal but the look on Tatsuo¡¯s face is quite priceless. Aoi prances around till it gets Tatsuo¡¯s attention again and both of them run off towards the other stairs.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Wait up!... Please don¡¯t fall in a hole¡­¡± ¨CHe says as he hurries along.-


    The two foxes then circle around the next set of stairs.


    Tatsuo: ¡°There is more?!¡±


    After Aoi barks the two foxes disappear down the stairs. This time as he comes down the stairs Tatsuo falls to his knees after seeing the small houses lined up. Midori moves over drinking some water from the waterway and then finds a place curling up and lying down.


    Tatsuo on his hands and knees seems to be shaking as he fights back tears. Aoi moves over to him and licks one of his hands. Tatsuo then rubs Aoi¡¯s head and that¡¯s when he notices the collar.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Aoi¡­ Is that your name?¡± ¨CAfter Aoi barks Tatsuo continues.- ¡°Aoi, tell your master no matter what it asks from me, even if it¡¯s my life, I will gladly pay it for everything it has done for us.¡±


    Aoi barks again and then circles around, prancing around a bit. A few of the other villagers have slowly braved the stairs themselves heading down to meet Tatsuo.


    The villagers and Tatsuo talk for a bit, several of them pet, and scratch Aoi behind the ears. Midori doesn¡¯t let anyone get close to it, but it at least lets Tatsuo read its name before sticking its nose in the air, curling up, and lying back down.


    I of course told Saki what was going on, so when they villagers found her she quickly joined them with Tatsuo not long after. I have also received a message from Yuji, stating that the villagers are looking for me.


    I decide its time, so I transfer down to the building we are using for our house, and then make my way to Tatsuo, Saki, and the others. By the time I reach them the crowd has gathered quite a few more people, and several of them are checking out the houses.


    They seemed to of found the stairs going down as well as a villager pokes their head out from them calling out.


    Villager: ¡°It¡¯s another area, but it¡¯s much smaller, and it doesn¡¯t seem to have anything down there.¡±


    Tatsuo is talking with Saki who is holding one of the foxes, and I feel the other rub against my leg. When I look down I find it is Aoi¡­ So Midori at least lets Saki hold it. Midori seems to be enjoying the scratches it receives for Saki, but is keeping a piercing gaze on Tatsuo.


    Tatsuo then notices me quickly bowing to Saki and making his way over to me.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Inari-sama, do you see this?!¡±


    ¡°I do¡­ I just checked out the floor above, it looks like Inari really did hear our prayers, and who is this? ¨CI say reaching down picking up Aoi.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°That one is Aoi, and the one Saki-san is holding is Midori. They were the ones that showed me the way. They have got to be Inari¡¯s messengers.¡±


    ¡°Well they seem friendly enough.¡± ¨CI say while scratching Aoi under the chin while it looks on with such content.-


    Tatsuo: ¡°Yes, that one does. Saki is the only one that the other one will let near it though.¡±


    We spend the next few hours talking, which ends up as a full village wide festival before it¡¯s all said and done. By the time the sun goes down there is a large bonfire on the temple grounds and more than half of the villagers are already passed out drunk.


    The foxes get quite a bit of attention as well, which Aoi seems to greatly enjoy, but Midori seems very particular about who it lets near it. I start to notice a pattern to it though. Midori only seems to want attention from women, not only that, but women who are not involved¡­ it even rejects Akane.


    Which doesn¡¯t make me feel any better when we are sitting around the bonfire drinking with the villagers I both foxes are sitting on either side of me with their heads in my lap¡­ Quite a few people are dancing about.


    Of course most of it is just drunken rubbish, but with Midori¡¯s action I feel a little perturbed, so I jump up.


    ¡°Dance with me Takeshi.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, that wouldn¡¯t be proper¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s either you or Satoshi, and I can make him if I really wanted to, so what¡¯s it going to be?¡±


    Takeshi looks to Satoshi who is having a pleasant conversation with Saki while she fills his cup with my alcohol.


    Takeshi: ¡°Fine, but only for a dance.¡±


    I then pull Takeshi to his feet and we make our way over to where the others are dancing. I have to say the dance is rather awkward as Takeshi tries his hardest to keep me at arm¡¯s length. Feeling even more frustrated I decide to stage a trip.


    As I start to fall Takeshi quickly catches me in his arms.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari! Are you ok?¡±


    ¡°Better now.¡± ¨CI try to slide his hand that is around my waist down.-


    Takeshi quickly pulls his hand back. ¡°Fine Miss Inari, I am going back to the others.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not fair! I promise I won¡¯t do anything else, but please at least dance with me right.¡±


    I finally get Takeshi to agree, and we begin to dance again. This time he is doing a proper job of it but every time a move brings us closer together he turns his head. Even still it is far less awkward then it was before, and I start to enjoy myself.


    Akane and Yuji join the dance as well, but they are both drunk enough that they are no better than the rest of the villagers. Satoshi appears to want to ask Saki to dance but Midori remains in-between them with a piercing gaze making him keep his distance. I will have to make sure to give Midori a special treat later.


    After a while we go sit back down, Yuji and Akane give it up as well collapsing back on the ground with us.


    Saki: ¡°Does that mean you two are going to finally admit that you are in a relationship together?¡±


    I guess I wasn¡¯t the only one that noticed it, but both of them still try to deny it.


    Yuji: ¡°It was just a bit of dancing¡­¡±


    Akane: ¡°The alcohol¡­ I blame the alcohol.¡±


    ¡°You two have been sneaking off together every chance you get for months now. I haven¡¯t said anything because it has been quite entertaining to watch, but I have grown rather bored with it so just admit it.¡±


    They both look shocked that they have been outed, and even Takeshi makes a comment that he didn¡¯t realize that they were even trying to keep the relationship a secret and that everyone knew. He then looks rather sternly at me and says.This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    Takeshi: ¡°What do you mean entertaining to watch?¡±


    ¡°You know full well I can see everything, it shouldn¡¯t be that big of a shock.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Just because you can, doesn¡¯t mean you should. Besides you make it sound like you went out of your way to spy on them.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s my dungeon I have a right to know what goes on within it! Besides it¡¯s not just them is everyone.¡±


    It seems like all the favor I gained with Takeshi during the dance is now lost, and for some reason Saki and Satoshi are both blushing. I really might need to keep a closer eye on them two¡­


    Takeshi: ¡°Things like that are private, and you should stay out of it!¡±


    ¡°You would be surprised the kinds of things you can find out about people when they are intimate with someone. Like the leatherworker, did you know she was sleeping with the blacksmiths partner long before the Oni killed him? Apparently her husband could never take care of her like his partner could. Although it does lead to some misunderstandings as well like I thought Tatsuo was quite the ladies¡¯ man till I realized he didn¡¯t sleep with any of them he was just comforting the widows that lost their husbands in the attack. Although I am sure quite a few of them wouldn¡¯t have turned him down if he tried.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari!¡±


    ¡°12 is the number of villagers that called out just like that while masturbating. At least I know I have some options. Although Akane¡¯s name is on a far more number of lips and for some odd reason even Saki¡¯s name is more popular, but for her it seems to be most of the older men for some reason.¡±


    Akane: ¡°You hear that Yuji, you screw up and I can drop you like a rock.¡± ¨CShe says while Saki covers her blushing face with her hands.-


    ¡°Don¡¯t get to full of yourself, quite a few women favor Yuji as well. Not as many as Takeshi of course, but they would have to go through me first.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, you really must stop watching such things!¡±


    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t have to if you would just make a move already.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I have had enough, and I am going to bed!¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s go!¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Alone!¡±


    Takeshi then storms off but before he makes it too far I call out to him. ¡°Remember I¡¯ll be watching!~¡± He stops in his tracks, but after a few seconds he starts moving again disappearing behind the temple.


    Akane: ¡°Mistress you may have gone too far this time, he seemed quite mad with you¡­¡±


    ¡°He¡¯ll get over it, so Satoshi you want to hear how many woman you have stirred up?¡±


    Satoshi is quite embarrassed as well, and looks like he is about to say something but decides against it remaining silent. I then get the start of a new day message, and I notice I am in quite the dire straight with xp, so starting in the morning we are going to have to begin focusing on rebuilding my spent xp.


    ¡°Well everyone get a good rest tonight. After what I added we need to start rebuilding our stores of xp for a while.¡±


    We spend the next few weeks getting my xp back to a more comfortable level, but with my consumption level being so high now it is actually quite hard to reach over 25,000xp again. I would like to summon another group to acquire xp but at the moment trying to explain how they got here would be tricky enough.


    Takeshi hasn¡¯t seemed to forgive me for the comments I made during my drunken state at the party, but he doesn¡¯t let it affect his protection of me which actually feels worse than if he shunned me completely.


    My two little foxes have seemed to fit right in the village now, they pretty much do whatever they want and people pamper them. Aoi will take anything given to it, but Midori still will only associate with the single women.


    Yuji and Akane have seemed more distant lately. They still spend some alone time together, but it seems they don¡¯t put the effort forth as much as before. Now that they have been found out it almost seems like they are not near as interested in each other anymore.


    New villagers have begun to arrive as well. At first only 1 family arrived which worried Tatsuo quite a bit, but the next week was 3 families, and the last caravan had 8 families almost doubling the town¡¯s population. Most of the new people are all farmers, which is ok because that¡¯s what we needed the most of, but I hope if any more arrive they start having more occupations.


    The villagers still haven¡¯t discovered the next floor of the mine yet, but giving there are only a small handful of miners I think the ore respawns at a faster rate than they can gather it, and they don¡¯t go very deep, so it may take a while.


    When my birthday rolls around I receive a message from Mommy, and she tells me about the two new cores that were born in daddy¡¯s dungeon this year. It seems they are doing good, and Mommy and Daddy are even planning to get married at the end of the month.


    Unfortunately it would be too hard for me to try to attend, as our xp is still in an unstable way, and the traveling would just be too difficult. My monsters and Takeshi try to make a big deal out of my birthday. They even rope in Tatsuo, but with the state of the village and my dungeon at the moment. There isn¡¯t much that they can do.


    There isn¡¯t even any alcohol left after the celebration a while back so my party results to just everyone just gathering around and talking. From the few gifts I receive from the villagers it¡¯s clear they still think I am Inari, or at least one of Inari¡¯s messengers. I was hoping the foxes would have put that kind of talk to rest, but it looks like it wasn¡¯t as effective as I would have hoped.


    The next month goes pretty smoothly and I start to reach a comfortable level again, and about a week after Mommy and Daddy¡¯s wedding I receive a message.


    Madam Erin: (I am going to be in the neighborhood, I would like the chance to sit down and chat again, perhaps this time without the human poking into our business. Shall we meet in the village tomorrow morning?)


    (The village has been relocated to inside my dungeon. That won¡¯t be a problem will it?¡±


    Madam Erin: (And by your dungeon I assume you mean within the grounds of the temple? What of the adventurer¡¯s guild? Is it within your dungeon as well?)


    (That is correct. The Oni made a move on the village taking it out only a small portion was able to survive and the chose to relocate to the safety of my dungeon.)


    Madam Erin: (How convenient for you¡­ If the adventurer¡¯s guild is inside of your dungeon it may prove more difficult for me to visit you. I will contact you further when I find out more.)


    In the neighborhood she says¡­ It seems like she was purposely coming to talk with me specifically. It seems her way of teleportation can¡¯t be within another dungeon, but even wanting to talk in private yet asking to meet in the village and not my dungeon means I wasn¡¯t imagining the fact that she is purposely avoiding entering my dungeon.


    I would like to know what she knows of [Inari¡¯s Providence] but I am afraid of asking about it because I don¡¯t want to give her more information than I have to. For now I guess I will just have to keep building my xp up, and wait.


    It takes another two weeks before I head from Madam Erin again, and by then I have started to build up enough xp again that even if something comes up and I have to give my monsters a few days rest we should still be fine.


    Madam Erin: (On further investigation I have been able to find a way to visit, however it is still very costly. I will arrive this afternoon and expect you to meet me just after noon at the base of the stairs leading up to your dungeon.)


    (As you can understand leaving my dungeon is quite the difficult, especially with all the villagers in my dungeon, and the attacks from the Oni when I step out.)


    Madam Erin: (As I am a more sizeable target I am sure you won¡¯t have any problems reaching the base of the stairs. As for keeping an eye on your dungeon I am sure you wouldn¡¯t have allowed the villagers within the dungeon if you were that worried.)


    (Fine I will be there, however for my protection I will have to bring quite a few of my monsters along.)


    Madam Erin: (Even all of your monsters together would prove to be no threat to me, so I have no objections. I will see you in a few hours.)


    The longer I am out of the dungeon the more the Oni gather, so I don¡¯t want to show up to early, I let the others know and then wait till the last possible moment to move out. Without being able to keep an eye on it I decided against using a lure this time as we make our way down the stairs.


    We encountered a large group of Oni right at the beginning but since then it has died down a lot, maybe what Madam Erin said is true and they are all bothering her at the moment. As the bottom of the stairs comes into sight it all but confirms it.


    At the base of the stairs stands Madam Erin, but surrounding her in every direction is Oni after Oni corpses piled up. As we approach she deals with a few more Oni heading her way and then summons up some massively thick earthen walls from the ground. They then stretch outward scattering the many corpses until my monsters, Madam Erin, and I are the only things within it.


    Madam Erin: ¡°Far from permeant but this should be able to keep them at bay long enough for us to have a little chat. I see you didn¡¯t bring Takeshi. Getting to speak with him in great detail before sending him I was hoping to speak with him again.¡±


    ¡°As he is still not bound to my dungeon we are unable to gather xp with him being in the group, so he often stays behind to keep an eye on things if I have to go out. I am sure you didn¡¯t come all this way to speak with him however.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Indeed, my first question for you is the protection surrounding your dungeon. What more have you learned of it?¡±


    ¡°It has continued to keep me safe, so that is all I need to know.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Surely by now you have tried to learn more about, or test its limit. I see you haven¡¯t spread your dungeon beyond the temple grounds, so are you not capable of spreading beyond it?¡±


    ¡°It sounds like you arrived earlier then you let on, I guess that means you have been snooping around?¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°There are quite a few things that have left me curious about it, so I am not going to apologize for it, and besides as I haven¡¯t entered your dungeon what I do outside of it should be of none of your concern.¡±


    ¡°As a matter of fact I have placed rooms outside of the temple grounds, but they are not offered the same protection so the Oni attempts to destroy it. The gathering of Oni worries the villagers so I was forced to break the rooms down.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°You have quite a number of floors to your dungeon now, does the protection extend down as well then?¡±


    ¡°Well you know as well as I do dungeon walls are indestructible unless summoned in a way that allows it, so even if it doesn¡¯t I don¡¯t think I have to worry about the Oni trying to dig into the dungeon or anything.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°So much of this situation is peculiar as it is. What about the cause of the protection, have you been able to determine if it was really was from one of the old gods?¡±


    I don¡¯t know if I should say anything else, but if I don¡¯t at least give some information I might never learn anything else. Madam Erin is an elder so even if I can¡¯t completely trust her I should be able to at least see if I can get any more information.


    ¡°I will only speak more about this if you guarantee that the conversation does not pass to anyone else.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°As an elder you have my word.¡±


    ¡°This includes the other elders.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°It will be our secret.¡±


    ¡°I have determined that [Menu] recognizes it as being from Inari, but just the fact that [Menu] recognizes it might mean the exact opposite as well.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°What do you mean [Menu] recognizes it?¡±


    ¡°When I placed a room outside of the temple grounds [Menu] warned me about placing rooms outside of [Inari¡¯s Providence] however even searching [Menu] for it I couldn¡¯t find any more information.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°[Menu] doesn¡¯t work well for me out here, but I will further investigate it when I return. If I find any information that might be useful I promise to share it with you. The next item I would like to ask you about is the Oni themselves. Have you learned any more about them?¡±


    ¡°No, after your last visit that waves that followed brought the stronger Oni Generals, but since then it hasn¡¯t changed.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°You are no closer to finding their source?¡±


    ¡°At the moment they are providing me with much needed xp, so their source is of little importance as long as they keep coming.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Are you not the least bit curious?¡±


    ¡°Curious yes, but I can¡¯t leave my dungeon for more than a few hours without their numbers becoming too great, and the situation with my dungeon I can¡¯t afford to send my monsters out gallivanting around, so for the moment I will just take what I can get while I can.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°That is a bit of a shame, I was hoping we could look forward to placing more dungeon cores in Shima soon due to your success, but it appears not much has changed.¡±


    ¡°The arrival of the Oni Generals after your last visit, and the Oni¡¯s attack on the village, I would even go as far to say as it has gotten worse. Of course that only seems to be in effect around this forest, I have found out that the rest of Shima seems to be getting along like they have been for the last 30 or so years.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°My next question is how much do you plan to play out this Inari thing?¡±


    ¡°I have made it abundantly clear that only my name is that of Inari, because with the protection around my dungeon I don¡¯t want to anger Inari in any way, but of course quite a few of the humans still think if I am not the god Inari, that I at least serve it. With the continued growth of my dungeon in which helps the humans all being in Inari¡¯s name however I guess you could say I serve Inari in a way.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°I have heard of spells, weapons, and the like that are said to be from the old gods, but they are mere legends at best. Something like this barrier of yours is quite interesting, but also terrifying in its own right. If this means the old gods really did or do exist where does that leave us dungeon cores?¡±


    ¡°I am choosing to believe in the old gods, or at least Inari for that matter. Not only the barrier but a few of my skills I have gained are in Inari¡¯s name. I am sure that answers your question as well. For all we truly know maybe the old gods are behind [Menu] maybe everything dungeon cores do is in some way benefiting them.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Since our arrival humans have turned away from the old gods so I find that hard to believe. Even going as far to worship some of us like Faron, so I am sure if they do exist and are still around they wouldn¡¯t be happy with most of us.¡±


    ¡°Well as much as I can say I don¡¯t much mind, the philosophical debate, I am sure that isn¡¯t why you are here.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Everything has been changing so fast these last few years. I am starting to wonder if we even know what we are doing anymore¡­ Maybe Dyson is right.¡±


    ¡°I just think for a lot of years dungeon cores were just doing everything they could just to survive, and only now do some dungeon cores now get the chance to not only survive but start to live. Humans lifespans are so short they have easily forgotten many of the troubled times, but the other elders and you don¡¯t have that luxury. As more and more of the newer dungeon cores find their own ways in the world you got to just ask yourself can you adapt or are the scars just too deep to heal?¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°And here I thought you said you were done with the philosophical debate¡­¡±


    ¡°I am just telling you my perspective on the situation. Elder Dyson isn¡¯t a particularly old dungeon core, he just had the unique ability to spend time as a human and I think that alone was enough to grant him the ability to see it from the other side. New dungeon cores are born with knowledge from past dungeon cores, so it¡¯s only natural that after Dyson¡¯s experience the newer cores being born would be more adaptable as well.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°I have never thought of it that way¡­ You definitely think a lot like your father.¡±


    ¡°Well daddy is a special case in a lot of ways, but I think I will take that as a compliment.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°Well I believe I have taken up enough of your time. I didn¡¯t get to learn all that I wanted to but perhaps I can figure out more about this [Inari¡¯s Providence] back home, and I can definitely say it was an interesting conversation to say the least.¡±


    ¡°Yes it sounds like it is starting to get quite rowdy outside. I assume you have a plan when you drop the walls?¡±


    Madam Erin then casts a spell and the walls fall outward. Most of the Oni were fighting to get through them so they are crushed by the tons of stone. The few remaining Oni are not too hard to pick off and after bidding Madam Erin farewell my monsters and I then head back to the dungeon.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari I am so glad you made it back safely.¡±


    ¡°I told you it wouldn¡¯t be a problem, although I can¡¯t say it was a very productive meeting either.¡±


    Saki: ¡°I think Inari-sama really managed to impress Madam Erin-sama. I also think Inari would be happy as well.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about all that¡­ Well Madam Erin knows about [Inari¡¯s Providence] now so there isn¡¯t any going back. We should begin training even harder just to be on the safe side.¡±


    With that we begin training even harder every day. That is until a week later when I receive a message from Mommy.


    Belinda: (Your daddy has been kidnapped.)

 Reinforcements (Inari Arc)

    After receiving the message from Mommy I flew into a panic. Unfortunately surrounded by Oni on all sides, and being way out here in Shima there isn¡¯t much I can do except comfort Mommy through messages.


    We know he is alive because his dungeon is active, but that doesn¡¯t make us any less worried, and after a week passes and there is still no word I decide I have to do something¡­


    (Madam Erin, I want to help search for Daddy, I would like you to come pick me up so I can help with the search for him.)


    Madam Erin: (I appreciate your loyalty to you father, but something like that is quite difficult.)


    (You came to my dungeon for little more than just talk twice now, surely there is something I can do to convince you.)


    Madam Erin: (I will make a deal with you. Can¡¯t bring you back to the mainland, but if you investigate something for me I promise to put more resources forth in helping to locate your father.)


    (What could I do to help you¡­?)


    Madam Erin: (During my visit I of course not only visited you, but spent some time at several other locations in Shima. While in the capital I heard rumors of a dungeon not far from your forest that just may be the source of the Oni. If it is indeed a dungeon as an Elder I can¡¯t interfere, but the fact that it is a dungeon we know nothing about is concerning as well.)


    (You know the Oni surround me when I leave the temple grounds, how am I supposed to do anything to help?)


    Madam Erin: (The Oni have always made an effort to destroy dungeons, but when no dungeons are present they maintain a status quo. Your arrival in the forest a little over a year ago made it quite dangerous in that forest, but outside of it I barely encountered any Oni at all. Of course the more time you spend in a location the more they will start to gather, but if you can find the source quickly you might just be able to discover what is going on.)


    (I told you before I rely on the Oni, and to put a stop to them now would seriously hinder my dungeon.)


    Madam Erin: (Who said anything about putting a stop to them? I just asked you to determine their source. Besides I thought you wanted to do something to help your father, and doing this for me will do just that.)


    (While I can¡¯t make any promises, give me all the details and I will think on it.)


    Madam Erin then tells me what she knows and what she expects from me¡­ I don¡¯t really know if I can do anything about it, but I will talk with the others and see what they think about it. I decide to gather my monsters and ask them what they think.


    Yuji: ¡°I believe it is too dangerous for you to do something like that mistress, but if you leave it to Akane, the others, and myself. Then I promise we will get to the bottom of it for you to help your father.¡±


    Akane: ¡°What have I told you about speaking for me!? But you do make a valid point. If our mistress wishes it I will see it through to the end.¡±


    Saki: ¡°What about the temple and the dungeon? If we all go, there is no way to gather enough xp to sustain the dungeon and village.¡±


    ¡°I hate to speak ill of Daddy due to what has happened, but I won¡¯t sit on the sidelines like he has. If he had more combat experience maybe he wouldn¡¯t have been kidnapped. I am going to go as well.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°This isn¡¯t a good idea. Who will watch the dungeon?¡±


    ¡°You have guarded my dungeon this entire time. Can¡¯t I count on you to keep it safe in my absence?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I am your shield, I can¡¯t let you leave that far away from the dungeon and not protect you.¡±


    ¡°Since you still are not one of my dungeon monsters it would really hurt us to have you along. Besides I can protect my body, but you protecting my crystal would mean so much more to me.¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Saki-san had a point though, if we leave how we are going to maintain the dungeon, we can only gain enough xp to sustain us for 7 days out of every 5 of gathering. It would take months to be able to even leave the dungeon unattended for several weeks.¡±


    ¡°I have a plan for that as well. It will take a full week before we can leave, and if it is looked at too hard it will be seen through, but I think we have earned enough trust with the village we might just get away with it.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°What do you plan on doing¡­?¡±


    ¡°A caravan is due in a few hours. If we claim I received a letter about receiving more servants from back home, which would give us an entire week to summon another group of monsters to gather xp for us while we are away. We will of course have to double down our efforts in gathering xp this week to make sure we have enough though.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°It would take months from the letter to their arrival to make it believable.¡±


    ¡°We can say the letter is just the conformation and that they are right behind it.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°No offense Mistress, but that is thin at best¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s the best we can do! Even if I went to the mainland to search for Daddy, I don¡¯t have a clue as to where to look, but as Madam Erin is an Elder she has far more resources available to her. If doing this for her means she puts them resources into finding Daddy, this is by far the best thing I can do to help Mommy & Daddy.¡±


    Nobody seems to like the idea but they all eventually agree. I write out a letter that looks large and official looking and since Yuji is a ninja he has no problem sneaking it into the other correspondences that arrive when the caravan arrives that afternoon.


    After placing the letter I have my monsters double down on their efforts in gathering xp, using one of my Oni ¡°lures¡± to maximize the amount of Oni. After my monsters begin Tatsuo arrives on our doorstep with the letter Yuji snuck into the caravan¡¯s correspondences. After pretending to read the letter I tell Tatsuo what is written.


    ¡°Months ago when the Oni Generals first began to appear I sent a letter home saying how dangerous it had become, it seems that letter reached my parents and they decided to send more servants to protect me. The letter says they should arrive shortly after the letter.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Your servants were all pretty green in the beginning, will more even be able to make it through the forest now¡­?¡±


    ¡°It says they are part of the warrior faction, so this might be good news. With their arrival we can begin scouting the forest again, while they protect the village and the temple.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Wait you plan on leaving the village? Your magical ability seems to draw the Oni every time you leave the temple grounds, do you really think that is a good idea?¡±


    ¡°I have my lures, and if we just stay scared in the village forever, the Oni will always have control. They seem to be thicker in the forest then the rest of Shima, so maybe the answer it here somewhere.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°You have already done so much for us though¡­ I know you claim you are not associated with Inari, but even if it is just the fact you and your servant¡¯s dedication to rebuilding and protecting the Inari temple, for that reason alone Inari has smiled down on us because of you. We couldn¡¯t ask for you to do anything else¡­¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re not asking me, I am doing it because I want to. I have wanted to do it for a long time now, but after the village relocated here, and everything else it has been hard. With more help from my parents though I am sure we can get to the bottom of this.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Even if Inari doesn¡¯t talk to you directly¡­ Inari is lucky to have you.¡±


    ¡°Well if more servants really are coming I need to start making some preparations, so if you will excuse me¡­¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Of course, and if the village can do anything to assist, don¡¯t hesitate to ask.¡±


    After my monsters return that evening and I break down the room outside I look to see how we sit on xp. After deducting what my consumption will be for at least the next 24 hours, and the cost to make another lure I have a little xp to work with.


    I could start with another beastkin at level 15, but it would probably be smarter to summon another boss monster. The cost for my second boss monster is 10,000xp though so I would have to wait to gather more xp before I do anything else.


    This could backfire all together and I might not even get a sentient humanoid now that would really put us in a bind. Well I didn¡¯t give Tatsuo a specific time frame that the group will be arriving so even if it¡¯s a few weeks to build up enough xp that should be alright.


    After hitting the confirmation I watch our xp reach critically low levels again, and the core room is filled with light. Luckily when the light clears the monster before me is a female fox beastkin.


    Like Yuji she has silver ears and a tail with black hair but hers is quite long. Her build is halfway between Saki and Akane so similar to mine. Although she may have me beat ever so slightly in breast size, but its close enough I will deny it till the day I die. She looks around the room and then quickly kneels to me.


    Beastkin: ¡°Mistress what is you command?¡±


    ¡°Only being level 1 there isn¡¯t much you can do at the moment, but being a boss monster means your strength will be a bit greater than the normal monsters, so once you level up some I am sure you will be leading your group in no time. As to that though we are pretty strapped for xp at the moment so you are the first member of your team I have summoned, for now you will be on standby until we can gather you all together.¡±


    Beastkin: ¡°As you wish Mistress.¡±


    I debate it for a while and decide to summon her clothes in the Gowen fashion instead of Shima, as they are supposed to be traveling in from abroad. I will have to give her a Shima name however or it won¡¯t make much since for the others to have Shima names.


    ¡°Alright now that you have some clothes let¡¯s think up a name for you¡­ How about Chika?¡±


    Chika: ¡°If that is what Mistress wishes.¡±


    I then decide to look at assigning her a class. There are quite a few but even being a boss monster I am surprised to find none of them are magically inclined. They also are still Shima classes. Some of them are familiar but the one that stands out the most is the Onna-bugeisha so I select it.


    Searching gear for that class looks pretty broad, but for the most part it is about the same as it is for Akane, but that will have to wait till we get a bit more xp.


    ¡°Oh and one final thing, once we introduce you to the villagers as long as you preform your duties you are free to act on your own. The only exception is Takeshi, who is my partner, and Satoshi who is one of my monsters are both off limits. Follow them rules and everything should be fine. Do I make myself clear?¡±


    Chika: ¡°Understood Mistress.¡±


    ¡°Good, now we can¡¯t have you all crammed in my bedroom till we get the group together, so I am going to send you down to an area that isn¡¯t accessible to the outside. It may be a bit boring till we get your group together, but you will just have to deal with it for now.¡±


    Chika: ¡°As you wish Mistress.¡±


    I then transfer her to the large area behind the wall that I blocked the villagers from on the floor beneath the residential area. There isn¡¯t anything else there, but she has plenty of room to move around at least.


    When the others aren¡¯t gathering xp I might send them to visit with her a bit at least till we can get a few more of the others together. It takes a few more days of hard training, my monsters are positively exhausted, and I even make a few trips out with them as well to help take the load off of them before we can summon another monster.


    I select the fox beastkin, with the xp we have gathered I raise the level up to 15, and summoning results in another female fox beastkin. This one like Akane and Saki has red hair, fur, and tail. She is built like Saki but has quite a bit larger breasts. They are still small quite a bit smaller than mine though so I am pleased with her appearance.Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    After clothing her, giving her the name Hotaru, and checking a class for her I found the shugenja which seems to be a magic class so I quickly selected it. I then tell her what I expect from her and also give her the warning about Takeshi and Satoshi before sending her to Chika.


    Things continue like that for a while. My monsters work their hardest to gather xp and then after a few days I summon another, and another, and so on. It takes 2 entire weeks and I only have 6 new monsters, and instead of summoning a 7<sup>th</sup> I summon gear for them dropping us back down to critical levels.


    I ended up with Chika, Hotaru, and Yuzuki who is a grey fox with light colored hair, her build is quite delicate like Saki¡¯s but she is tall, also like Saki she is a miko. At least we have someone to watch the temple for us while Saki is away.


    Then we got Kaori a second grey fox but she has black hair, her build is similar to Akane¡¯s which means her breasts cause me a bit of distress, and even her class is Sohei is like that of Akane. Her personality is a bit more reserved but Satoshi and Takeshi seems to like that, so she might be even more worrisome then Akane is.


    The fifth beastkin I summoned resulted in a fox with brown ears, tail, and hair. I gave her the name Rin and she shares the Onna-bugeisha class along with Chika. She is quite tall maybe even as tall of some of the men, but her breasts are equal to that of Saki so I am sure I have nothing to worry about with her. Not to take any chances though I give her the same stern warning as all the rest.


    The final beastkin I manually set to male because for some reason even though it should have been a 50/50 chance all the others were female. I am disappointed however when the result is another brown hair, ears, and tailed fox that has a disappointing body like Yuji¡¯s¡­ The only redeeming feature is he is at least a magic user joining Hotaru with the shugenja class.


    I am a little worried that 50% of the group is magic users, but magic classes are hard to come by so I am not going to complain and look at it as a blessing. All of the monsters but Chika are summoned in at level 15 so they will have to protect her till she can catch up, but as a boss monster that shouldn¡¯t be no time at all.


    The night before I plan to introduce them to the village I gather all of my monsters together, and give them a rundown of the plan. When Akane¡¯s and Yuji¡¯s group go out in the morning to gather xp near a lure I will have the others sneak out of the village, make their way around though the forest, and then enter from the front way.


    At level 15 they should be able to handle a few stray Oni and with the lure they won¡¯t probably have to worry about the Oni Generals so my only concern is that they keep Chika well protected. After I finish I let everyone get to know each other a bit better.


    Yuji has already begun to hit on several of the women, but Akane doesn¡¯t seem to mind as she flirts with the new male in the group Akihiro. Saki seems excited to have another Miko to visit with while Satoshi silently smiles in the background. Chika, Hotaru, and Rin seem content visiting together, but they have made several questionable glances at my Takeshi and started to giggle¡­


    Everyone is supposed to know each other from back on the mainland so I don¡¯t put an end to the gathering until I am sure at least everyone knows enough about each other to make it passable.


    The next morning after setting the lure we start the plan. As the first group goes out, it gathers the usual onlookers that it seems to do every day. Other than the gawkers most of the other villagers are either in the temple or working so I quickly transfer the second group at the edge of the temple grounds near an isolated back corner of the grounds, and they quickly disappear into the tree line.


    I told them to wait a couple hours gathering a bit of xp if they could, but if things got to be too much for them to quickly make their way for the main entrance to the temple grounds. They seemed to do alright though because it¡¯s not till almost noon till I hear the villagers talking about someone making their way up the steps.


    They do look like they have seen a bit of battle as they make their way up, but with three mages, two of which capable of healing it doesn¡¯t seem to have bothered them any. Tatsuo apparently got word as well as he joins me at the edge of the temple grounds as the monsters cross the threshold.


    A quick glance at the monsters have returned from battle screen shows me they seemed to have dealt with at least 16 of the normal Oni, or any combination of Oni and Oni generals to give that amount of xp. It was enough for Chika to jump up to level 7 so I feel they will do just fine.


    They quickly make their way to me and they all take a knee.


    Chika: ¡°Mistress Inari, we have finally arrived.¡±


    ¡°Chika, it looks like you have been well. How are my parents doing?¡±


    Chika: ¡°They are sad their daughter has decided not to make a quick return after visiting Shima, but as you are doing what you mother has dreamed about her entire life. They understand.¡±


    ¡°Tatsuo, I would like to introduce you to Chika, she is one of the guard captains from back home. It also looks like she brought along with her, Rin, Hotaru, Yuzuki, Kaori, and Akihiro.¡± ¨CI say while motioning to each one.-


    Tatsuo: ¡°All Shima names¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Mother is quite fond¡­¡±


    Chika: ¡°It is also a great honor for the Grand Mistress to bless the newborns of the village with a name, but Mistress I must inform you I was demoted. I however welcome it, as it was a blessing that allowed me to make this journey.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°It¡¯s kind of strange to think that somewhere on the mainland is a village entirely of fox beastkin that live in what I would assume a Shima village of my father¡¯s father would be like.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not quite that bad, as you can see they are dressed like others from the mainland. Although they were trained in the styles of Shima combat and like Saki, Yuzuki there is well versed as a Miko.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I guess your mother being versed in the old ways of Shima is why we are all still alive, so I would like to thank her one day¡­¡±


    ¡°Well if you will excuse me, I am sure they are quite tired from their journey, and we have quite a bit to catch up on. Once they get settled in we can speak in greater length.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Yes, please forgive me.¡± ¨CHe then addresses the new monsters before departing.- ¡°Your Mistress has really pulled through for us, so any friends of hers are more than welcome.¡±


    Once he is out of earshot I sigh and say. ¡°So far so good¡­ Alright now we will spend a few hours out and about making sure everyone learns of your arrival. Then if everything goes well in a few days we will begin the next stage of the plan.¡±


    We spend the next few days making sure everyone has grown use to the new monsters presence. There are a few rumors circulating but nothing more than normal. All in all it seemed to actually go much better than I had hoped.


    Sending both groups out every day has also really helped in building up our xp, and a week after their arrival we then begin the next stage.


    Daddy has been missing a full month now and I have yet to start to do anything about it, but don¡¯t worry Mommy that is all going to change now. Once I do this for Madam Erin then surely she will be able to locate Daddy in no time.


    I set Chika up with [Menu] access while we are gone, but I command her to pass any use of it though Takeshi first¡­ I wouldn¡¯t have to go through all this if he would just join us¡­ I then meet with Tatsuo before our departure.


    Tatsuo: ¡°You are really going to go out there?¡±


    ¡°I am leaving Takeshi in charge of my affairs while I am gone. As Chika was once a guard captain she has a magic that will allow her to contact me if it¡¯s an emergency, so if something happens let her or Takeshi know, and she can relay the message to me.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°You are leaving us in very capable hands¡­ I am more worried about you.¡±


    ¡°Well we can be gone a week, a month, or even several, but I promise I will send a message to Chika here and there to let you all know we are still kicking.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Without you here are you sure Inari isn¡¯t going to kick us out?¡±


    ¡°If you listen to Yuzuki I don¡¯t think you will have a problem.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Do promise me you will take care of yourself¡­¡±


    ¡°I promise¡­ Now if you excuse me I need to guilt Takeshi into something.¡±


    Tatsuo laughs and excuses himself.


    ¡°Takeshi¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I refuse¡­¡±


    ¡°I haven¡¯t even said anything yet.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I know you well enough, and you will return without fail, so the answer is no.¡±


    ¡°I wish I had your confidence, I am honestly really scared you know¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°We know your father is alive, and you parents are both very capable people. They would never ask you to give your life for something like this, so promise me if things look bad at all, you will then swiftly return. You can always regroup and try again, but only if you are alive.¡±


    ¡°I leave my heart in your hands. Promise me you will not let it break.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I promise I will guard it with my life.¡±


    ¡°Not your life.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari¡­?¡±


    ¡°Your life holds more value to me, because if you lose your life I promise it will break just the same.¡±


    I then quickly wrap my arms around him embracing him. He raises his arms up and says. ¡°Miss Inari! That is improper.¡±


    ¡°This is non-negotiable, please let me at leave have this much¡­¡±


    When his arms are finally lowers and I feel his embrace as well I start to slide my hand down but stop. Instead I wiggle my head burying into his chest and squeezing him tighter. After he lets go I take one last deep breath breathing him in and I then let him go as well.


    Then on my order Chika sets off an extra-large lure out back to draw as many Oni as possible. Once the group begins to work on them Yuji, Akane, Satoshi, Saki, and I head out of the dungeon quickly making our way in the direction Madam Erin told me about.


    We hurry through the forest making good time, we have encountered a few Oni but we dealt with them swiftly. From the information we have it would take two days to clear the forest in the direction we are going, but we have to clear it in one, or the odds are the Oni will become too thick and we will become stuck.


    Even as the sun starts to pass beyond the horizon that evening we haven¡¯t seen the edge of the forest. We haven¡¯t quit moving from the moment we stepped out of the dungeon and everyone appears quite tired.


    The only one that seems like they just can¡¯t take any more though is Saki, Satoshi however scoops her up in his arms and we continue on our way. Even after the sun has completely dropped from the sky we keep going.


    I know we are being followed because I can hear the rustling behind us, but just how many I don¡¯t know, and I am not prepared to stop to find out. After resting in Satoshi¡¯s arms for a while Saki insisted on moving on her own again, but Yuji looks like he can¡¯t take much more, and after carrying Saki, Satoshi looks like he wouldn¡¯t be too far behind him.


    ¡°Five minutes. I will give you all five minutes rest. You all hit some trees going up them and I will circle back.¡±


    Yuji: -While breathing quite heavily.- ¡°We can¡¯t leave you alone¡­¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t look like you can go on for another minute much less till we clear the forest. I have plenty of stamina left, and magic, just do as I say.¡±


    Akane: ¡°We will leave it to you Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°Now!¡±


    They quickly disappear up nearby trees as I keep moving. I don¡¯t know how many are behind me, but now I am completely alone¡­ Once I am about to start circling back I see something that makes me change my mind.


    I break through the cover of the trees, now I will be able to get an accurate count of how many Oni are behind me before circling back for the others. I however quickly start to break out in a cold sweat¡­ 5¡­ 15¡­30¡­ Dozens maybe even 100 Oni pour from the forest¡­


    They will never stop, so I will take as many as I can then regroup with the others. I don¡¯t stop moving but I also start to arch around so I can launch spells at the Oni. Spell after spell I let loose drops Oni after Oni, but they just still keep coming.


    Not only that but casting and moving in an arch means they are starting to get closer and closer. The only saving grace is every Oni we have ever seen has the exact same equipment, those stupid clubs. Even the Oni Generals just have larger uglier clubs. If there were any mages or archers I wouldn¡¯t stand a chance.


    I don¡¯t know how many Oni I have killed but one or two have dropped with every single spell I have cast. I have casted over two dozen spells, but it doesn¡¯t seem to have even made a dent in the amount of Oni. I have now gone through about half of my magic so I decide that without the others I can¡¯t do any more.


    When I finally do circle back I have lost enough ground that if I make a mistake now the Oni will be right on top of me. The Oni are close enough on my heels now I can hear their breaths. I quickly toss a few spells trying to down a couple trees to maybe slow them down a bit.


    It helps a bit, but when I reach the location where I left the others I don¡¯t see them anywhere¡­ I said five minutes and it has been closer to 30. Opening [Menu] and fighting with [Communication] right now while running through the forest will surely trip me up, so I can only hope they headed in the direction they seen me disappear too.


    I feel one of the Oni¡¯s clubs graze my back. That chainmail the village had made for me really did its job. Another hit though and it might not do much damage to my hp but it might slow me down and that right now would prove fatal¡­


    I finally break the cover of the trees again and off in the distance I can see the others.


    ¡°What the hell where you all thinking!?¡± ¨CI scream out to them.-


    I need to turn and start fighting before I catch up with the others, but if I slow down even in the slightest the Oni will be on top of me. I start focusing my magic empowering a spell to its fullest, I know it won¡¯t hold but it may give me just enough time¡­


    I dive forward and quickly let loose the [Stone Pillar] spell it causes a little damage to me as it launches right underneath me, but it lifts me up in the air out of the reach of the Oni, for at least a few seconds. I really wish I had more defensive magic instead of all attack magic. [Stone Wall] would be far more useful right about now¡­


    I quickly start throwing spells down into the crowd underneath me. Unlike [Stone Wall], [Stone Pillar]  doesn¡¯t last very long, but it can¡¯t take damage either. After only throwing two or three spells into the crowd I cast another stone pillar a few feet away launching several Oni into the air.


    I quickly jump to the other pillar just as the first collapses but only have time to regain my footing and throw one more spell before I have to cast [Stone Pillar] yet again. The rest of the group has their weapons drawn and are quickly heading my direction, but they are still far enough that even Saki¡¯s spells still cannot reach.


    An Oni manages to stay on top next [Stone Pillar] without being thrown clear so instead of casting into the crowd I have to attack it with my staff as I jump across. It almost manages to shove me off, but I manage to end it and cast another [Stone Pillar] just in time.


    The cost of [Stone Pillar] is negligible, but my magic continues to wane, and I am now not even killing any Oni, but simply hopping from one [Stone Pillar] to the next. Saki¡¯s spells however have started to hit the Oni, so the others should join the fray quite soon.


    Yet again the Oni¡¯s singular devotion of wanting me dead proves to be their downfall, as they completely ignore the others cutting them down, while they mindlessly try to climb the pillars as I hop around¡­


    I don¡¯t know how many times I cast [Stone Pillar] but by the time the Oni have finally been cleared I collapse on the ground¡­


    Yuji: ¡°Thank goodness you are safe Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°I told you to wait¡­¡±


    Akane: ¡°We waited the five minutes, and then we heard the sound of combat. We thought you might have got pinned in so we tried to rush to your aid.¡±


    ¡°Well don¡¯t let your guard down, we may be out of the forest, but that is far from the end of the Oni.¡±


    We are all are exhausted, but I want to put in a bit more ground between us and the forest, so we continue to move till after midnight. The main advantage of being out of the forest we can see far and wide. Just with the light of the moon we can see the Oni long before they get near and Saki, or myself deals with them before they get close.


    We finally have no choice but to rest for a few hours. I only have a small bit of magic left, but Saki is not only physically drained but magically as well, so I have Satoshi charge me up a bit with his ability to transfer magic. I then let Satoshi and Saki get some rest.


    ¡°After they sleep a few hours I will let you two go to sleep.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°What about you?¡±


    ¡°We need spells, so I will let them get as much sleep as possible. I when I wake them I will the rest the rest of the night.¡±


    The night is pretty quiet after that though. The occasional Oni has to be dealt with but the Oni Generals should be behind us for now¡­ After waking Saki and Satoshi I then get some rest, but it feels like I just closed my eyes and Akane is already waking me up.


    Akane: ¡°Mistress¡­ It¡¯s time.¡±


    I nod, get up, dust myself off, and we then set out on day two¡­

 Abandoned Mine (Inari Arc)

    The next few days seem to be fairing quite a bit better. We still have dealt with quite a few Oni, but nothing on the scale of the first night. I figured if the location Madam Erin is sending us to really is the source of the Oni then heading there in a straight line would mean all the Oni meant for our forest would pass by us, so we are taking a bit of a roundabout way.


    We are getting pretty close to the location Madam Erin described, and the Oni have begun to pick up, but not near enough for me to think that this would be the source in which they all come from. When we round the bend of a small hill we see a large two-storied building, or at least that is what it used to as it has been mostly burned, and it doesn¡¯t look recent.


    There are quite a few Oni milling about that haven¡¯t seemed to spot us yet, which is odd considering their normal behavior they usually seem like they can just sense me. We then notice next to the ruined building there is a small opening in the side of the hill that appears to be some kind of mine or tunnel and we spot a few Oni exit from within.


    Yuji: ¡°This really can¡¯t be the source of all Oni could it?¡±


    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t think so, and the Oni are even acting strangely.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Well their numbers don¡¯t seem to be enough to cause us a problem should we take them out and have a look?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know their behavior is worrying to me¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°That amount is not a problem even for just us, so why don¡¯t you hide here just in case something is up, and we will make the first move.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t like to be treated like some delicate flower, but most Oni would have sensed me and rushed already, so I guess it could be some kind of trap.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Leave it to us Mistress.¡±


    Yuji and Akane quickly jump up from the hill and start to move forward with their weapons drawn, but then the Oni do something that is truly disturbing. They quickly run away retreating into the tunnel¡­


    Yuji: ¡°That¡¯s new¡­ What do we do now?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t like this¡­ Not one bit¡­¡±


    I draw my staff and move forward joining the others. We keep an eye on the mouth of the tunnel, but we investigate the ruined building and the surrounding area.


    There is remains of campfires, bones of animals, and even a few adventurer remains. It looks to be something like you would see from a normal goblin cave that isn¡¯t part of a dungeon.


    Akane: ¡°If Oni really do come from a dungeon you don¡¯t suppose these ones were released do you?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know, none of this makes any sense¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Well isn¡¯t that why we are here?¡±


    ¡°I guess you¡¯re right, but I still don¡¯t like it.¡±


    We regroup and make sure we are prepared and then enter the mouth of the tunnel. From the opening it appears to be the remains of a mine, but the tunnels have been altered since the time it was a mine. We don¡¯t find any Oni right at the beginning, but there are sounds being made that make it seem like there are some not much further ahead.


    We decide to press on and eventually run into a small group of Oni. Combating them is quite simple, but they don¡¯t appear to be fighting like the Oni we usually encounter, more like the typical non-dungeon monster. We look around the area a bit more finding more scattered hides and bones of small animals. We come up to an area that has a door leading from the main shaft.


    Quietly and carefully we check it out pretty good then open it up, but as soon as we open the door small daggers pour though the door. We quickly jump back but it doesn¡¯t appear to be a trap¡­ It looks like someone just filled the room with daggers over and over again till you couldn¡¯t possibly fit another in and then shut the door.


    ¡°They look to be just standard iron daggers¡­¡±


    We spend a few minutes looking them over but every one of them is identical as the last, not even any tool marks so they appear like they have been summoned with [Menu] and not crafted by hand¡­


    Satoshi: ¡°I believe there are more here then there was before¡­¡±


    ¡°How could you possibly tell? There are literally thousands of them.¡±


    Akane: ¡°He is right¡­ When we first started looking at them the bottom of the stack was only to the third binding of the door, now it¡¯s up to the fourth.¡±


    ¡°Maybe it just shifted.¡±


    Akane: ¡°I don¡¯t think so¡­¡±


    We sit there for a bit longer just staring at the daggers. Even without touching them one will tumble from the stack every so often yet the top of the pile doesn¡¯t appear to be diminishing in the slightest.


    Yuji: ¡°You don¡¯t think it¡¯s a treasure rift do you?¡±


    ¡°It seems like other one appears every minute, how much would that rift cost with almost 1500 per day at thousands on thousands max limit.¡±


    Akane: ¡°I think we should push some of these out of the way and shut the door back¡­ If not we might not be able to get back through here later.¡±


    For now I agree and after clearing the way enough to shut the door we do just that. As we progress deeper into the mine we encounter several more groups of the normal like Oni, and even several other types of monsters like giant bats and slimes.


    ¡°If you threw everything we know about Shima out the window, you would think this is a typical dungeon if it wasn¡¯t for the fact that it appears the monsters actually had to sustain themselves.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°But if it¡¯s not a dungeon these types of monsters wouldn¡¯t coexist with one another in a natural setting, and they would all attack and try to eat one another. Instead it looks like the Oni are taking care of the other monsters bringing in animals and there are even some remains of what looks to be more adventurers or merchants.¡±


    We continue on for several more hours encountering varies types of monsters, and even a few more of the side rooms one containing endless amounts of iron swords, and another stuffed full of leather armor.


    The monsters are already pretty skittish, but once we are fighting a pretty large group of Oni we start to hear a rumble and they really begin to panic. They decide to then completely ignore us as they run to the nearest uneven area of the wall hugging it.


    Akane: ¡°This doesn¡¯t look good¡­ What do we do?¡± ¨CShe says as the rumbling continues to get louder.-


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ Just run!¡±


    We then start to run back towards the mouth of the mine, but not before we catch glimpse of a horde of Oni charging behind us. When one of the charging Oni clips one of the ones we were fighting that was huddled against the wall, and they swiftly trample it and keep up with their charge.


    I don¡¯t exactly how big the horde is but they fill the entire mineshaft as they charge closer and closer to us. If we get out in the open then there might be too many to handle, but if we make a stand here then perhaps we might be able to prevent them from overrunning us.


    ¡°Just up ahead is that curve, it gets a bit more narrow there. I think are best bet is to try to hold them off there.¡±


    Akane: ¡°What if there are tons more behind them?¡±


    ¡°Then maybe we can block their path with the dead ones. If we get out in the open we might get surrounded and really be in trouble then.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°At least let us be up front they might ignore us like before.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think it matters this time, there are so many you would end up like that other Oni that lost its grip on the wall.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Wait! Instead of the curve, what the dagger room? We can fling open that door and make a stand there, If we can¡¯t block their path with their bodies maybe the daggers will do the trick.¡±


    ¡°The tunnel is pretty narrow there, but it could take hours for enough daggers to appear to block off the path. It might be able to increase are chanced though even if it is by only a small amount¡­The only thing is that is quite a bit further ahead, can everyone keep up till then?¡±


    Saki: ¡°I should be ok Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°Alright then I might have an idea¡­¡±


    We continue on, the room with the leather armors is already behind us, but we pop open the door to the iron swords as we go past as well. The tunnel is really wide there so it probably won¡¯t do us much good, but who knows.


    As we start to approach the dagger room I can tell Yuji and Saki both are quite tired. Once we reach the door Akane flings it open and I quickly cast another [Stone Pillar]. I don¡¯t have any point of reference just targeting inside the room a few feet.


    There is an awful screeching and grinding sound that fills the mine as the stone pillar forms in the middle of what must be thousands of daggers, but with nowhere else to go the daggers pour into the shaft. It doesn¡¯t slow down the Oni at all, but they have no protection on their feet so as they plow through them quite a few shred their feet and legs causing them to collapse.


    The other Oni just trample over the top of them, but that alone is enough that half of the tunnel is already full of daggers and bodies. Using another [Stone Pillar] I try to narrow down the path even more. I then fling other spells through the gap making sure to recast [Stone Pillar] as every third spell.


    With the others help we manage to block off the path completely, but the Oni are still trying to force their way through. I eventually forgo the [Stone Pillar] and after a long winded fight I don¡¯t know if we cleared them all or there are just too many corpses for any Oni to get through¡­


    ¡°Don¡¯t let you guard down, but we should take a moment to catch our breaths now¡­¡±


    After collapsing on the floor Akane says. ¡°They seemed to be like the Oni we are used too¡­ Just what the hell is going on!?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t have a clue, but they came from deeper within, so that means after we rest a bit we are going to have to clear the tunnel and go check it out.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°This is getting to dangerous, maybe we should tell Madam Erin what we learned as say it was too much for us¡­¡±Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.


    ¡°No, I have to do this to help Daddy! We have been in this mine for half of the day. If they only attack that way once or twice a day we should be able to handle it.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Now that we know about it we can also be more mindful of choke points, and places to make a stand if we are forced to deal with another horde.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°You are both crazy! There is a literal wall of corpses right there, and we don¡¯t even know if there are more Oni still alive behind it or not!¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°I don¡¯t like it either, but I think if there were any more alive they would still be trying to push through, and I don¡¯t see or hear anything¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I will do it if that is your order Mistress, but let¡¯s make it clear right here and now that I think this is a very bad idea¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry Yuji, but we must¡­¡±


    Yuji is sitting next to the wall, he sighs, closes his eyes and lightly hits the back of his head against the wall a few times, and then jumps up.


    Yuji: ¡°Fine¡­ We should start clearing these bodies then, we don¡¯t know when the next wave will be and we need to be able to be able to see.¡±


    I don¡¯t know how many Oni we killed, but they are packed so tight into the tunnel that it takes us two hours to clear enough of them to make a path large enough for us to squeeze through. We also don¡¯t want to get stuck behind a wall of daggers, so we spend another 30 minutes clearing the area enough to shut the door back.


    We then work our way back though the tunnels. When we arrive back at the door we flung open from the sword room, not many have appeared, the swords must be on a slower spawn rate. Either that or there is just something about it we just don¡¯t understand.


    Quite a few Oni sliced themselves up on the swords though so it looks like it was worth opening the door, we do decide to clear the area and shut that door back as well. By the time we reach the area we started at when the horde of Oni tore through it looks like the other Oni we were fighting have moved on and only a few remains of those who fell during the swarm remain on the ground.


    ¡°We need to push forward a bit more to try to find another location to hold another wave off, but after we do I say we get some rest. It is already starting to get quite late.¡±


    We get lucky because it takes us another few hours before we find a suitable location, and still have not encountered another horde of Oni. We have however encountered several groups of the other types of monsters¡­ leaving us to wonder how they managed to survive the horde.


    We take turns keeping a watchful eye for Oni, but manage to make it the entire night without another incident. The next morning as we start to progress deeper the ¡°non-dungeon?¡± monsters seem to be picking up in difficulty.


    We also find to more locations that would be suitable to make a stand against another horde, but we haven¡¯t had any indication of their being another horde. We encounter a few more of the rooms stuffed with items.


    One of which was full of bows, another full of light iron armor, and one full of flawed and uncut gems. I have to admit though even though we passed by the equipment rooms, we all at least loaded up a few of our pockets with handfuls of gems.


    ¡°Yuji that¡¯s enough¡­ I said the gems were ok because they won¡¯t weight us down like the equipment would, but if you stuff that much in your pockets it will become a problem.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I wanted to take enough back for Chika, Hotaru, Rin, Yuzuki, and Kaori as well.¡±


    Akane: ¡°You¡¯re not going to impress them with gems of that quality¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°At least I am trying to be nice!¡±


    Akane: ¡°Nice would have been mentioning Akihiro as well, but you only mentioned the women. That means all you are trying to do is get in their pants!¡±


    ¡°What is the deal with you two? I thought you two were a couple?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress that has been over for weeks¡­¡±


    ¡°Weeks¡­? Not even a few days before we left you were still going at it!¡±


    Akane: ¡°You expect us to give up sex completely until we find someone else? No thanks¡­ Our situation works our fine¡­ But I think I about got Akihiro just where I want him, so after that your own you own Yuji.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°That¡¯s why I was going to take the girls some jewels!¡±


    I let out a deep sigh¡­ ¡°Just don¡¯t overdo it¡­ But Satoshi, now that we are on the subject what about we work the kinks out till I can finally convince Takeshi to come off his high horse?¡±


    Saki jumps forward blushing with her arms raised and objects. ¡°Mistress Inari, you¡­. You can¡¯t have him!¡±


    Everyone: ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Can¡¯t is a strong word. All I have to do is simply command.¡±


    Saki: ¡°Please I am begging you Mistress no!¡±


    ¡°Damnit I knew I should of gave you the same command as Akane¡­ Fine, but you owe me big time!¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Saki-san¡­¡±


    Saki made the bold claim like it was natural, but I think only after Satoshi said her name that she realized what she just did. She quickly turns looking at him with a horrified expression and can¡¯t possibly blush any brighter as she quickly squats down covering her face with her hands.


    Satoshi: ¡°Saki-san¡­¡± ¨CHe says again placing on hand on her shoulder while taking one of her hands that she is using to cover her face.-


    After taking her hand he pulls her back to her feet. She lowers her other hand but is still blushing profusely, and she turns look away from him. He raises the hand that is on her shoulder up caressing her cheek.


    With how tall Satoshi is and how short Saki is he practically has to take a knee as he brings his lips to hers kissing her.


    I sigh¡­ ¡°Really¡­ You are going to do that here, and now?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°You¡¯re right Mistress¡­ I¡¯m sorry.¡± ¨CHe says standing back up straight. He then tries to take a step back but the hand that holds Saki¡¯s in it doesn¡¯t budge as she doesn¡¯t turn it loose.-


    Satoshi then smiles at her caressing her face again, she then just nods and after a tight squeeze of his hand she lets it go. Finally we are able to resume our trek though the mines, but as the time starts to approach that the horde of Oni attacked us yesterday draws near we begin to get nervous.


    Akane: ¡°The last area that made a good staging area is quite a ways back...¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s just keep pushing forward. We don¡¯t even know if it¡¯s a once a day thing or if it was something completely different. Even if it is once a day maybe we will get lucky and find another good spot before they arrive.¡±


    As we keep pushing forward though it seems the shaft is getting larger and larger. Even the narrowest point is still larger than the main shaft was by default now. After fighting a group of Oni with monstrous looking dogs, who turned out to be much tougher then the Oni themselves, we know that at if the horde of Oni goes through once a day it should happen at any moment now¡­


    Akane: ¡°This doesn¡¯t look good Mistress. If they attack us now there is no way to prevent them from getting behind us.¡±


    ¡°We will retreat before it comes to that, but I don¡¯t want to waste the last few hours of travel if we don¡¯t have to.¡±


    However before long we start to hear the low rumble through the mine.


    Akane: ¡°Let¡¯s go back now, we can get back to the last location and they will still be far enough back that we will have a chance to catch our breath before the fight.¡±


    ¡°Damnit¡­ I guess we have no choice.¡±


    We start the retreat¡­ At a much hurried pace we reach the last fortifiable location after thirty minutes. We then try to catch our breath while the rumbling continues to grow louder and louder. We don¡¯t have the advantage as we did the day before with the dagger room, so we just start to prepare for a tough fight.


    I quickly decide to empty my pockets scattering the oddly shaped gemstones across the ground.


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress! What are you doing!?¡±


    ¡°They truly aren¡¯t worth anything anyway, and the Oni have no protection on their feet, this should be at least enough to slow down the first dozen or so.¡±


    Saki and Satoshi nod and quickly empty their pockets as well scattering their gemstones as well. Akane follows suit but Yuji looks on rather disappointed. Pouting he starts to scatter gemstones covering twice the area that the rest of us did combine¡­ Just how many of them things did he pocket¡­


    As soon as the Oni come into view Saki and I begin casting spells. Once they start to trample the gemstones many stumble and fall. We don¡¯t even have to deal with them ones as the Oni following closely behind them just trample over the top of them.


    We end up having to fall back a few times, Saki is completely drained of magic, and I am not in too good of shape either, but the flow of Oni eventually stops even without us ever managing to completely block off the tunnel this time.


    After a short rest I find Yuji pouting as he picks through the bloodied gemstones.


    ¡°Just let them be Yuji, maybe we will find something more worthwhile further in.¡±


    Yuji¡¯s shoulders slack as he drops one of the stones back to the ground and sighs.


    After resting we slowly start to head back deeper into the mine, but trying to conserve stamina and letting our magic return it takes us almost two hours to return to where we started. We continue on for a few more hours but having to fight a few more of them beastly dogs we no longer have enough magic to risk pushing in too much deeper at the moment, and we still haven¡¯t found another location good for bottlenecking the Oni.


    ¡°We should be fine resting here for the night if the Oni only do press through once a day, but everyone sleep with one eye open, just in case... Satoshi you take the first watch with me, and the rest of you can get some sleep.¡±


    Saki looks a little worried as she looks between Satoshi and me.


    ¡°You really think so little of your Mistress that I would try to steal him away from you after being so adamantly refused?¡±


    Akane & Yuji: ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°For that comment Satoshi, Saki, and I will all go to bed, and you two can take the first two watches.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°That¡¯s no fair!¡±


    Akane: ¡°What about having a magic user available?¡±


    ¡°We didn¡¯t get attacked last night, and if something happens you just have to wake us up.¡±


    Akane: ¡°As you order Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°You two go ahead and lay down and I will catch up¡± ¨CI say to Saki and Satoshi.-


    I watch them go lay down 10 feet away from one another and shake my head.


    ¡°In a few hours wake me up and I will take care of the rest.¡±


    Akane: ¡°But you said¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you going to ignore one of my orders?¡±


    Akane: ¡°No Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°Good.¡±


    As I move over to Saki and Satoshi their distances couldn¡¯t be any further apart but they are staring straight into each other¡¯s eyes and blushing.


    ¡°Come on you two of we are too far apart something might sneak into camp and take us out one at a time without anyone being the wiser.¡±


    They start blushing even more, Saki curls up in a ball and Satoshi rolls over.


    ¡°Fine I will lay right here then!¡± ¨CI say laying just a few feet from Satoshi.-


    Saki quickly jumps up moving between Satoshi and me lying back down, and you can even see Satoshi jump as she lightly reaches forward grabbing the hem of his shirt.


    ¡°That¡¯s a bit better, but more like this.¡± ¨CI scoot over pushing Saki right against Satoshi¡¯s back so now she is sandwiched between us. I then stretch out..-


    Stretching out has giving me a bit of distance, but even from here I can practically feel the heat from Saki¡¯s blushing cheeks as she is curled into a ball at the small of Satoshi¡¯s back. After feeling quite pleased with myself I then try to get a bit of sleep.


    I have never worried too much about comfort, I just have a standard bed in the core room that I sleep in, but I am starting to reconsider after resting for a few hours on the rock floor of the mine. It is by far a restful sleep and I am still a bit tired when Akane moves over to wake me, but I have no problem getting up.


    ¡°Alright, you two get some rest now.¡±


    Akane and Yuji nod then go lie down¡­I don¡¯t understand it. They are no longer dating, but still sleeping together, and even now the embrace they are sharing in the floor of the mine is enough for me to feel jealous¡­ Are they really not still together¡­?


    After I am sure they are well asleep I move back over to Saki and Satoshi. Saki is still curled in a ball, but Satoshi has rolled over and is curled up around Saki. Without disturbing Saki I shake Satoshi awake. When he realizes the situation he is in he quickly jumps up while blushing.


    ¡°We need to talk.¡±


    Satoshi looks a little worried as he looks down at Saki¡¯s sleeping figure and then nods and we go sit a couple feet away.


    ¡°Saki¡­¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Mistress?¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t give her enough credit, I thought with her personality and body I would have nothing to worry about¡­ I can¡¯t get you to change your mind?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°I will do whatever Mistress commands, but as Saki-san said. I too ask you please¡­¡±


    I let out a deep sigh and my shoulders droop.


    ¡°Fine¡­ Then how do I get Takeshi?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Mistress?¡±


    ¡°Takeshi¡­ You both are a lot alike. I am asking what do I do to make him mine?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°That¡¯s not a fair question¡­ Mistress only needs to be herself.¡±


    ¡°No matter who it is Mommy and Daddy, Tatsuo, the villagers, I am always what they need me to be but for Takeshi I have tried all that and nothing works, so I am just myself, and that¡¯s the person he doesn¡¯t like the most¡­¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Mistress you don¡¯t give yourself enough credit. Takeshi will never look at another the way he looks at you.¡±


    ¡°I am not saying the way he looks at me! He looks at me like a finely crafted doll. He enjoys what he sees, takes good care of me, but always keeps me on a shelf at arm¡¯s length. I want to be like the one he plays with, the one he squeezes all the stuffing out of. The one if he is running through the mud he is dragging right along with him, the one that if he is asleep is there in his arms, and the one that if he cries is the one there to bring him comfort. I want to be that doll, how do I become that doll¡­?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Mistress¡­ I don¡¯t know¡­¡±


    I let out another deep sigh.


    Satoshi: ¡°But what about when we left the village?¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°He didn¡¯t squeeze out the stuffing, but you definitely made it off the shelf. What did you do different?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Maybe if you find the answer to that then maybe you will be taken off the shelf more.¡±


    ¡°Not as helpful as I would have liked. I wish you just said shove my tongue down his throat or something, but I guess it wouldn¡¯t be that easy¡­¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Please Mistress, don¡¯t try anything so reckless¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, to do that he would have to at least kiss me, and I can¡¯t even get that out of him¡­ Then again I think Aoi has a bit of binding magic. Maybe use it to pen him to the bed and then¡­¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Mistress please! Instead of being on the shelf I would think that would get you locked in the cupboard for trying something so reckless!¡±


    ¡°Ugh¡­ It¡¯s so frustrating!¡±


    I accidently said that so loud that it woke up Saki. She quickly looks around noticing Satoshi and my absence. After finding us she quickly approaches.


    Saki: ¡°Is everything alright¡­?¡±


    Satoshi nods and we then finish the next few hours of the early morning watch till it¡¯s time to wake Akane and Yuji. Still a bit frustrated from the conversation with Satoshi when it¡¯s time to wake them I kick Akane in the backside.


    The gasp that escapes her mouth as she digs her hands deeper into Yuji¡¯s kimono only serve to frustrate me more however.


    ¡°Get up you two!¡±


    That is enough to cause Yuji to jolt awake, but it still takes a few more tries before Akane gets up as well.


    ¡°We need to put as much distance as we can in before the next horde of Oni attack, that way we have a better chance of finding another narrow spot.¡±


    All: ¡°Yes Mistress¡­¡±


    After that we set out¡­

 Battle on Two Fronts (Inari Arc)

    As we continue through the Mine the shaft only seems to get larger, I send a message back to Chika letting them know we made it through another night, and we continue on even deeper. The Oni, bats, another creatures like that have all disappeared now and instead we are dealing with the large beastly dogs some of which even have horns, wings, or both.


    It isn¡¯t until we encounter a huge snake that has a head of an Oni however that we really begin to struggle. The fight proves very taxing on Saki and my own magic. Luckily it was only one of them or we could have been in big trouble.


    A few more of the item rooms turn up and the quality of the gear within them has started to rise to that of steel. Most of the equipment we have is only slightly better than it and Yuji takes quite a few of the steel daggers as he always seems to misplace his own.


    By the time noon approaches though we start to see something that is both a relief and also a concern. The main shaft has grown large enough that we can all 5 walk elbow to elbow beside each other, and still never touch the wall, but now the tunnel quickly shrinks so much that we we can only pass single file. The walls of the shaft however are no longer stone but cuirass after cuirass of heavy steel-plated armor.


    Going forward we quickly find that it becomes a maze of tunnels through the armor and just trying to walk has proved to be difficult. Even after two hours there is no sign of a door or an end to the cuirasses.


    ¡°Well the good news is when the Oni attack we could just block them off with the armor, but I am pretty sure these tunnels where made by the Oni pushing through and if they went through all this there is not a way to hold them back¡­¡±


    Akane: ¡°There is also the risk of not being able to get out again ourselves.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°We wanted a smaller tunnel, I guess be careful what you wish for¡­¡±


    Saki: ¡°I just hope we don¡¯t run into another one of those snakes¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t say that now¡­¡±


    After a little while longer we finally start to see a break in the armor. As the tunnel starts widening back up however the walls and floor no longer look to be that of the mine. The tunnel is quite a bit smaller, but also it looks far more natural. Either the mine dug into a natural cavern or the dungeon theory is looking even closer to truth.


    ¡°How long is it now till we should expect the Oni horde?¡±


    Akane: ¡°It shouldn¡¯t be more than 2 hours now.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know what¡¯s up ahead but I think we should hold our ground here for this attack. It looks like there are several branching tunnels ahead and finding which one or how many of them the Oni come from might tell us which one to take. Not only that if things get bad we can retreat back into the suits of armor, and bring it down behind us and hopefully buy us time.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°That is if the whole mess of them doesn¡¯t come down on top of us¡­¡±


    ¡°You know I am looking to Inari to grant us a little luck here you know¡­?¡±


    Saki: ¡°Mistress you know it doesn¡¯t work that way¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s a joke¡­ Kind of¡­¡±


    With quite a while to wait there isn¡¯t much to do¡­ I look at the armor for a bit¡­ If there was a way to get that entire mess back to the dungeon even at the reduced cost of breaking it down I am sure there is millions of xp worth of armor there¡­


    Saki and Satoshi seem to be enjoying themselves as they are chatting while speaking quietly¡­ Even Akane is sitting with Yuji in front of her, her head is on his shoulder and she has her arms wrapped around him her hands disappearing into chest area of his kimono.


    Yuji is just sitting there silently with his head leaning back on Akane¡¯s shoulder, and you can see the movement of Akane¡¯s hands as they caresses Yuji¡¯s chest¡­ Are they really not still together¡­? I let out a deep sigh and drop down sitting against one of the walls.


    If Takeshi was part of the dungeon I could at least message him and see what he was doing¡­I guess I can ask Chika how it is going, but I guess the condition of the village and dungeon isn¡¯t actually what I really wanted to know about anyway¡­


    (How are things going there¡­?)


    Chika: (Everything is going fine Mistress, I have gained another level today it won¡¯t be long now and I will be caught up with the rest.)


    (How is the dungeon doing on xp.)


    Chika: (Your xp consumption is staggering¡­ But we have managed to at least acquire the amount for the consumption. Most days though we are able to acquire a bit extra.)


    (How is Takeshi doing?)


    Chika: (He¡¯s uh¡­ He¡¯s been busy¡­)


    (¡­Busy? Busy how?)


    Chika: (I shouldn¡¯t have said anything¡­ He asked me not to say¡­)


    (Chika! What is Takeshi doing!?)


    Chika: (You gave me the command to obey Takeshi, so I can¡¯t say anything more¡­.)


    (Chika!)


    (Chika!)


    (¡­)


    ¡°Everyone pack up we are going back!¡±


    Everyone is startled by my quick and loud proclamation.


    Yuji: ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡±


    Saki: ¡°Did something happen to the temple!?¡±


    ¡°Chika was being dodgy, Takeshi is up to something but she won¡¯t tell me what. He even used my own command against me to forbid Chika to tell me!¡±


    Everyone quickly sighs and begins to relax again.


    Akane: ¡°Mistress I am sure you are just looking too much into it¡­¡±


    ¡°He could be messing around on me behind my back!¡±


    Yuji: ¡°To be messing around on you there has to be something there first. Besides I have never seen Takeshi ever even look at a woman with desire other then you.¡±


    ¡°The new monsters haven¡¯t been there long. It could be one of them! I bet its Kaori, I knew she was going to be trouble¡­Wait did you say he looks at me with desire?¡±


    Akane: ¡°Of course he does Mistress! Just look at you.¡±


    ¡°I have never seen him even show the slightest signs¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°You don¡¯t think he would do it when you are watching do you¡­ You said it yourself back at the bonfire when the residential area was added a while back. All those men that secretly desire you, do you honestly think anyone of them would have the gall to say something like that to your face.¡±


    ¡°But even when he is alone he never¡­¡±


    Akane: ¡°He knows you can be watching at any time¡­ He isn¡¯t going to do something so obvious even if he is alone¡­¡±


    ¡°Satoshi?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Don¡¯t bring me into this Mistress. I already gave you my advice¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°But none of that changes the facts that he is up to something!¡±


    Akane: ¡°Would it make you feel better if I ask Chika what is going on? Even if he prevented her from telling you maybe she can still tell me.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s a good idea!¡±


    I wait while Akane sends the message¡­ She seems to be sending quite a few, but she isn¡¯t saying anything¡­ Now she is laughing to herself¡­ Now she is sending messages again¡­


    ¡°What¡¯s going on!?¡±


    Akane starts laughing then says. ¡°She wouldn¡¯t tell me either, but don¡¯t worry Mistress I told her what you were thinking and she promised me it was nothing like that.¡±


    ¡°Then what is so funny?!¡±


    Akane: ¡°It¡¯s nothing¡­ Chika also said to remind you that you used a command for all the new girls to leave Takeshi alone remember¡­¡±


    ¡°Then what else could it be¡­?¡±


    I however have no time to worry about it as we begin to hear the low rumble of the Oni charging through the tunnels.


    Yuji: ¡°Alright everyone, time to get ready!¡±


    ¡°Which tunnel are they coming from?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°It¡¯s still too soon to tell¡­¡±


    We prepare for the attack, as the rumbling begins to grow louder and closer. Eventually from one of the tunnels Oni begin to pour out, unfortunately a few short seconds later, they begin to pour from another, then a third¡­ One tunnel doesn¡¯t appear to have any Oni coming from it, but they haven¡¯t quit flowing yet either.


    Saki and I quickly begin launching spells into the horde. We keep dropping them left and right but they just keep coming¡­ The tunnel narrows as they start getting closer so they start getting congested as the pour through.


    The first bit comes within range of the others and they quickly begin their assault as well. We can¡¯t really retreat any without entering through the armor tunnel, so the group starts to actually suffer some damage as we have to put a bit more into offence then the last two encounters.


    Saki and I both have the combat medic skill so at least we can continue casting offensive spells with one hand and healing spells with another, but it is quite taxing on our magic. The front line group is starting to lose ground, meaning Saki and I are about to be in the fray right along with them.


    Saki is already showing signs of running critically low on magic, but I still have a little left. I decide to save the rest strictly for healing and dive forward with the rest of the group brandishing my staff. The amount of Oni has quit flowing, but there are still dozens remaining.


    ¡°Saki, start to fall back through the armor, that way you set the pace to make sure nobody gets left behind.¡±


    Saki: ¡°But we almost got them.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re about out of magic. There is nothing else you can do!¡±


    Satoshi takes a leap back placing his hand on her shoulder using his skill to pass along magic to her. However his removal from the front line created a gap and now the Oni are starting to push. If it keeps up they are going to put us in a tight spot¡­


    Just when things start to look pretty bad Satoshi jumps forward again. His return to the front line along with Saki¡¯s return to casting spells is helpful, but our formation is quite broken now, and the battle is still looking pretty bad.


    The Oni are still after me so I decide to use my [Stone Pillar] tactic again, but this time I am not going to be able to jump from one to the next because my close proximity to the ceiling of the tunnel. All I can do now is crawl casting the [Stone Pillar]s side by side.


    We are starting to make headway now, but I am just not quick enough and one of the pillars crumbles before I make it more than halfway across. My legs are now dangling down and it¡¯s enough for one of the Oni to grab ahold of it.


    I manage to kick free, but now there isn¡¯t enough time and the [Stone Pillar] collapses and I fall right into the swarm. I am quickly bombarded by clubs, feet, and claws as the Oni tear into me. The chainmail the village made me is quite the saving grace but my hp is still dropping quickly and it won¡¯t hold out much longer.Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    I can hear the others screaming, but from the tearing of my kimono, and thuds against my body I can¡¯t make out the words¡­ I really didn¡¯t want to do this¡­ The suspicion is going to rise considerably in the village now, but if I don¡¯t, I am going to die¡­


    I quickly summon Aoi and Midori. A spell from Aoi is enough to quickly push the Oni back a few feet toppling any that were right on top of me, and Midori quickly begins leaping onto Oni rending and shredding with claw and teeth.


    Something grabs my ankle and begins to drag me. I start to kick at it, but realize I can feel my strength returning to me from the touch. Aoi does all it can but a caster in the middle of a mob of melee attackers means it doesn¡¯t last long before it is beaten down.


    Midori is faring a bit better jumping from one Oni to the next, but even it falls before I am out from under the feet of the Oni. Satoshi and I are both being trampled while the others attack for all they are worth, but I know my hp can¡¯t be draining near as fast as his because not only is he taking damage from the Oni but he is still passing his hp to me.


    If I don¡¯t do anything else I am dead anyway so if I pass out I pass out. I begin using my skill firing my orbs at the Oni no longer worrying about if all elements but light are not near as effective. I just keep casting. I don¡¯t know if everything is getting hazy because of my magic or my hp but eventually everything goes dark.


    Takeshi¡¯s PoV


    As soon as Miss Inari was down the stairs and out of sight Tatsuo approaches me.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Takeshi, you are always there next to Inari-sama, but I feel I have barely ever got to talk to you.¡±


    ¡°Miss Inari likes to have her opinion known. I have found it easier to remain silent.¡±


    Tatsuo laughs. ¡°You are quite right about that. Now that she is out of the way, at least for a little bit, do you mind having a bit of a chat with me?¡±


    ¡°Miss Inari instructed me to handle her affairs in her absence, so if it¡¯s regarding that I believe I can spare the time.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I am sure your answer is going to be no different than hers, but I just have to ask. Is Inari-sama truly not the Inari?¡±


    ¡°Miss Inari is very strong indeed, but I think we should both consider ourselves thankful that, no, Miss Inari is no god.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°When you put it like that I actually believe you¡­ That might actually make this next part a bit easier then. You see the village and I would really like to do something special for Inari-sama, but it will require Inari¡¯s help.¡±


    ¡°How so¡­?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°You know that area beyond the residential area Inari made for us?¡±


    ¡°Of course¡­¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°The villagers and I have begun praying that in Inari-sama¡¯s absence that Inari would open that area up, but we just didn¡¯t know if with Inari-sama gone that Inari would hear our prayers.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t understand you said you wished to do something for Miss Inari, but you said you have been praying for Inari to produce more houses?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Not houses¡­ Just a house. Inari-sama has done so much for us yet all we have done is take from her. You all started with free rein of the grounds and had to buildings set up as lodgings and the first thing we did was take that from you all.¡±


    ¡°You didn¡¯t take anything, Miss Inari offered.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I know but that doesn¡¯t change the fact for almost a year now all of you have had to take turns sleeping, because there just isn¡¯t any room. Not to mention now that the fact more of her servants have arrived that is bound to get even worse.¡±


    ¡°So you are saying you are all praying that Inari answers your prayers, and provides Miss Inari with a house?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°You all need better accommodations, and as nice as the houses are that Inari provided for the village I just feel Inari-sama deserves more¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t even know what to say¡­ I am sure Miss Inari would appreciate your concern, but to ask Inari for something like this I can¡¯t say Miss Inari would approve.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°That is why we want to do it. Inari-sama wouldn¡¯t ask for anything¡­¡±


    ¡°Why is it you are telling me all this?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Well as I said I wanted to know if Inari-sama was really Inari or not. We didn¡¯t want to look foolish asking Inari to provide itself with a house for it and its servants¡­ But if she is not Inari then we can ask without restraint because for once instead of asking Inari to save our miserable selves we want Inari to help someone who truly deserves it¡­¡±


    ¡°Well if you are already praying to Inari about it, I don¡¯t see what else can be done. If Inari believes Miss Inari deserves it then Inari will provide.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°You think our prayers will really reach with Inari-sama gone? What about those two foxes, you think they could relay the message directly to their master?¡±


    ¡°I am really not sure I am the one you should be asking these kinds of questions too, I am just Miss Inari¡¯s shield, Miss Yuzuki in the shrine I am sure could help you far more then I could concerning matters of Inari.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I guess we have done all we can then¡­ I just hope Inari hears our prayers¡­ I know the conversation was a bit strange, but it was really nice talking with you. Maybe once we get some more alcohol you and I could sit down for a drink.¡±


    ¡°I am sorry, after an incident with a few of Miss Inari¡¯s aunts¡­ I do not drink¡­¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°See that¡¯s a story I would like to hear! Even if you don¡¯t drink I would like to hear more about Inari-sama¡¯s youth and what made her the way she is now¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I really can¡¯t say anymore without Miss Inari¡¯s permission, I don¡¯t know if I am permitted to speak of it.¡±


    Tatsuo sighs. ¡°Well it was worth a shot¡­ I am going to the temple to ask Inari one more time, and then I am going to see if I can find those foxes. You take care now.¡±


    ¡°Have a good day¡­¡±


    He seems like a good man, I really wish Inari would hear a prayer like that¡­ Miss Inari really does deserve something like that. Unfortunately she would never allow us to spend xp in such a way. I have a lot to do in Miss Inari¡¯s absence I best get started¡­


    Later that evening as things are starting to wind down I am checking with the others to see to it they know what tomorrows plan of action is, but after that is taken care of Yuzuki mentions what Tatsuo was talking about.


    Yuzuki: ¡°Did you hear about the villagers begging Inari to build the Mistress a house¡­?¡±


    Hotaru: ¡°It wasn¡¯t just a few of them either. It was like the entire village was in on it.¡±


    Rin: ¡°Chika don¡¯t you have permissions for the dungeon, couldn¡¯t you do something like that?¡±


    Chika: ¡°I would have to have Takeshi-sama¡¯s permission.¡±


    Kaori: ¡°Takeshi-sama could we please¡­?¡±


    ¡°Miss Inari wouldn¡¯t forgive us for throwing xp away like that. Besides those small houses she built in Inari¡¯s name raised her xp consumption considerably, something for like what the villagers are praying for¡­ I couldn¡¯t even imagine the cost.¡±


    Chika: ¡°What if it doesn¡¯t cost us anything¡­?¡±


    ¡°How so?¡±


    Chika: ¡°The floor is already there¡­ If we were to just remove the wall, then maybe the villagers would take that as a sign, and it wouldn¡¯t cost the dungeon anything.¡±


    Rin: ¡°That¡¯s right the buildings that the villagers build don¡¯t raise the Mistress¡¯s xp consumption.¡±


    ¡°The amount of time it would take to build such a building¡­ Miss Inari would be back long before they even completed the foundations.¡±


    Chika: ¡°Mistress allows each of us a negligible amount of xp to spend on personal items from the dungeon right¡­? If we pooled that all together don¡¯t you think that would be enough for at least the foundation?¡±


    Kaori: ¡°That¡¯s right! And we could leave instructions behind on the way we want it constructed.¡±


    Yuzuki: ¡°We would have to take Inari into consideration as well. Mistress wouldn¡¯t want us to do something that might anger Inari or we might lose the protection.¡±


    ¡°How can you all even be considering this without Miss Inari¡¯s permission?¡±


    Akihiro: ¡°Come on Takeshi¡­ The Mistress gave us life. Of course we would like to pay her back somehow.¡±


    Chika: ¡°That¡¯s right! And the only thing we would need your permission on is to remove the wall on the bottom floor. Please Takeshi-sama let us do at least that much for our Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°I am telling you it won¡¯t be complete by the time Miss Inari returns.¡±


    Rin: ¡°It will be far enough along though that she couldn¡¯t turn it down without it looking like she was opposing Inari¡¯s wishes though.¡±


    ¡°She will be mad at all of us for this¡­¡±


    Hotaru: ¡°I bet she would quickly forgive us if we combined her room with Takeshi-sama¡¯s.¡± ¨CShe says and giggles.-


    ¡°You mustn¡¯t!¡±


    Chika: ¡°Then you¡¯re considering it?¡±


    Rin: ¡°If he won¡¯t let us combine their rooms what if we make them conjoined? It might be enough to make the Mistress happy and if any danger were to befall her, Takeshi-sama would be right there to protect her.¡±


    Hotaru: ¡°That¡¯s a great idea! You would have the privacy of your own rooms but if the need arises you could be by her side in an instant!¡±


    I am a little worried as Chika, Rin, and Hotaru seem to be giving each other looks that are reminiscent of Miss Inari¡¯s aunt Zoey, but I have to admit it would make it easier to protect her. Wait¡­ That means I have already decided to allow them to do this. Oh Miss Inari please forgive me¡­


    ¡°Alright fine, but the villagers have to build it or the xp consumption would be far too much.¡±


    Chika: ¡°If we are going to pool our xp allotment for the foundation¡­Can we make a few alterations to the room for things that we might need.¡±


    Hotaru: ¡°That¡¯s right it would only make sense for the Mistress¡¯s house to have its own bath, and the floor would need water to do that.¡±


    I sigh¡­ ¡°Nothing¡­ I repeat nothing over 500xp.¡±


    Chika: ¡°I can work with that¡­ We can work with that, right girls?!¡±


    Group: ¡°Yay!~¡±


    The girls then quickly form a huddle and quickly start making plans¡­


    Akihiro: ¡°Takishi¡­ They just played you good¡­¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    Akihiro: ¡°The Mistress allows us an allotment of 1000xp, between the 5 girls that is 5000xp. The small houses on the residential area were cheap they just had a high consumption rate. You can resize a room for 500xp, so setting them a limit of 500xp they could probably supply the entire house in resources. The villagers will still have to build it but they would only have to put it together. The hardest thing would be the foundation, but you gave them permission to use [Menu] for that.¡±


    ¡°You think I messed up¡­?¡±


    Akihiro: ¡°I don¡¯t know, but I will say this I am going to add my allotment to the mix as well if they let me make a few suggestions¡­ Besides that conjoined room¡­ After the Mistress sees that I am sure all will be forgiven.¡±


    ¡­What did I just agree to¡­? I am a man of my word though so I will just have to face the consequences of my actions.


    ¡°And everyone, you cannot say a word of this to Miss Inari while she is gone do you understand?¡±


    Girls: ¡°Promise!~¡±


    The damage is done now I am going to bed while they work out the details¡­ The next morning I want to check to see what they have accomplished. I can¡¯t transfer about because I am not part of the dungeon but Aoi can so I grab the little fox and have it take me to find the others. I find the girls still talking away on the bottom floor of the village.


    There are building materials everywhere and a very large foundation covering almost the entire floor¡­ there are several water sources worked into the foundation including a large area covering almost the entire back side of the foundation with water, but that water is literally steaming¡­


    ¡°What are you girls up to¡­?¡±


    Chika: ¡°Oh¡­ Takeshi-sama¡­ Don¡¯t worry we are almost done and then we will go to bed.¡±


    ¡°Bed? It¡¯s morning, and the villagers will soon be out and about. With their prayers to Inari I am sure one of the first things they are going to do is check this floor in hopes that their prayers were answered.¡±


    Rin: ¡°Morning?! That can¡¯t be¡­¡±


    ¡°Well whatever else you have planned you better get it done, and get it done fast.¡±


    Kaori: ¡°Right¡­ You brought Aoi that should save us a step.¡±


    ¡°Aoi¡­? What are you planning on doing?¡±


    Chika: ¡°Well Mistress uses Aoi and Midori to act as messengers for Inari, so we thought we would send Aoi with the instructions tucked into her collar to Tatsuo.¡±


    ¡°Miss Inari has never made verbal communication claiming it to be Inari, so I don¡¯t know if this is a good idea.¡±


    Yuzuki: ¡°Don¡¯t worry Takeshi-sama I vetted the letter myself, there should be no problems with what is written considering Inari.¡±


    Kaori takes Aoi, and they fold a piece of parchment up stuffing it under Aoi¡¯s collar and then tell it what to do.


    Chika: ¡°Alright the only thing left to do is clear out and scrap the wall.¡±


    ¡°Alright, if you are going to use Aoi, do you mind transferring me back?¡±


    Hotaru: ¡°Right¡­ I will wake Akihiro and have him transfer you.¡±


    Miss Inari really does unnecessary things¡­ I didn¡¯t realize it before but Miss Inari¡¯s command to the girls to keep away from me means they are not capable of even transferring me because that would require them to touch me¡­


    Akihiro appears to be sleeping on a pile of mats the girls summoned in so he would have had to be woken up anyway, so after they wake him he transfers me back to the barracks.


    ¡°I want you honest opinion Akihiro, do you think that Miss Inari will really approve of what the girls have planned?¡±


    Akihiro adverts his gaze¡­ I sigh and then head out of the barracks onto the temple grounds just in time to see Aoi prancing up to Tatsuo who seems to be in a hurry as he exits his house.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Does that mean?!¡± ¨CI can hear him call out as he then quickly starts making his way for the stairs heading underground. Aoi quickly chases after him.-


    Too late now I guess¡­ I am a bit behind but I follow after them. When I finally reach the bottom floor Tatsuo is looking around with a confused look on his face.


    Tatsuo: ¡°Takeshi-sama¡­ It looks like Inari heard us, but I am not sure I understand¡­¡± ¨CHe says when he notices me come down the stairs. Aoi is circling his legs with the note still tucked inside her collar.-


    He then starts looking through everything while Aoi keeps trying to get his attention, but he seems to be growing more and more confused.


    Tatsuo: ¡°I don¡¯t understand why would Inari grant our prayer like this, only to leave it uncomplete.¡±


    I move over and pick up Aoi stretching it behind the ears. I then pull out the folded parchment, and say. ¡°What¡¯s this¡­?¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°What is it?¡±


    I unfold the parchment and hand it to Tatsuo. ¡°I don¡¯t know it was tucked into Aoi¡¯s collar.¡±


    The girls thought they planned everything through, but they didn¡¯t think Tatsuo would have been too excited to notice the note¡­ I watch the confusion only grow on Tatsuo¡¯s face as he reads the note, but by the time he finishes it something seems to click.


    He then quickly takes Aoi¡¯s head in his hands looking it in the eyes as he says. ¡°I understand¡­ I will gather everyone at once!¡±


    Tatsuo then runs off back upstairs with the note still in hand¡­ I don¡¯t even know what it said¡­ The next few hours are pretty hectic. Tatsuo has seemed to gather every single villager minus the ones that are required to be elsewhere.


    After everyone has finally gathered Tatsuo addresses everyone.


    Tatsuo: ¡°As you can all see it appears Inari has answered our prayers! This time Inari even left a message for all of us.¡±


    Tatsuo then takes out the parchment reading from a section of it.


    Tatsuo: ¡°I have heard your request and take pride in the acknowledgement that you wish to thank my disciple for her service to me. The houses I provided for my followers met an immediate need, but for my disciple I feel more is required. I have provided the foundations in which you must prove not only to my disciple, but to me. That not only are you willing to ask, but also work towards the goals of your prayers. May the building you build not only stand as a home, but a testament to your dedication to me and a thanks you want to offer to my disciple for which brought you all back into my grace.¡±


    Miss Inari has told me of the skill she received saying she is an acolyte in the name of Inari, but a disciple¡­? I can¡¯t say she will be pleased to hear that the villagers received a letter from Inari that makes her Inari¡¯s disciple¡­


    Tatsuo: ¡°I gather that means that Inari wants us to build Inari-sama¡¯s home to the best of our ability not only for her, but to also prove we will not sit idly by only begging Inari for help, but willing to put forth the effort ourselves to prove we are worthy of Inari. So I ask you all now, that until Inari-sama¡¯s home is complete we dedicate every moment to furthering its completion.¡±


    The girls are all at the back of the group with tired, but content looks on their faces. After a few cheers from the villagers Tatsuo quickly makes his way around assigning tasks to the villagers as they begin work.


    Tatsuo: ¡°What of you Takeshi-sama? You will help as well right?¡±


    ¡°I have Miss Inari¡¯s affairs to attend too, but when not handling that. Yes I will be willing to assist.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°And the others?¡±


    ¡°They have strict orders to maintain the protection of the village and to continue to bring down the Oni population in the forest, so much like the villagers that have tasks like farming they have a task that simply cannot put on hold.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I understand¡­¡±


    Chika: ¡°But we too must prove not only to our Mistress but to Inari too that we are willing to put forth the effort, so once our tasks for the day are complete I promise we will do what we can to help as well!¡±


    After that we spend every waking moment not taking care of the dungeon to working on the house along with the villagers.

 Cavernous Depths (Inari Arc)

    When I open my eyes I hurt all over. The others are gathered around me with worried expressions and I notice not only me but my kimono is in a sorry state as well.


    ¡°That was my favorite kimono that mommy sent me¡­¡±


    Akane: ¡°We were so worried Mistress we thought we lost you for a moment there.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I told you, since you were all still alive you had nothing to worry about.


    Akane: ¡°Don¡¯t give me that! You were just as worried as well!¡±


    ¡°Wait¡­ Where is Satoshi?¡±


    Saki hangs her head with tears in her eyes¡­ Akane pats her on the back.


    Akane: ¡°He is still alive¡­But I don¡¯t know. He used so much of his hp to keep you alive, and blacked out shortly after you. Even after casting healing spells on you both, you at least seemed to improve, but he however did not.¡±


    As I sit up I realize just how sorry of a state my kimono really is in when Yuji quickly adverts his gaze and Akane pulls on it covering me back up. Holding the front of it closed with my hands I move over to Satoshi who is lying on the ground a few feet away.


    He usually has nice tanned skin, but his complexion now is very pale¡­ I agree with the others that he is still alive, but you can¡¯t even tell if he is breathing or not¡­ Placing my hand on his bare chest I can barely even tell his heart is beating.


    ¡°Damnit Satoshi¡­ I can¡¯t yell at you for screwing up if you are in this sorry of a state¡­¡±


    Saki: ¡°Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°I know¡­ We can only hope he can hold on long enough for some of our magic to return.¡±


    We spend the next while casting healing spells on him as our magic recovers but there doesn¡¯t appear to be any change. I decide to hold my spells to build up a stronger healing spell, but have Saki keep casting the lesser ones on him.


    Akane: ¡°It has been quite a while since the attack, should we start preparing to rest here for the night?¡±


    ¡°Well I am afraid to move Satoshi in his state, and I hate to not make any more progress, but at the moment I don¡¯t think we have a choice. We won¡¯t even be able to hold this point without him¡­ Maybe we should start thinking about retreating once we can get Satoshi stabilized.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Actually¡­About that¡­¡±


    When I look over to the tunnel I instead just find a solid wall of armor.


    Yuji: ¡°After you collapsed one of the Oni crashed into the heap, and everything started tumbling down. We tried to dig it back out, but at the moment we were more worried about Satoshi and you.¡±


    ¡°Can¡¯t move forward, can¡¯t move back¡­ I guess we can only hope a more powerful healing spell will work and we can get Satoshi back on his feet.¡±


    Saki stays up with Satoshi, but they tell me to get a few more hours of sleep. I try to argue saying I have slept enough but Saki with tears in her eyes says.


    Saki: ¡°If we are going to have any hope of bring Satoshi back, you have to build of you magic, so Mistress, please, I am begging you rest and recover your magic¡­¡±


    After that I decide to comply¡­ I thought it would be hard to go back to sleep after just waking up, but I am so drained still, that sleep finds me almost immediately.


    When I wake back up I find we are very lucky, because Satoshi is still out, Saki is asleep with her head on his chest, and Akane and Yuji are both asleep in each other¡¯s arms as well¡­ If something would have attacked we would have been wiped out¡­


    [Menu] is almost worthless this far from the dungeon, but it is enough to at least tell the time. I have slept almost the entire night. I don¡¯t know when the others fell asleep so I am afraid to wake them. I should be able to watch things for a while so they can at least get a little sleep.


    I move back over to Satoshi, and not only is he pale but also he is rather cool to the touch as well. If Saki¡¯s spells were just enough to keep him alive, then when she fell asleep his situation deteriorated. I quickly cast the strongest healing spell I know.


    After sleep my magic should recover quite quickly, but I still feel a bit uneasy holding the spell so long that I drop my magic into such a sorry state even after just waking up. It seemed to be enough though because color returns to Satoshi and he even opens his eyes.


    He quickly starts to move but I hold him still holding my finger up to my lips. He notices Saki and begins to blush, but lays back down.


    Satoshi: ¡°How long was I out¡­?¡±


    ¡°All night.¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°And the others?¡±


    ¡°They will all be ok. At least for now, time till the next horde of Oni is only 8 to 10 hours away, and retreating is no longer an option.¡±


    Satoshi glances over at the wall of armor.


    Satoshi: ¡°So what do we do?¡±


    ¡°Just rest¡­¡±


    It¡¯s a new day so I summon in the foxes again and notice something is different about them. Both are still snow white but now they both have a red streak running through the fur on opposing sides of their brows.


    I look at the streak closely but it appears to be part of their fur. They have always maintained the same appearance when I summon them, but I guess yesterday was the first time they were ever killed. If they get more red fur every time they die, won¡¯t they eventually be red foxes instead of white ones?


    I guess that is a long way off though as the streak is barely more than a small line, so for now I guess it is just another unanswered question. Satoshi has appeared to have fallen back to sleep, but his complexion is back and you can see Saki rise and fall with each of his breaths, so I think he will be fine now.


    I decide to give the others a few more hours of sleep as well keeping an eye on things along with Aoi and Midori. Surprisingly the first to wake up is Satoshi again, but this time he sits up completely holding Saki¡¯s shoulders as he does.


    It¡¯s enough to wake her up causing her to burst out in tears wrapping her arms around him crying. That in turn is enough to wake Yuji who quickly jumps to his feet. That causes Akane to slide to the ground but even with the thud she never budges.


    ¡°That girl¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Satoshi! You¡¯re awake?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Yes our Mistress seen to it a few hours ago, but I was still quite exhausted, so I must have fell back asleep.¡±


    Saki: ¡°I am so sorry Satoshi! This is all my fault, if I did as I was told and retreated none of this would have happened.¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°You were just trying to be of help. I was the one that let the Oni through not only endangering you, but the Mistress as well¡­¡±


    ¡°I let you all act according to you own wishes, but if you want to continue your relationship with Saki, your duties must come first. If you were focused on the mission none of this would have happened.¡±


    Satoshi raises Saki out of his lap and then quickly moves over to me bowing down.


    Satoshi: ¡°You are right Mistress. I promise I won¡¯t make the same mistake again!¡±


    ¡°Fine, I will hold you to that promise. Now go apologize to Saki for nearly get yourself killed within the first 24 hours of your relationship. She hasn¡¯t even gotten to ride you yet, that would have truly been the worst kind of tragic ending¡­¡±


    Saki quickly covers her face with her hands blushing and Satoshi can¡¯t even look Saki in the face now, and he is blushing as well. He weakly apologizes however and Saki quickly shakes her head back and forth.


    ¡°Now somebody wake Akane up¡­ We can¡¯t stay here all day!¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress¡­ What about your kimono?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­Yes.¡± ¨CI say while covering myself back up again while Yuji adverts his gaze again.-


    If we were in the dungeon it wouldn¡¯t have completely repaired by now, but enough to at least be functional, but this far from the dungeon that won¡¯t work¡­ This is my favorite kimono that mommy gave me, the one with the cute little foxes on it, so I can¡¯t get rid of it. Even still I didn¡¯t bring any change of clothes as it is not something I typically have to worry about.


    Not only the kimono itself, but my chainmail is practically worthless now as well, and I am going to need it going forward. Retreating isn¡¯t an option so I decide to try something¡­ I mean in concept it¡¯s the same thing, but I don¡¯t know if anyone has ever tried an inanimate object before.


    It seems to work however as casting a heal spell while focusing on my equipment causes it to meld back together, and before long not only my kimono but armor as well is completely repaired. Not only that but I receive a notice.


    Dungeon Core #245 [Inari] has acquired the skill Elvish Crafting (Rank 1)


    Elvish crafting¡­ You mean to tell me all that elvish crafting amounts to, is casting heal on an item? But how can that be because they can start with zero material at all and make whatever they like, not only that, but rank 1 only covers wood and cloth, yet I repaired my chainmail as well. Now isn¡¯t the time, but once we are safe back home maybe I should investigate this further¡­


    ¡°There that should work¡­¡±


    Saki: ¡°Mistress, how did you do that?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m your Mistress aren¡¯t I? Surely I am capable of something as simple as that!¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I am inclined to agree, but you appeared to be surprised as well when it happened¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s neither here nor there. We are wasting time!¡±


    Once we are finally able to get Akane awake we move out. When the Oni attacked 3 of the 4 tunnels had Oni pouring out of them. That means all three of them should lead to our destination, but at the moment surviving is more important.


    If no Oni came through that one tunnel then maybe we can find a place to defend ourselves from the Oni during the next horde, and at least at nothing else they wouldn¡¯t be able to hit us from two different directions.


    After a while of traveling the path Yuji speaks up.


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress, are you sure this is the path we should be on? We have been going for two hours now and have seen no signs of anything. Maybe all the tunnels are connected only this one is so far out of the way that the Oni took shorter routes.¡±Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    ¡°That might be a possibility as well. If that is true then maybe even though it takes us a bit longer maybe we can skip the horde of Oni.¡±


    However after another couple hours travel we discover that is not the case. On the other hand though what we do find is rather encouraging.


    Saki: ¡°Daylight!¡±


    We climb out of the mouth of the cavern and have a look around¡­ It was kind of a nook carved out of a large boulder. You can¡¯t even really tell the opening is there unless you are right on top of it. We still seem to be in the plains, but other than north, south, east, and west we can¡¯t tell where exactly we are.


    Akane: ¡°The forest should be that way.¡± ¨CShe says while pointing. - ¡°So the question is what do we do now?¡±


    ¡°Well we at least we know we are no longer trapped, so all in all we should be able to return to the cavern with more confidence now. We still have a mission to accomplish after all.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Couldn¡¯t we return home for a few days and then try again¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yuji quit your whining¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Yes Mistress¡­¡±


    We return to the cavern making our way back to the intersection. If we continue on we should reach it just in time for the next wave of Oni. At least now though we can retreat back further instead of being pinned in.


    Our estimate proves to be about right we make it back to where we started with a short amount of time before the Oni will arrive. We decide to wait it out resting a little bit and then once we hear the rumble we prepare.


    ¡°Remember this time see if we can tell which tunnel has what percentage of Oni coming through it.¡±


    All: ¡°Yes Mistress!¡±


    This time the battle goes smoothly. We have to retreat back a few times, but we have all the room in the world. Not only that, but the assistance of the foxes from the get go make one hell of an advantage. Although I order Midori back as being on the front line causes it quite a bit of damage.


    When the wave is complete Saki and I are not even hurting on magic. Aoi does look to be a bit drained though. After making our way through the corpses we now have to decide which path to take.


    Yuji: ¡°That one seemed to have the most come from it, so either it¡¯s the closest or maybe it is just the biggest tunnel.¡±


    ¡°I think the distance will all be about the same, because all three groups hit at the same time. If one of the tunnels were longer it would take that group longer to reach us. So I would think that means the group size is based on the tunnel size.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°We should take the smallest then, and that would be that one.¡± ¨CHe says while pointing.-


    Akane: ¡°You¡¯re full of it¡­ That was the tunnel with the least amount.¡± ¨CShe says pointing at the other tunnel.-


    ¡°Honestly they looked about the same, so it shouldn¡¯t matter I just think we should avoid the third one. It looked like half of the Oni came though that tunnel alone.


    Yuji and Akane then start arguing which is actually smaller, and by the time it switching from a conversation about the tunnel to body parts Satoshi and Saki are both blushing, so I decide to leave it up to chance tossing a marked flat stone.


    Akane: ¡°Best two out of three?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Sore loser!¡±


    ¡°We have wasted enough time! Just go!¡±


    With that we then resume our trip through the cavern. The monsters in Shima are different in general I guess, because after a few more of them beastly dogs we encounter some giant spiders unlike anything I have heard of from normal dungeons, with body parts resembling several different types of creatures.


    They prove less difficult then that snake was, but we are running into them far more frequently. It also could be the assistance of the foxes, because when we finally do encounter another one of the snakes this one was seemed far easier, or maybe it is just the fact we knew more what to expect from it the second time around.


    These monsters don¡¯t seem to have any remains lying about, so if they are required to eat they aren¡¯t dragging the things back to their lairs. The spiders have a few Oni cocooned and hanging from the ceiling, but none appear to have been eaten on much.


    ¡°This is starting to look more and more like a dungeon, no matter how you look at it. I don¡¯t see how it is possible to keep it secret from the elders though.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Well if it is a dungeon that means we can stop it.¡±


    ¡°With my xp consumption so high an end to the Oni at this point would be an end to us.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°In all the waves of Oni we have encountered though, not a single one is an Oni General, if it is a dungeon maybe there is more than one working together?¡±


    ¡°One dungeon covering the entire island nation of Shima does sound like quite the stretch, but after I seen those rooms full of items or that tunnel of cuirasses, I just don¡¯t know anymore¡­¡±


    Akane: ¡°And that is to say one dungeon being able to hide from the elders should be impossible, but several?¡±


    ¡°Dungeon cores have only been around for about 1000 years, and with them, all types of new creatures and monsters came into being. Who is to say this isn¡¯t something new altogether?¡±


    Saki: ¡°Aren¡¯t questions just like these ones the reason we are here to begin with?¡±


    ¡°I guess you are right. Well maybe we will find out when we reach the bottom, for now lets get some rest. The foxes and I will take first watch and everyone else can get some sleep.¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°But you were the first up today, maybe we could take watch, and let you get some sleep?¡±


    ¡°Well I would rather stay up a few more hours than sleep the rest of the night then go to sleep and then be woke up for a later watch.¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Very well.¡±


    After everyone lies down I decide to send a message back to the village.


    (Everything still going alright?)


    Chika: (Very well Mistress! I was a bit worried I didn¡¯t hear from you last night, but I assumed since you sent the message earlier and we ended it on a bad note you just didn¡¯t want to talk.)


    (We actually did run in to quite the predicament, but it worked out in the end.)


    Chika: (Did that mean you were forced to summon Aoi and Midori? We looked for them several times today but couldn¡¯t find them anywhere.)


    (Yes they are here with me. I really didn¡¯t want to have to use them, but what¡¯s done is done. How is my Takeshi doing?)


    Chika: (He is still very busy, but I can¡¯t say anymore. I can assure you what he is doing is by request of the villagers, so it is nothing you should concern yourself over.)


    (So you and Akane keep saying¡­ Tell him if he does anything that I might disapprove of that I will find out about, and he will pay for.)


    Chika: (I will let him know¡­)


    I sigh then sit there scratching Aoi and Midori behind the ears¡­


    ¡°You two were there, what is he up to?¡±


    Aoi lets out a small chattering bark while Midori just rolls over so I can scratch its stomach¡­


    The next two weeks pass pretty quickly we continue pushing into the caverns, but the monsters are proving quite problematic. They have started to prove to be more of the problem then the daily horde of Oni as at least the Oni we know what to expect.


    We have found several more stashes of items, but with the cavern not having any side rooms they amount more to dead ends. Some of the items have been of good enough value, some of the others have replaced some of their gear.


    My monsters are gaining a large sum of xp every day, but as I am still bound by my consumption I have only gained a single level compared to their progression. Pretty soon the level difference might become great enough that they finally surpass me¡­


    When speaking with Chika she has started to ask when we think we will return and as we don¡¯t have a clue on how much larger this cavern is I just continue to tell her it looks like it will be a while. For some reason though she seems relieved. Takeshi better be behaving himself.


    As for Satoshi and Saki they have proved to be quite disappointing. Now that they are in a relationship together you would think things would change between them but they haven¡¯t seemed to change at all, but Akane and Yuji on the other hand.


    They argue and bicker as much as they did a year ago when I first summoned them, but as soon as their mouths are closed they are back in each other¡¯s arms. Much to my disappointment they have kept their bodily fluids to themselves. It isn¡¯t like I don¡¯t normally watch them anyway so why being away from the dungeon is so different I don¡¯t know. Maybe if they would just pound it out they would quit being at each other¡¯s throats so much.


    We have encountered quite a few more of those snake monsters, but with everyone¡¯s gain in levels and the assistance of the foxes they are not really even a threat. The beastly dogs also have also seemed to phase out with the addition of more of the spider monsters.


    Even the spiders have begun to give way to larger Oni. These Oni are about the size of an Oni General however they only have a single eye. Their choices in weapons and means of attack are quite different as well.


    When not running into dead ends of never ending spawning items, we have also encountered a few more exits to the cavern. You would think if this was indeed a dungeon then there wouldn¡¯t be so many openings.


    That also makes us wonder if we are even getting close to source of the Oni or not. The time in which the Oni horde appears seems to get a bit earlier with each passing day, but I don¡¯t see how progressing hours in would only result in a few minutes or so difference. Maybe we are missing something.


    On the day that marks 2 month since daddy¡¯s disappearance we obtain the first solid and encouraging bit of information.


    After fighting a difficult battle we check the time, and it appears to only be a few more hours till the Oni horde comes through. We found a tunnel that is covered in spider webs from one of the giant spiders. If it led to the source the Oni horde would have destroyed it so it must lead to a dead end.


    Most dead ends are due to a blockade of items, and they have been items that are replacing our current equipment so we decide not only can we possibly score some new gear, but also make sure the Oni only attack us from one direction, so we decide to take the tunnel.


    Not long after that we begin to hear the rumble of the Oni horde.


    Akane: ¡°Wait that isn¡¯t possible! It should still be at least a solid 2 more hours till they attack!¡±


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter, we don¡¯t know how much longer this tunnel goes back but at least down to that curve is plenty of room. We are still in good shape.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Wait¡­ the rumbling¡­ It is coming from down the tunnel!¡±


    ¡°It can¡¯t be, that web looked months old, if they could come down this tunnel surely it would have been long gone by now.¡±


    Akane: ¡°The sound¡­ It isn¡¯t quite the same.¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°You¡¯re right¡­ It¡¯s more like an echo¡­¡±


    ¡°If they come at us from down the tunnel we should have enough room as long as we don¡¯t get boxed in, so we should find out why it is echoing.¡±


    We hurry along the path and quickly find the answer. The tunnel just stops¡­ Not in a dead end but it opens up. There is a massive single cavern that looks like an entirely hollowed out mountain¡­ The tunnel we are standing in is hundreds of feet in the air, and in the cavern you can see hundreds if not thousands of similar tunnels dotted all around the cavern.


    There is something that is quite out of place however, down at the very bottom of the cavern surrounded in water is a castle¡­ It looks tiny from here, but the entire horde of Oni are passing the bridge over the water easily fits on the bridge.


    Yuji: ¡°That castle must be the source of the Oni!¡±


    Akane: ¡°But if it will take the Oni two hours to get from that bridge up here to us how many tunnels are left before we can reach it.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°If they can get to us in two hours then we should be able to get there in the same amount!¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think it works that way¡­ I don¡¯t know how the move so fast, but all these weeks we have been traveling 8 to 10 hours a day through these caverns, yet each day we get closer the Oni only arrive at best 15 minutes sooner each day. It is pretty close to noon now, so if that is their spawn time you keep cutting 10 to 15 minutes out we are still looking at 8 to 12 days.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°We could just climb down from here then!¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°You have to be kidding¡­Do you see that drop¡­?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I don¡¯t want to spend another 2 weeks in this hell hole.¡±


    Akane: ¡°You could jump. I would even give you a push if you like.¡±


    ¡°And who knows¡­ Maybe after a few days we will come across one of the tunnels closer to the bottom that would be easier distance to climb from.¡±


    We at least now have a destination so things are really starting to look up! Or at least I would like to say but after two more days of travel we start to encounter some giant birds that breathe fire¡­ We manage to kill one of the two we encountered, but I lost Aoi and Midori again, we started to run low on magic, and we had to retreat.


    Yuji: ¡°Damnit! We are so close now!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry Yuji, we just can¡¯t push it like that. We can take some of these other tunnels and gather more xp to hopefully gain you 4 a couple more levels, otherwise we aren¡¯t going to make it to that castle.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°What if we just find another one of those tunnels connecting to the castle and climb down?¡±


    Akane: ¡°If there are monsters in the cavern that are this strong, what do you think is going to be in that castle?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Just the Oni right¡­?¡±


    We all sigh.


    ¡°If only you were right.¡±


    After more time passes I start to wonder what we are even doing here¡­ Daddy has been missing for months now, and Mommy is no closer to finding him then she was when he disappeared¡­ I have told Madam Erin countless times we are doing as she asks so send more help to find Daddy, but even though she says she is putting resources into it Daddy is still missing and we are still stuck in this place.


    I think my monsters have surpassed my strength now. I think they have even passed Daddy¡¯s monsters strength now. Maybe that is the secret behind Madam Erin¡¯s plan. Maybe she knows exactly where Daddy is but she is just having us do this to gain enough strength to be able to save him.


    I guess that is just delusions of wishful thinking though. If strength really was the problem the elders could save him instantly. Unless¡­ What if it is another dungeon has him captive? If another dungeon has him the elders might be unable to act, but surely kidnapping a dungeon core has to violate some kind of rule or something.


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress?¡±


    ¡°What¡­? Oh sorry Yuji what were you saying? I was zoning out there.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I said can I load up on some of this equipment? It would be pretty good for some of the girls back home.¡±


    ¡°We can¡¯t afford to be weighted down like that.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°But I got that new spell after reaching level 30 yesterday remember?¡±


    ¡°Spell¡­ Since when have you been able to cast spells?!¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Since level 25, remember it opened up a few shadow spells? Yesterday when I hit level 30 I learned [Shadow Pocket]¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t have that spell¡­ I guess it¡¯s true. You are all leaving me behind. Maybe that¡¯s why Daddy never worried about training himself. He knew Mommy and the others would leave him in the dust¡­¡±


    Saki: ¡°Don¡¯t talk like that Mistress! You are plenty strong! Once we get out of here the Oni will no longer do anything for us so we will completely quit gaining levels, but you will slowly gain more xp everyday with you consumption. You just have to play the long game¡­¡±


    ¡°What if we get in trouble now though? I can¡¯t protect you all anymore what if one of you loses your lives to protect mine, because I am so weak?¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°That is our purpose Mistress.¡±


    ¡°Yuji was right all along¡­ I should of stayed behind and left it too you all.¡±


    Akane hits Yuji¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Now look what you did!¡±


    Yuji: ¡°All I did was ask if I could use my spell¡­¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Mistress¡­ What about your father?¡±


    ¡°What about him? I was stupid to think I could do anything to help him! If he was in danger of course I wouldn¡¯t be able to do anything.¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Is that what you are going to tell your mother? That you gave up because you were scared and weak.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Satoshi!¡±


    ¡°No¡­ He¡¯s right¡­ Isn¡¯t that what you always say Saki. Inari isn¡¯t going to help you unless you help yourself? Feeling sorry for myself isn¡¯t going to get us anywhere.¡±


    I stand up patting Satoshi on the shoulder.


    ¡°You might have to be careful Saki. Satoshi keeps acting all wise like that I might steal your boyfriend away.¡±


    I then steel myself with new determination. I may not be as strong as the others anymore, but if I have to move forward!¡±


    Yuji: ¡°¡­So¡­ About the gear?¡±

 The Castle (Inari Arc)

    Pointless¡­ All of this was completely pointless¡­ I am glad he made it home, but it wasn¡¯t the elders that got him home he did it all on his own¡­ I am worried about his memory, but if anyone can straighten Daddy out it is Mommy.


    We have come to far now though to turn back. After all this time underground¡­ All this time without getting to be near my Takeshi¡­ We have finally made it to this damn castle and if I have to tear it down stone by stone that is exactly what I am going to do.


    Not to help Madam Erin, not to put a stop to the Oni, but for the simple reason I am pissed off after all this time and after we have come so far it was all for nothing!


    Saki: ¡°I am glad about your father Mistress¡­¡±


    ¡°That sounds so much like Daddy though¡­ Gone for months then just pop up out of nowhere¡­ Although Mommy said he has lost all of his memories¡­¡±


    Akane: ¡°Did they find out what happened to him at least?¡±


    ¡°Something about another dungeon core going for a power grab or something, and I don¡¯t know how Daddy was involved but it seems he had to pay a hefty price. With all the messages about dungeon cores that have been dying every time one of those messages appeared I was afraid it was going to be Daddy¡¯s name.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°I told you from the beginning this was a waste¡­ But now that we are so close, you¡¯re not going to make us turn back now are you?¡±


    ¡°If we finish this task for Madam Erin when she wasn¡¯t even the one to help Daddy, then that means she will owe us big. I will be sure to see she pays up as well, and put a couple more of those swords in that [Shadow Pocket] of yours we might summon more monsters.


    We have spent two days into the castle when I received the message from Mommy about Daddy¡¯s return, and this castle is proving to be very beneficial, not only have the quality of the goods have increased exponentially the items here are all enchanted.


    Not only that, but the castle so full of items that there is barely any room for any monsters. We have spent more time the last few days decided on which items to take and which to leave behind then fighting monsters.


    Akane: ¡°Mistress, it is almost noon the Oni will be here soon.¡±


    ¡°Bring it on¡­ I want to test this sword out!¡±


    That leads us to another thing. Even before we started to acquire the enchanted gear the other monsters have gained enough levels the 100 to 200 Oni that spawn during the horde¡­ They are now only an inconvenience.


    The other monsters though¡­ That is another story entirely I have been forced to hide in the deep back of the group while even Saki stands in front of me to shield me. The foxes have had it rough too, they now have quite a few red lines through their fur. I thought it would eventually paint them red, but each line holds a design to it, and they are now rather intimidating in appearance.


    Their patterns have seemed to deviate as well. I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s because the way the die, or what it is, but they definitely can¡¯t be mistaken for normal foxes now¡­ I just hope the village doesn¡¯t get scared of them.


    Yuji: ¡°It is ok Mistress, you can stand back.¡±


    ¡°I can at least be of use against the Oni. You can¡¯t even use your skills because of using all your magic for [Shadow Pocket] and we need everyone well rested for the other monsters, so at least let me have this.¡±


    I draw the longer of the two blades now tied to my waist it was the most promising of the swords we found and the only one that has two enchantments on it. The first being [Blood Thief] which means for every cut I make my hp is recovered in turn, and the second enchantment is [Magic Touched] letting me no only treat it as magic channeling weapon like a staff, but also it increases the recovery rate of my magic when I wield the blade.


    The smaller of the blades has [Magic Sealing] which can block or stop a mage from casting spells. I can only take the word from my monsters that were born with more Shima knowledge then me, but they are made from a metal that is limited to only Shima and according to them is equal to mythril, but we will see about that.


    The small swords enchantment would be useless against the Oni, but the larger one helps a lot. I might have to take my monsters at their word, because this blade will slice an Oni clean in two. Even if they try to block the blade with them ugly clubs of theirs the blade slices cleanly through¡­


    I can feel the recovery effects of the blade as well, but even still the numbers of Oni are just too great. I have had my fun at least so I start to back up letting the others move in and assist me. The Oni are then quickly dealt with, and we can then start progressing further into the castle.


    After dealing with the Oni we then encounter a group of the castle monsters, for these I take no chances moving to the very back focusing on mainly healing. Yuji isn¡¯t doing much either, but most of his strength comes from his skills and using the [Shadow Pocket] like he is his magic stays at critically low levels so he can¡¯t really make use of his skills.


    These fights are never easy, but Akane, Yuji, Satoshi, and Saki are all powerhouses now¡­ Once the battle is over we begin moving deeper into the castle and find something that causes Yuji to cry¡­


    Another item room, this time it is something we haven¡¯t come across before¡­ A room full of various armors. We decide to spend the rest of the day picking through them. Armor is quite a bit harder to come by so Yuji quickly has to decide what weapons and things to leave behind to load up on some of the armors.


    ¡°Swords are always good, and we have quite a bit use for the spears, but even Takeshi doesn¡¯t use a shield he uses his sword to parry¡­ You could probably cut down on the amount of shields you have.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°What if you summon a monster that needs a shield?¡±


    ¡°I am sure they can find one out of 25 to their liking just as easy as they can picking through 100¡­¡±


    Saki: ¡°Mistress! Look this armor might work for you.¡±


    The armor is by no means a heavy armor, but it consists of fancy decorated plates made from the same red-ish material that my new swords are made from. It has a staggering 3 enchantments, but they don¡¯t appear to be very strong ones.


    [Wind-Resistant] which is pretty self-explanatory is also pretty situational. There is also [Power] which increases the wears strength. I have been keeping to the back now so that isn¡¯t really much of a help here. The final enchantment is the one that would benefit me the most, [Greater Magic], by no means is it extravagant, but it provides a decent boost to my available magic. It¡¯s a different rank then that of the ring Daddy gave me so they even both work together.


    Even with less enchantments the others find armors that benefit them quite a bit more then my armor, but this armor allows me to continue to wear my kimono and even my chainmail without hindrance so for a normal mage it would be phenomenal, but it¡¯s merely acceptable for the well roundedness of a dungeon core.


    Yuji: ¡°I hope we don¡¯t find any more item rooms¡­ I can¡¯t carry a single more piece of equipment.¡±


    Akane: ¡°If the items are better then what we have I am all for it.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°You know how hard it is to go through every single item each time and decide which to keep and which to discard?¡±


    ¡°Well depending on what happens at the end of the line, we may be able to return and gather more equipment.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Having to trek through that cavern again¡­¡± ¨CHe lets out a deep groan.-


    ¡°Even if we could make several trips a year just to break the items down when we return that would be a massive amount of xp for the dungeon.¡±


    Yuji then falls to the ground sprawling out.


    Akane: ¡°We could even send the others in to train. Look how much progress we have made.¡±


    Yuji quickly sits back up. ¡°Yea who says it has to be us! We could send the others in!¡±


    ¡°But you are the only one with the [Shadow Pocket] spell.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Come on you wouldn¡¯t want to lead the poor helpless damsels around the big scary cavern all alone?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°As tempting as that sounds¡­ NO.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Wow he really does hate this place¡­¡±


    ¡°I guess you should get some rest, and we can start back at it first thing in the morning.¡±


    We continue on the next morning and are stuck fighting quite a bit more monsters, I don¡¯t know if that means we are getting closer to the end or just bad luck but if things continue on like this we aren¡¯t going to make much progress each day.


    About an hour until the next horde of Oni will spawn we reach a large elaborate door in the middle of the hallway.


    ¡°I have never seen the Oni open any doors, did we make a wrong turn somewhere?¡±


    Akane: ¡°I don¡¯t know, but it is getting close for the time that they appear, so we need to make up our mind what we are going to do quickly.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Only one way to find out what¡¯s on the other side of the door.¡± ¨CHe pulls on the door.-


    And pulls¡­ And heaves¡­ And grunts¡­


    Akane: ¡°Trying to sound so manly backfired didn¡¯t it?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Just shut it and give me a hand.¡±


    Akane moves over to help but it still doesn¡¯t budge. Satoshi quickly moves in to help and so does Saki, I decide to give them a hand as well. It takes every single one of us but the door finally starts to slowly creak open.


    After having it wide enough to walk through we give it up and Yuji is leaning over breathing hard.


    Yuji: ¡°There is no way the Oni come through there. They would crush each other trying to push open the door.¡±


    Akane: ¡°They have to come from up here somewhere. Unless we passed the point from which they spawned.¡±


    ¡°Like you said we are running out of time. We need to find a defendable location.¡±


    Even with the struggling we did, it¡¯s still a tight squeeze through the door as Yuji goes first followed by Satoshi, then Akane, Saki, and I follow up the rear.


    This room appears to be a large throne room of sorts but it is completely empty. Not even a throne sits at the head of the room.


    Yuji: ¡°Well now what¡­?¡±


    ¡°There has got to be something else to this.¡±


    Akane: ¡°What if that is all¡­ Maybe the Oni just spawn there is no dungeon, crystal, or anything like that.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re saying a natural rift or something? What about the castle, the cavern, the items. All of it means nothing?¡±


    Akane: ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ I am just saying there is clearly nothing here¡­¡±


    ¡°Just check everything. The walls, the floor, everything¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°There isn¡¯t time the Oni will spawn soon. I don¡¯t think they spawn in here but if they do we shouldn¡¯t be standing in the middle of the room would be a bad idea.¡±


    We quickly gather at the head of the room where the throne should be, but noon hits and nothing happens. We look around a bit confused but then a few Oni begin pouring through the door. Not many make it through however till the door slams shut. We quickly deal with the Oni in the room with us, and can hear pounding and scraping on the door.


    Akane: ¡°They all must have tried to push in and instead it caused the door to push closed.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°It was hard enough to pull that door open as it was. How hard do you think it is going to be with a horde of Oni pushing against it on the other side¡­


    Saki: ¡°You are saying we are trapped?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°At least till we find another way out or they break down the door, and who knows how long that will take or how many hordes of Oni will spawn between now and then.¡±


    ¡°We got overly confident about handling the Oni, and we screwed up¡­ If I wasn¡¯t here they would flow out of the castle out into Shima¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°At least we can¡¯t starve to death.¡±


    ¡°Well no use standing around¡­ Keep an eye on the door, but let¡¯s see if there is anything in this room.¡±


    We spend the next few hours checking over the room. It is huge, but empty so we have even tried pushing on stones hoping for a secret passage or something, but all to no avail.


    Yuji: ¡°I don¡¯t know what¡¯s worse being stuck in here for eternity, or having to listen to that pounding on the door!¡±


    Saki: ¡°What about magic Mistress? My spells don¡¯t have much impact, but you have some strong fire spells right maybe you could melt the door?¡±


    Akane: ¡°Hey! If not the entire door maybe just the hinges would be enough.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°The door pushes open from this side, which means the hinges are on the other side.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Whose dumb idea was that?!¡±


    ¡°Even still it actually might be worth a shot. A normal dungeon, the door wouldn¡¯t take any damage, unless it¡¯s set as destructible, but with this place?¡±


    The most powerful fire spell I got is just a one shot thing, but the next spell under it I can extend the duration of by maintaining a supply of magic to it, so I decide to go with that one. I also charge it up fully making full use of my skills and then turn it loose on the door.


    The door appears to be effected, but even after maintaining the spell for several intervals it still hasn¡¯t been enough to make a dent in it¡­


    Akane: ¡°It¡¯s working¡­ Just not very well.¡±


    Saki: ¡°I¡¯m sorry if I had some fire spells¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not your fault, and I could probably hold this spell for an hour, so we just got to keep at it.¡±


    Every once in a while we can hear a pop and creak, but even after expending half of my magic the door is red hot, but doesn¡¯t appear to be budging. The room is huge, but the extended duration of the spell has even raised the temperature inside of it to an uncomfortable, but not dangerous level.


    Yuji: ¡°It¡¯s getting quite warm in here, but I smell roasting meat for some odd reason, and its making me want to eat some.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Idiot! The Oni are still pushing the door from the other side, so that smell is obviously the smell of cooking Oni!¡±


    Yuji: ¡°ugh¡­ At least I know if I never eat meat again I won¡¯t starve¡­¡±


    ¡°This isn¡¯t working, but I might have an idea.¡±


    While the fire spell finishes out its duration I quickly start to maximize another spell, and as soon as the fire spell wears off I hit it with a blast of frozen ice.


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress! After all that work of heating it up what are you doing!?¡±


    The door quickly groans, twisting and contorting while as it is quickly cooled, Oni quickly try to reach through the crack in the door, but it still isn¡¯t enough.


    ¡°It wasn¡¯t enough¡­ I can only afford to do it one more time, but I will probably be out of magic.¡±


    I start to heat the door again with my fire spell, and now the smell of the Oni as they push on the door is quite a bit stronger as it waifs through the crack in the door. Yuji¡¯s face seems to get a bit pale. It takes at least another 15 minutes for me to heat the door enough and I then quickly maximize another ice spell hitting the door.


    This time as the door groans and contorts something seems to give at the bottom and the entire bottom half of the door jerks bending outward. It is such a violent action it launches every Oni that was pressing against the door into the air.


    That doesn¡¯t stop the Oni behind them from quickly rushing through the gap now. Quite a few of the Oni are charred heaps on the floor, and even more are scorched and burned. That makes this wave simple to deal with, and I am sticking to my new sword and not using any magic.Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    We wasted a few hours but it seems we are finally free of the room now that the Oni have been dealt with. Just to be on the safe side however we quickly exit back into the main hall.


    Yuji: ¡°I am glad that worked out¡­ I really thought we would have been trapped in there forever.¡±


    Akane: ¡°It was only a few hours...¡±


    Satoshi: ¡°Well now what we know the Oni come from out here somewhere, but if it is a rift we won¡¯t be able to see it.¡±


    ¡°Well the door was big and obvious we didn¡¯t bother looking around here¡­ Let¡¯s see if we missed something.¡±


    A quick search reveals a set of staircases on either side of the large throne room. They weren¡¯t exactly hidden, but with the way the tapestries hung from the ceiling we missed them the first time.


    Akane: ¡°I doubt the Oni come from up there, because the Oni seem to take straight paths and that would of at least caused wear on the tapestries as they brushed against them.¡±


    ¡°I think it¡¯s reasonable to assume they spawn right in the middle of this hallway. You can see the wear on the carpeting right down the center leading out the door, but towards the throne room and sides the color isn¡¯t fading as bad.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Then we have found were the Oni come from?¡±


    ¡°I believe so, but that still doesn¡¯t explain the why or how. Maybe the answers are up these stairs.¡±


    Yuji sighs. ¡°We finally reach the end only to find we still have to go further.¡±


    We travel up one of the staircases and it starts to arch leading me to believe that once we reach the top both sets of stairs will lead to the same location. Probably somewhere above the center of the throne room we reach the landing above.


    The area is large and highly decorated, with quite a few doors off of the room on either side. I would have to say if the large room below us was a throne room then these must be the royal quarters. Other than fancy carpets and tapestries however there is little to no furniture and even after checking several of the rooms to the side they all appear the same way.


    Akane: ¡°It looks like as soon as the castle was complete it was then abandoned before even fully furnishing it.¡±


    ¡°Well if the Oni started spawning in the middle of your castle you would abandon it too. Although I seriously doubt humans could have built a castle like this at the bottom of the cavern the stone that the walls consist of isn¡¯t even of the same type as the cavern. If I had to guess, whatever it is now, I think it at least used to be a dungeon at one time.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°You are saying past tense though¡­ If it was a dungeon, if the dungeon core was killed or the crystal broken then wouldn¡¯t the castle fallen apart as well?¡±


    ¡°You would think, but then you have the monsters, the items, and even the Oni. I am starting to think whatever is causing this is stealing or taken over the dungeons.¡±


    Akane: ¡°But what about the Oni and monsters in the beginning they weren¡¯t being supplied from the dungeon and had to eat.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know exactly how it works, but it seems the further from the castle they are the less connection to the dungeon they have. Once we went deeper the monsters were still eating, but as deep as they were there was no way they were being supplied enough food to sustain themselves. Then there are the items and Oni, this dungeon was by no means the strength of which I am sure the elders are, yet I don¡¯t even think they could afford to have rifts like the items or Oni spawn from.¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Rift monsters can¡¯t leave even there floor though, so if the Oni are from a rift how could they not only leave there floor but even the dungeon?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­¡±


    We continue checking the rooms but then we are left with only a single door at the head of the hallway.


    Yuji: ¡°There better be something behind that door more than just another dead end, or I give up.¡±


    Yuji however isn¡¯t let down because as we start to open the door it seems to hang on something. The room is only a little larger than the ones to the sides, but this one is filled with vines. In the dead center of the room is a pedestal covered in vines and on top of the pedestal is a dark gem stone at least 2 feet tall.


    Yuji: ¡°It¡¯s a crystal!¡±


    He starts to step forward into the room but I quickly grab him. ¡°Wait!¡±


    One of the vines quickly coils around the spot where his leg was a few seconds before. Something about the crystal seems off as well. Crystals should be glowing pulsing with light like a heartbeat, but this one there is nothing.


    ¡°Something is wrong here. Look the crystal doesn¡¯t even appear to be active. It even looks like there are cracks running through it like the vines wrapping around it are holding it together.¡±


    Akane: ¡°How can that be? If a crystal is broken then it completely shatters and the shards enter the monster or creature that broke it absorbing the crystals power. Even an imitation crystal works the same way, but the power is only on a small scale what a real crystal provides. For the broken crystal to remain behind afterwards should be impossible.¡±


    One of the vines around the crystal then seems to constrict, and when it does the crystal lightly glows and from behind us, several large ogre sized Oni, appear as they spawn into the room.


    ¡°Even with intruders in the room!? Everyone watch out!¡±


    Everyone quickly draws their weapons and a battle brakes out. These massive Oni are at least equally as strong as the monsters we have been facing in the castle so that means I am worthless against them. Yuji can¡¯t use his skills so he just keeps slicing away at the creatures while Akane uses her spear, and Satoshi uses his fists and feet.


    Saki¡¯s spells are focused mainly on defensive boosting the others abilities and healing when she can. The few offensive spells she throws at the creatures however do deal a decent amount of damage. I used most of my magic on the door below so even with the amount that has recovered since then I can do little but heal small amounts of damage.


    Even with our limits though our group slowly gains the upper hand and the massive Oni begin to fall. When we get down to the last one though the crystal behind us glows faintly again as more of the massive Oni crash onto the floor and join in the attack.


    Saki: ¡°If this keeps us we are going to be in a bad way!¡±


    ¡°You all keep it up, and I am going to try to do something about the crystal!¡±


    I turn back around aiming a large fire spell at the crystal. As my spells enters the room vines quickly shoot from the ground protecting the crystal, however there is an ear splitting screech and the vines wreath.


    I don¡¯t know if I will have enough magic but it seemed to do quite a bit of damage so if I keep it up I will eventually hit the crystal. After another fire spell and screech, a large pod descends from the ceiling opening up to shield the crystal is a large crimson flower with thorny petals like teeth.


    The vines start to lash out creeping past the door now entering the room with us while I throw another fire spell right into the center of the large flower. The flower quickly closes slamming into the ceiling while screeching causing the entire room to rumble.


    I then see the crystal begin to glow again as many more creatures begin to spawn into the room. Unlike anything I have ever seen before most of them are incomplete. Some appear ripped or torn apart, while others appear only partially formed, like an unborn fetus.


    Most crash to the ground dead, a few wreath around on the floor, but a couple of them start to drag themselves across the floor in my direction.


    Yuji: ¡°What the hell is going on!¡±


    Akane: ¡°It seems to be working Mistress don¡¯t let up!¡±


    The flower has returned to its guarding of the crystal and I draw my sword slashing at some of the abominations creeping my way. One of the vines then manages to wrap itself around my ankle pulling me to the floor trying to drag me into the room towards the jaw like flower.


    Aoi and Midori quickly jump to my aid as Midori starts shredding at the vine with its teeth and Aoi uses magic trying to prevent the flowers movement. I manage to pull myself back to my feet taking out another one of the slimy uncomplete monsters crawling at me.


    The others are doing everything they can to hold the complete monsters off while now also having to deal with the incomplete ones harassing them as well. I start to focus my magic the best I can, summoning 12 elemental orbs surrounding me using the most powerful attack spells I got.


    I only have one shot at this, so I launch them at the flower one at a time spreading the limit of time between them to its max. Even after seven of the orbs hit the flower it wreathes but doesn¡¯t falter. Eight¡­Nine¡­Ten¡­ It is looking to be in serious shape the crystal begins glowing again this time without stopping.


    Creature after creature hits the ground. Most are dead or can¡¯t even move, but there is no end to them. Eleven¡­ I¡¯m not going to make it. I launch the last ball forward charging into the room right behind it. The last ball erupts into a fiery explosion as I sink my sword up to the hilt into the center of the flower.


    I release the sword jumping to the side pulling my staff from my back using the magic stored within the orbs on the staff I slice at the vines holding the crystal. The crystal shatters shards piercing my skin, but instead of pain I feel warmth. The flower and vines quickly between to wilt drawing up and dying.


    Akane: ¡°Mistress, you did it! They are dying!¡±


    I pull my sword from the wilted flower, sheathing it, and notice two large vines as big around as I am are the only two remaining to have not wilted. I don¡¯t have much magic but I cast a light fire spell at one of them.


    When the spell hits them they quickly retreat disappearing into the wall of the castle¡­ I then notice a message.


    Dungeon Core #245 [Inari] has acquired the skill [Heroic] (Rank 1) Dungeon Core #245 [Inari] has acquired the skill [Corruption Cleanser] (Rank 1) Dungeon Core #245 [Inari]¡¯s skill [Inari¡¯s Acolyte] (Rank 4) has become [Inari¡¯s Crusader] (Rank 1)


    As I close the screen Yuji places his hand on my shoulder.


    Yuji: ¡°Mistress you did it¡­¡±


    The entire room then begins to shake.


    Yuji: ¡°Now what?!¡±


    ¡°The dungeon it¡¯s collapsing! Time to go!¡±


    We quickly begin to exit out of the castle as fast as we can, it takes quite a while but we manage to cross the bridge leading up to it and the shaking as stopped.


    Akane: ¡°Just the castle¡­ What about the cavern?¡±


    Yuji: ¡°All that beautiful gear¡­¡±


    ¡°You are loaded up, so it isn¡¯t a complete loss. It does seem the cavern isn¡¯t going to collapse, but let¡¯s not takes any chances alright?¡±


    It still takes us several days to make it out of the cavern but with the disappearance of the dungeon the items remaining in the cavern have decayed and broken down as well. The equipment we are wearing is ok because we claimed ownership of it, but Yuji was quite worried about the items in his [Shadow Pocket], but they turned out to be ok as well.


    Even after making it free of the cavern it still takes several more days before we reach the base of the stair leading us home. We got swarmed with Oni off and on the entire trip but after what we dealt with in the dungeon it was not even worth mentioning. It does leave us to believe there are more sources of Oni out there though.


    Filling Madam Erin in was quite the chore as well. She seemed even more confused than I did however. She made me promise her, until we get to the bottom of this, not to tell a soul not even Mommy and Daddy.


    With the trouble they are going through right now with Daddy¡¯s loss of memory, I feel they have enough on their plates to deal with right now, so I agree.


    Once we reach the top of the stairs Takeshi and my monsters are there waiting for me. The battle results screen appears and it is quite long but the only part I am interested in is the bottom line that reads.


    1,966,250 XP total rewarded


    With that much xp we should be able to take it easy for a little bit, but at the moment I got more important things to worry about.


    ¡°Takeshi!¡±


    I run and jump into his arms. He catches me but it looks more out of surprise and reflex than anything else.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari! You mustn¡¯t.¡±


    ¡°After everything we have been through. Don¡¯t argue, just say welcome back!¡±


    He sets me down and then says. ¡°Welcome back.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not what I mean¡­¡±


    He then brings my head back into his chest as he hugs me and says. ¡°Welcome home.¡±


    I can¡¯t keep the tears from my eyes, trying to hide them by rubbing my face against his chest I wrap my arms around him as well. He soon lets go, but I don¡¯t.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t wanta!¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°No¡­¡±


    I don¡¯t know if it is to ruin our reunion or what, but Tatsuo clears his throat and says. ¡°Inari-sama, something happened while you were gone and you should really see it.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean something happened?¡± ¨CI say while letting go of Takeshi and looking up at him, but he adverts his gaze.-


    Tatsuo: ¡°We received another blessing from Inari.¡±


    ¡°How can that be¡­?¡±


    Takeshi is still not looking my direction and has seemed to have broken out in a cold sweat¡­


    Chika: ¡°Mistress it was something the entire village prayed to Inari for and Inari provided.¡±


    Was this the secret Takeshi has been keeping from me this whole time¡­ Just what is going on here?


    ¡°Show me¡­¡±


    Tatsuo bows and then leads me through town and down to the bottom floor. What should be a small square area instead has a stone walkway along it and the wall no longer reaches the roof with several decorative designs on it. Between the roof and the top of the wall I can make out the appearance of several large buildings on the other side.


    The stone walkway leads to the center of the wall which has a large heavy wooden gate on it. With the assistance of Chika, Tatsuo opens the gate.


    Beyond the gate is three large buildings and a small collection of smaller buildings all connected by thin open hallways. In front of all the buildings is a large pond, and the center building as well seems to be surrounded by water from 3 sides while small bridges go over the water to connect it to the other two large buildings.


    Every bit of it is constructed in the Shima style but is on a scale and quality I have never seen. Along the pathway up to the house are several of the stone fox statues like that which is up at the temple.


    ¡°This looks very complex for a new temple¡­¡±


    Tatsuo laugh and says. ¡°No Inari-sama this is your home.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean my home?!¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°The villagers and I all prayed to Inari to provide you with a home as thanks for everything you have done and we were blessed with this.¡±


    Chika quickly jumps in and says. ¡°Inari provided the land and the village all came together and pitched in building the entire thing by hand.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°Yes, Inari gave us the land and the foundation and told us to do the work ourselves to prove our resolve.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean Inari told you¡­?¡±


    Tatsuo removes a folded up piece of parchment from inside his pocket unfolding it to show me¡­ I read the note over and can¡¯t believe any of this¡­ What was Takeshi thinking? I quickly look at him but he is still avoiding eye contact.


    Tatsuo: ¡°We were so worried we were not going to finish in time, but we pulled a couple of all-nighters when we heard you were on your way back and managed to finish it just a few days ago.¡±


    ¡°What did Yuzuki say about all of this¡­?¡±


    Chika: ¡°She, like the rest of us was grateful to Inari for allowing us to thank our Mistress in such a wonderful way.¡±


    ¡°But¡­¡±


    I can¡¯t say anything¡­ Not with Tatsuo here¡­


    Tatsuo: ¡°Please let me show you around.¡±


    Tatsuo leads me through the buildings showing me everything there is a male quarters in one of the main buildings with at least a dozen independent rooms, a female quarters making up another large building with the same.


    Then there is the central building¡­This seems to be the majority of the house with all the typical amenities included, but then he shows me to large room.


    Tatsuo: ¡°And this would be Inari-sama¡¯s quarters.¡±


    Chika: ¡°That door off to the side there leads to Takeshi-sama¡¯s room, so that he is always close by to protect the Mistress!¡±


    I like the sound of nothing being between Takeshi¡¯s room and mine but a wall thin enough you can throw a rock through, but I am finding it hard to believe they managed to put this all together in the short time I was gone without [Menu].


    Takeshi finally speaks up he still seems rather nervous but seems to be able to read my mind as he says. ¡°We worked really hard to make sure all of this was completed by our own hands, to show to Inari our dedication¡­¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I can see this is a lot to take in, and I am sure there are matters that are in need of your care now that you returned, so I will excuse myself.¡±


    After Tatsuo leaves I quickly say. ¡°What were you all thinking!?¡±


    Chika: ¡°Mistress please¡­¡±


    ¡°You were supposed to keep an eye on everything with [Menu], but this?!¡± ¨CI say to Chika and then turn to Takeshi.- ¡°And you! I knew you were up to something she couldn¡¯t of done this without your permission. How could you let them do this? And what¡¯s more you made written communication directly from Inari!?¡±


    Chika: ¡°But Mistress the entire village prayed to Inari for this¡­ We thought if prayers to Inari were only answered when you were here, then the rumors about you would never die down, but if Inari did this for you without you here then it adds to the credibility.¡±


    ¡°But a disciple?!¡±


    Saki: ¡°Why not Mistress¡­? Everything you have done in Inari¡¯s name, Inari would be welcome you as such.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re agreeing with this?¡±


    Akane: ¡°Why not Mistress? That small building would only fool the villagers for so long especially with all of us now. This way we have an entire floor to ourselves to do what we need and all without rising suspicion of the villagers.¡±


    ¡°I can¡¯t argue with you there, but this¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°You deserve it.¡±


    ¡°Takeshi¡­¡±


    Yuji: ¡°Great! I am going to go pick out my room!¡±


    It takes a while for things to calm down around the dungeon, but eventually it does¡­ Not long after we returned Akane really did wrap her legs around Akihiro, which caused Yuji to be depressed for a few days.


    That is until he started dating Yuzuki¡­ He was in a better mood but she is holding out on him and they haven¡¯t even slept together. I don¡¯t see what he has to be in a good mood about. At this point even if I could get Takeshi to make me his lover if he still wouldn¡¯t touch me then what is even the point.


    Then before Yuji can seal the deal with Yuzuki, Akane finds out they are dating and flipped out.


    Akane: ¡°Yuzuki?! Anyone but Yuzuki! You are better than that Yuji! She only does the minimum required of her, even in her duties at the shrine.¡±


    I never thought about it but she is right¡­ I am going to have to get on to her case about that, but you know that sounds like Yuji as well, so maybe they are a good match for one another.


    Yuji: ¡°What do you have to complain about? You have Akihiro now!¡±


    Akane: ¡°Fine, until you find someone more acceptable I will still give you what you need!¡±


    Akihiro: ¡°Hold on here!¡±


    Akane: ¡°Sorry Akihiro, but this is important¡­ I promise once Yuji finds a woman worth his time we can then be together.¡±


    Akihiro: ¡°You want me to wait for you, while you sleep with another man?¡±


    Akane: ¡°It¡¯s just Yuji.¡±


    Akihiro: ¡°You know that¡¯s fine! You want him you can have him¡­¡±


    After that Yuji and Akane were back together, I don¡¯t understand it myself, they seem to be getting along quite poorly, but behind closed doors¡­Let¡¯s just say I have been quite entertained. Akihiro seemed to bounce back on his feet, or I guess I say bounced onto Yuzuki, and I don¡¯t know why but Yuzuki didn¡¯t seem to have the same reservations with him as she did with Yuji. They however are quite bland and it isn¡¯t very enjoyable to watch, so I think Akihiro might of did Yuji a favor¡­


    I was rather looking forward to the events playing out with Saki and Satoshi when we got back, but even when they finally did finally sleep together they were so worried that I would be watching that they practically made it impossible for me to see anything interesting. They could have at least put on a good show for me after all the help I gave them.


    I was hoping getting to watch them would at least help me take my mind off Takeshi, but no such luck. At least I am not the only one doing without, Chika, Hotaru, Rin, and Kaori seem to be having the same problem.


    Chika: ¡°I don¡¯t know I kind of like him¡­ All those muscles¡­ and he is so kind¡­¡±


    Kaori: ¡°But he is so old!¡±


    Chika: ¡°Everyone is old compared to us, even that snot nosed kid of that farmer.¡±


    Hotaru: ¡°There is also the fact that he could find out about the Mistress, I don¡¯t think she wants Tatsuo-sama to find out about us.¡±


    Chika: ¡°If I can get him to fall for me maybe it would even help the Mistress¡­¡±


    Rin: ¡°I am with Kaori-san¡­ He is too old¡­¡±


    Tatsuo looks like he still has at least a good 2/3 of his life ahead of him so calling him old seems a little sad. I wouldn¡¯t want to try him out myself, but I have wondered what he would be like, because as fond of him as several of the villagers are, he hasn¡¯t made moves on any of them. Maybe I should encourage Chika a bit more¡­


    The one thing I really like about this house that was made for me is this hot spring thing that it has around it and when speaking with the girls one day they offered me some vital Shima knowledge.


    ¡°Takeshi, we are family right?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I am Miss Inari¡¯s shield.¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t consider yourself family?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Our situation is complicated.¡±


    ¡°Daddy treats all of his monsters like family. You¡¯re not one of my monsters, but you are ranked higher, so doesn¡¯t that make you family?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari¡­ Where is this coming from?¡±


    ¡°I was just curious if after all this time being with me if you were just doing your duty or that you actually thought of yourself as one of us.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°If it is really that important to you then, yes you can consider me family.¡±


    ¡°Great!¡± ¨CI grab his arm and start pulling.-


    Takeshi: ¡°What are you doing Miss Inari?¡±


    ¡°If we are family then something like taking a bath together should be normal, isn¡¯t that right?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°So this was your plan¡­ I refuse.¡±


    ¡°So you don¡¯t think of us as family¡­ How can I trust you protecting me if you don¡¯t even think of me as family!?¡±


    And just like that I managed to talk him into the hot spring with me, although he does have quite the death grip around that towel wrapped around him¡­


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, please at least cover yourself if we are to share a bath!¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t wear clothes in the bath! You don¡¯t need that towel either¡­ Now give me!¡±


    I try to tug on his towel but no luck¡­ If I gained levels like the others his strength would have been no match for mine¡­ I do however notice something has caught his eyes as I try to pull on the towel.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari! That is indecent you are waving your breasts in my face!¡±


    ¡°Takeshi you are blushing! It is ok Takeshi if you want to touch one you can. You can touch them both!¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari please forgive me!¡± ¨CHe quickly jumps from the water and retreats, but not before I could see the cause of his distress.-


    It didn¡¯t go as well as I had hoped but I did learn something for sure that day. The others weren¡¯t just telling me what I wanted to hear, he does desire me. That alone was enough to make the fact he refused to talk to me the next two days, worth it.


    The Oni never have died down in the forest so there really must be more places like the one we destroyed, and the groups are still going out to gather xp but we are not as worried about it at the moment. Their new weapons and armor really made gathering xp like walking to the well to draw water.


    I decided to keep the foxes out of the village for a while, so they didn¡¯t disappear while I was gone and suddenly reappear when I return looking different. The village has several rumors about where they disappeared to, but very few of them involve me.


    All in all the time since our return has been quite pleasant, that is until I receive a message one day.


    The Elders have requested your presence at a meeting to be held in two days. Due to the difficulties concerning your dungeon you are given an extra day to prepare, and you are requested to meet me outside of you dungeon at first light on the designated day. This meeting can be refused, but due to the difficulties required to arrive at your dungeon your refusal must be in the form of a reply no less than 24 hours then the designated time of pickup. If you decide to refuse to attend the meeting future assistance from the elders may be refused. Dungeon Core #36 [Elder Madam Erin]

 Kenta (Inari Arc)

    It wasn¡¯t very long but I got to see Mommy and Daddy again¡­ Daddy didn¡¯t remember me at all, but just to get to see them again was worth it. I wish I could do more to help them out but for now I guess with the distance that isn¡¯t really possible.


    Madam Erin talked to me for hours before I met with the others, she basically asked all the same questions she already had about the encounter with the dungeon crystal at the bottom of the cavern, but there wasn¡¯t any new information to give.


    She was also pretty worried about me training a new dungeon core this year. The opportunity gave me a bit of knowledge I wanted to know as well. Apparently [Inari¡¯s Providence] doesn¡¯t show up as restricted in her [Menu], but instead it doesn¡¯t show up at all.


    She has no information on it at all. I asked her why she refused to step into my dungeon and she said that she could see into the temple grounds, but to her is seemed like an illusion like something painted on a stone. She said she didn¡¯t know how, but she knew if she tried to step inside, it wouldn¡¯t have been pleasant for her.


    That means they are a little worried that something bad might happen to a new core if it is born in my dungeon, but after voicing her concerns with Dyson he simply said ¡°If it dies it dies.¡± I really hope it doesn¡¯t come to that though.


    When asked by Madam Erin if I wanted to train a male or female I quickly said male, I have been having such poor luck with Takeshi some fresh meat might do me some good. Although after hearing what Mommy and Daddy said I felt a little bad, even going as far to say I needed the new core to be the male.


    Because it will be so hard for traveling back and forth Madam Erin already gave me the alter in which the new cores are born on, and even the xp for its training, so now I just have to wait till day it is born. As long as I keep the new dungeon core out of sight it shouldn¡¯t be a problem with the village, but I probably should make a few changes to my dungeon to prepare.


    All my monsters thought it was a great honor for me to be training a dungeon core while still being so young, but Takeshi seemed hesitant about it. He has had time to get over it though, so after all the time of waiting the day in which the new core will be born has arrived.


    Takeshi knocked on my door telling me it is time to get up, he has a door that leads directly to my room from his own, but in all this time I am the only one that has ever opened it. Of course the first thing I tried to do after we started living here was use the door in the middle of the night, but no matter how sound asleep he seems to be he always manages to catch me. He shows so little acknowledgement in regards to the door that even when addressing me like this morning he will exit his room and address me from outside the door in the hallway¡­


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, it is time to awaken. We have a big day ahead.¡±


    He didn¡¯t even wish me a happy birthday¡­ I could have at least crawled into my bed as a present. I get up and get dressed then meet with the others. I have the new dungeon core alter set up in the middle of the main room of the main building of the house.


    ¡°As you know we are welcoming in a new core today, now I understand it is pretty exciting, but there are still many tasks that still need to be completed, so during this month I am asking you to not let me down while I may be busy elsewhere.¡±


    All: ¡°Yes Mistress!¡±


    ¡°Alright, you are all dismissed.¡±


    Akane: ¡°Mistress, we were hoping to get to stay and watch the new core as he is born.¡±


    ¡°As I said there are a lot of things that need to be taken care of, besides how would you like it to have a bunch of gawkers looking in on you we you were summoned in naked?¡±


    Akane: ¡°You summoned Ryota, Saki, Satoshi, and myself at the same time so there was a bunch of gawkers¡­¡±


    ¡°And see that was a mistake I learned that day so the new dungeon core doesn¡¯t have to suffer the same misfortune that you had to endure. Now you all have things to do, so see to it.¡±


    All: ¡°Yes Mistress¡­¡±


    After they all depart Takeshi remains so I say. ¡°You to.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I am your shield my duty is to protect you and, with another dungeon core arriving that means my place is here.¡±


    ¡°He will just be level 1 without even his dungeon, he wouldn¡¯t be a threat.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°That may be so, but my place is still here.¡±


    I was hoping to ogle the new core for a while, but I know when Takeshi gets this way there isn¡¯t no talking him down¡­


    ¡°Alright then fine, but you must stay out of the way.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Very well.¡±


    Madam Erin gave me the xp bead for training the dungeon core back when we had the meeting. I have already accepted it and made a training room for the new core, so other than equipment the new core should be completely set.


    I hope he turns out human. If he is human I might be able to take him outside to do a bit of training after the rifts no longer are enough. He is should have the looks according to my subconscious, but I hope that means it will be on the desire side of it instead of loathing¡­ Oh no¡­ Not a rabbit beastkin¡­


    Luckily when the he is born and the light fades the mold doesn¡¯t have long ears. The outer layer breaks away leaving a human male behind¡­ I wanted him to be human so he could train outside, but this might be just as big of a problem.


    Takeshi seems to get a bit uneasy as the dungeon core sits up opening his eyes. I purposely didn¡¯t summon any clothes for him wanting to make sure I got a good view, so when Takeshi quickly looks around the only thing he can find is a small decorative tapestry on one of the tables. He quickly grabs it covering the dungeon core¡¯s crotch.


    ¡°Well this was unexpected.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Please Miss Inari summon him some clothes¡­¡±


    Ignoring his appearance he quickly slides off of the alter and kneels down bowing in front of me.


    Dungeon Core: ¡°Mistress, it is an honor. Please guide me.¡±


    ¡°I know of a place I can guide you¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari! Please!¡±


    ¡°Fine. Fine¡­¡± ¨CI tap away on my [Menu] slowly till some clothes appear, and Takeshi quickly stands between me and the new core handing him the clothes.-


    ¡°Takeshi I can¡¯t see!¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Did you have to summon clothes like this¡­? This is bad enough as it is¡­¡±


    Takeshi assists the dungeon core getting dressed and then they both stand there next to each other and I can¡¯t help but laugh¡­ Now we have a fox beastkin Takeshi, and a human Takeshi. Not only his appearance and I mean all of his appearance, but even the clothes I summoned him are a dead match for Takeshi.


    Even when Takeshi fled from the bath he wasn¡¯t this embarrassed as now that the dungeon core has been dressed he quickly kneels again.


    Dungeon Core: ¡°Please Mistress grant me a worthy name that I may carry for the rest of my life, in which that I can proudly look back and say it was the name bestowed on me by my True Mistress.¡±


    ¡°Alright Dungeon Core #618¡­ How about¡­ Oh I know¡­ Kenta?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari¡­¡±


    Kenta: ¡°Thank you Mistress I will treasure this name always.¡±


    ¡°See you could learn a thing or two from him Takeshi.¡±


    A Takeshi that has a subservient personality¡­ I think this is going to be a very good month indeed.


    ¡°Alright, I guess we should dive right in then. Let me show you the way.¡± ¨CI stand taking Kenta¡¯s hand leading him through the house.-


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari! That isn¡¯t the way!¡±


    ¡°I was just going to show him around first¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°You have an obligation to train him to the best of your ability. I think you should get started.¡±


    ¡°I couldn¡¯t agree more.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°In surviving as a dungeon core!¡±


    ¡°Oh fine, I guess there is still plenty of time after all.¡±


    I could leave Takeshi behind and do what I will with Kenta, but I don¡¯t know, I kind of like this reaction I am getting out of Takeshi, and like I said I have plenty of time to break him in. So I take ahold of both of them and transfer us to the room I had set up.


    The room we arrive in isn¡¯t quite like what Takeshi and I trained in during my training with Daddy, but according to the way Madam Erin and Dyson suggested this is the way to go. The room itself is quite large, the max you can get out of 1000xp, and attached to it is a single double door, on the other side is another room, but its size doesn¡¯t really matter so it is only the standard sized room.


    It is the room with all the rifts I placed inside and now we just need to get some gear for Kenta and we can get started.


    ¡°So Kenta, what kind of equipment would you like to use?¡±


    Kenta: ¡°Anything that Mistress suggests is the perfect.¡±


    I go through [Menu] through the remaining items we brought back from the castle. All the best gear was already selected by the others, but there are still quite a few choice items. The weapons that we have the most of are swords so I pick him out a good katana and wakizashi.


    The enchantments are not that great, but he is only level one with swords equal to that of mythril, so he should be more then fine throughout his training with these. It would also be quite a shame to cover that perfect body in heavy armor so I choose a light armor so he has plenty of mobility.


    Kenta: ¡°Mistress I couldn¡¯t possibly accept such treasured pieces such as these.¡±


    ¡°Consider them a birthday present, because that is what you do on someone¡¯s birthday you give them a good present!¡± ¨CI say while staring at Takeshi.-


    Kenta: ¡°Thank you Mistress I shall put them on and never remove them!¡±


    ¡°Well I wouldn¡¯t go that far, but I am glad you like them. Here let me help you strap that armor on!¡±


    Kenta: ¡°Thank you Mistress.¡±


    Takeshi looks on uneasy as I help Kenta put his armor on, and it¡¯s been two years, and it I guess it isn¡¯t actually him but getting to explore a bit on Takeshi¡¯s body is what I have been craving for a long time.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, that is surely enough!¡±


    ¡°Well I guess for now that will do¡­ Alright Kenta get ready. Once we start we won¡¯t stop till you are laid out, and as soon as you recover we will go again.¡±


    Kenta: ¡°Yes Mistress!¡±


    I was expecting him to draw the Katana, but he draws both blades one in each hand as he prepares for the attack. I then slowly begin to have the monsters enter the room. Kenta begins slashing at the slimes entering the room and his training begins.


    ¡­


    This is actually quite boring. He has been at this for hours now, and he is just slashing away at these weak monsters. He has gained quite a few levels already, but with the swords I gave him he is making short work of everything.


    He doesn¡¯t seem to be casting any magic that is until some of the harder monsters begin to enter, but most spells he casts are of it seems to be earth and shadow magic. Maybe not only his appearance but he might have acquired Takeshi¡¯s earth favored element as well.


    Takeshi gives Kenta a bit of instruction as well when he makes a mistake, but for the most part he is handling himself quite well. Takeshi never does seem to relax though. I was thinking of calling Chika to sit with him while he trains, but I don¡¯t want her to get any ideas, and I guess I should be taking his training seriously.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it Takeshi?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Never mind Miss Inari, it is nothing¡­¡±


    This is really getting under his skin I have never seen him so flustered before, I wish I knew what was going on in that head of his right now.


    I continue to increase the difficulty of the monsters, and Kenta cleared the goal for first day and still had plenty of fight left in him, so I started pushing a few more harder monsters at him till he is completely worn out.The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°Not bad for your first day Kenta.¡±


    Kenta: ¡°Thank you Mistress.¡±


    ¡°Hey I know. You are probably sore after all that, so how about a nice bath?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari!¡±


    ¡°What, his training for the day is over, so he might as well get the most enjoyment out of it as he can as well.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Very well, but I will escort him.¡±


    ¡°Oh that would be great.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Alone.¡±


    ¡°You might not be required to follow my orders Takeshi, but I still have a bit to say about what goes on under my own roof.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°May I remind you that he will only be here for one month, and with the dangers of Shima he will be required to place his dungeon on the mainland.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s that got to do anything?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°That means after a month he will be gone, and it could be years or you may never even see him again.¡±


    ¡°Then we have a full month to make sure he has something good to remember me by.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I beg you Miss Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t understand why you are making such a big deal of this. This lets you off the hook. I thought you would be pleased.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I am concerned with your safety Miss Inari. I must protect you sometimes even from yourself.¡±


    ¡°Fine I will drop it for now¡­¡±


    I will just wait till Takeshi goes to bed, and then there will be no problem¡­ Or so I thought.


    After returning to the house Takeshi took Kenta to the bath out back, and of course I retreated to my screens¡­ Two of them together are quite the sight. Takeshi asks Kenta a lot of questions, but he is mindful of how he asks them well aware I am probably listening in.


    After their bath Takeshi prepares a sleeping quarter for Kenta in the male wing of the house. I was going to have him in one of the rooms here in the main house, but that might make it easier to have a nightly rendezvous. Akihito is often with Yuzuki, and only leaves Yuji and Satoshi in the male quarters, so it should be easier than having Takeshi right next door.


    Everyone else then gets the chance to meet Kenta then, and the others have a bit of a shocked expression right at first, but that only lasts a brief second before they seem to treat it like it should only be natural. Kenta seems to be enjoying himself as he gets to know everyone, and I am a little concerned about the gazes a few of the girls are throwing his way, especially Kaori¡­ It¡¯s always Kaori¡­


    Kenta: ¡°It was nice to meet you all, but training is sure to be intense tomorrow so I should really get a good night¡¯s rest.¡±


    The others wish him a good night then head to bed as well. I then decide to head to the bedroom to get ready, but shortly after the door opens to my room¡­But not the one I am used to, it¡¯s the one between Takeshi and my room.


    ¡°Takeshi¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°With another dungeon core in the house we cannot be too careful, so until his training is complete we should err on the side of caution and leave this door open, so I can better protect you.¡±


    ¡°Does he really bother that much? Aren¡¯t you not worried about your honor with the door open we are practically sleeping together.¡±


    Of course I don¡¯t believe that, but the complicated expression on Takeshi¡¯s face proves that it bothers him quite a bit.


    Takeshi: ¡°I am sorry if it causes you distress Miss Inari, but I will face the dishonor to keep you safe.¡±


    Wow he is really going all out. I guess I will let him have this win. There will after all be plenty of other chances.


    ¡°Alright Takeshi, I leave it to you. Good night.¡±


    He bows then returns to his room and begins preparing for bed, I can¡¯t help but smirk as I start to remove my kimono.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, what are you doing?¡±


    ¡°I am preparing for bed of course.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°But you are removing your clothing!¡±


    ¡°Of course, I always sleep without it. Is this not the kind of dishonor you said you were willing to face to keep me safe?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I¡­ I¡¯m sorry Miss Inari, please forgive me.¡± ¨CHe quickly turns his back trying his best to avoid looking in the direction of my room.-


    I cast [Clean] on my kimono then hang it up with my others. Takeshi really is doing his best to avoid looking my direction. I walk to the door separating our rooms wearing nothing but a smile as I say to him.


    ¡°Good night Takeshi, sweet dreams.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss¡­.Miss Inari¡­ Good night!¡± ¨CHe quickly tries to get in bed but stubs his toe.-


    I take a step forward and say. ¡°Are you alright!¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari please!¡±


    ¡°Alright Takeshi¡­ Good night.¡±


    I then turn returning to my room heading for bed, I look over my shoulder at one point and catch him staring from his bed, but he quickly rolls over facing the wall. I was thinking of using Kenta because Takeshi is so adamant to refuse me, but what Takeshi said was indeed true it would only be temporary.


    Maybe I have been going about this wrong. It might be a bit more work, but instead of going after Kenta, maybe I should use Kenta to get me Takeshi that way it isn¡¯t just temporary. I then decide to go to bed while trying to think of a plan.


    The next two weeks seem to take forever. Kenta does nothing all day but train, and my plan for Takeshi has seemed to stall. I thought I was really started to get somewhere, but it seems like I take one step forward and two steps back.


    Kenta: ¡°Mistress, the next group of monsters¡­?¡±


    ¡°What?... Oh¡­Wait it looks like that was it.¡±


    Kenta: ¡°That was it?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that was the last of the rift monsters.¡±


    Kenta: ¡°There is still at least 2 hours of training remaining for today.¡±


    ¡°We will just have to call it an early day, but if you can get done with them and we still have 4 or more hours left, we might start seeing about training on some of the Oni outside of the dungeon.¡±


    Kenta: ¡°Wouldn¡¯t it be a problem if the villagers of your dungeon saw me?¡±


    ¡°I actually made a plan for that. Tadaa!¡± ¨CI bring out a pair of ears and a tail.-


    Kenta: ¡°What is this¡­?¡±


    ¡°I have been working on these for the last few days. My [Elven Crafting] skill is actually good for something after all. I am sure you put these on, and then we could pass you off as Takeshi in town. That should at least let us get you outside to do a bit of training.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, if he is posing as me then how am I to protect you?¡±


    ¡°We will be ok a few hours out on our own.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I don¡¯t like it.¡±


    ¡°I understand it¡¯s not the perfect solution, but it¡¯s the best I could come up with.¡±


    Kenta: ¡°I understand Mistress, I will do my best.¡±


    That evening after everything done and we are going to bed I start to prepare for bed but Takeshi stops me.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, hold on a minute please.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, are you unhappy with me?¡±


    ¡°How did you come to that conclusion?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I understand your need to train Kenta, but you have seemed to be avoiding me, and now you plan to leave me behind and take Kenta out to fight Oni.¡±


    ¡°It is merely because of convenience, I need to train him and the rifts are no longer enough. If he looked like Akihito, I would have him pose as him instead.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°But he doesn¡¯t look like Akihito¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°From the very moment I saw Kenta born with the same appearance as me, I couldn¡¯t help but wonder if you had grown tired of me, wishing to replace me with someone more suitable to your needs.¡±


    ¡°That is not it at all. You were born a dungeon monster you know how dungeon core summoning works.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°It is no secret that you find my appearance to your liking, as well as quite a few others, so Kenta¡¯s appearance was shocking to me at first, but that I could at least understand. When his personality however was so different then my own, I thought I wasn¡¯t what you wanted at all.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re right, I haven¡¯t made a secret of the fact I want you as my own, and not just as my shield but, my monster and my lover. No matter how I tried however that honor of yours prevents you from allowing you to get close to me. So yes, I can say that no matter what we have gone through together you still keep me at arm¡¯s length so if I can¡¯t have you as you are, then of course I would want, a you, that I can.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I want you to be happy Miss Inari, so if Kenta is the one that would make you happy then I apologize if my actions have interfered with that¡­¡±


    ¡°You would do that? You would let me walk out of this room, down the hall, and into his arms?


    Takeshi has a pained expression on his face as he says. ¡°If that is what you wish Miss Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it that you want Takeshi?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I¡­¡±


    I was already starting to undress so dropping my kimono to the floor is as simple as pulling the sash so as it hits the floor I say. ¡°Then if you can¡¯t answer that I will be down the hall.¡±


    Takeshi turns his face away and doesn¡¯t say anything so I walk past him but before I make it to the door he grabs my arm.


    ¡°I am tired of waiting on you, unless you plan on doing something, let me go.¡±


    Takeshi stands there without moving for a few seconds as his grip starts to loosen I am about to pull my wrist free, but then he quickly pulls me back. Holding me in his arms he says. ¡°I¡¯m sorry Miss Inari, but I won¡¯t let you go.¡±


    I start to unbutton his shirt pulling at the hems of it.


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, what are you doing?!¡±


    ¡°I have waited long enough I am having sex tonight! Now the question is. Is it going to be here in this room with the man I want or the one that will not tell me no down the hall?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°How many times have I told you? Just call me Inari!¡±


    I then push him back onto my bed crawling over the top of him and kissing him.


    The next morning when I wake up I hurt¡­ Oh man do I hurt¡­ But laying there next to me is Takeshi, so it was all worth it¡­


    Takeshi: ¡°Mi¡­ Inari you¡¯re awake?¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t know underneath all that honor and indecisiveness was such a wild beast¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Forgive me Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°Shhh.¡± ¨CI say kissing him.-


    I want him again right now, but I think I would break¡­I crawl out of bed but my knees are quite shaky and I collapse to the floor. Takeshi quickly asks me if I am alright, but I lay my head back against the bed and laugh.


    ¡°Oh that was worth every second of the two year wait, but don¡¯t think I am going to let you get away making me wait that long again!¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari, are you sure you are ok?!¡±


    ¡°Takeshi¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I¡¯m sorry¡­Inari¡­¡±


    ¡°Better!¡± ¨CI then pull myself to my feet and start to get dressed.= ¡°I hope Kenta takes his training slow and doesn¡¯t have enough time to go out and fight Oni today¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°They wouldn¡¯t gather any xp for the dungeon, but the dungeon is doing alright now, so we could send him out with one of the groups.¡±


    I was trying to keep the girls away from Kenta, but now that it is no longer an issue that might work.


    ¡°That¡¯s not a bad idea, but I would still have to see them off just to make sure he doesn¡¯t do something that would ruin my lover¡¯s good name.¡±


    Takeshi blushes a bit, and he starts to get up and get dressed. He then starts to look around. ¡°I think I lost something.¡±


    ¡°Are you looking for this?¡± ¨CI say while holding his shirt then placing it behind my back.- ¡°Come get it!~¡±


    After informing the dungeon monsters today¡¯s plan of action it has a bit of mixed reaction with the girls.


    Rin: ¡°Is that really ok Mistress?¡±


    ¡°Of course it only makes since that now the rifts are no longer enough to train Kenta that he begins training against the Oni.¡±


    Hotaru: ¡°We understand that, but what we are saying that you are ok with us being alone with him?¡±


    ¡°I seriously doubt he will try to lay any of you during a fight against the Oni, but as I have little interest in him now, even if the chance did arise all I would say is have fun. Although a heads up would be appreciated as to make sure I am available to watch.¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°Inari¡­ Please don¡¯t tell me you plan to keep up such actions.¡±


    I don¡¯t know what they find more shocking the comments about Kenta or Takeshi¡¯s manor in which he addressed me. It seems it leads them to an understanding however as they start to whisper back and forth. Probably on discussing who will get to have Kenta, or if they are going to share. It matters little to me, so I take Takeshi and Kenta transferring to the training room to get started for the day.


    Kenta really seems to be putting an effort forth today. Maybe he found the prospect of some of the other girls to his liking as well, and he manages to complete with the rifts with plenty of time remaining to fight Oni.


    In the efforts to draw Takeshi¡¯s attention in the beginning of Kenta¡¯s training I switched his clothing out from the Gowen style like Takeshi to a more traditional Shima set. Leaving Kenta¡¯s muscular chest quite exposed to give Takeshi a hard time, so for passing him off as Takeshi we are forced to make him change back.


    After changing his clothes and attaching the ears and tail in a manner that is believable we found as it turned out the hardest part was hiding Kenta¡¯s human ears. We finally manage to accomplish it by changing his hairstyle, and I then do a side by side comparison of the two¡­


    I have to say I am starting to rethink my position of giving the girls permission to have Kenta. It might be quite fun to have both at once¡­ I however quickly shake the thought from my head because that would surely cause me to break¡­


    ¡°The hairstyle is rather off putting, but I think it will work. Alright Takeshi come here.¡±


    They both step forward.


    ¡°Not you¡­ The real one.¡± ¨CI grab Takeshi¡¯s shirt pulling him down to my level then give him a deep kiss.-


    Takeshi: ¡°Miss Inari!¡±


    ¡°Takeshi¡­¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°I am sorry Inari, but you surprised me, but you shouldn¡¯t do such things in the open.¡±


    ¡°We are in our own home, besides isn¡¯t this the way you should see off your lover that is going off to work?¡±


    Takeshi: ¡°But Kenta¡­¡±


    ¡°Kenta doesn¡¯t mind. Do you Kenta?¡±


    Kenta: ¡°No Mistress on the contrary I find the pleasant expression on your face most satisfying.¡±


    Takeshi is still a little hesitant and after pulling him into another kiss he at least kisses me back this time but I can¡¯t say it was quite as good as the ones we shared last night.


    ¡°Well we will continue to work on it¡­ Now Kenta are you ready?¡±


    Kenta: ¡°Yes Mistress.¡±


    We then head out from the house heading up stairs.


    Kenta: ¡°This is the Mistress¡¯s dungeon? It is quite different.¡±


    ¡°Quit gawking so much you are going to ruin Takeshi reputation, but as for the dungeon, this is just the village section, there are three different sections, the village, mine, and the actual dungeon. Most of the actual dungeon has tons of monsters just to increase my consumption, because it still remains undiscovered by the humans.¡±


    Kenta: ¡°So you don¡¯t get xp from adventurers entering your dungeon, but collect all of it from outside sources?¡±


    ¡°Well with the way of the Oni they make it very easy to gather xp, so I do get a little from the villagers living here, but yes most of my xp comes from the Oni.¡±


    Kenta: ¡°I know there are dungeons that breed monsters to supply themselves with xp in their dungeons, and dungeons that have towns and cities on the ground floor of their dungeon to gather xp, but to make a village inside of the dungeon is quite unique.¡±


    ¡°With the protection we receive from Inari space on the ground level was insufficient, but the small houses almost equal 1% of their total cost in xp for xp consumption every day, so if you have access to the xp, then houses really help a lot.¡±


    Kenta: ¡°I see¡­¡±


    I have three groups gathering now. Since Akane, Yuji, Satoshi, and Saki have become so strong I split them up leading each group, although I couldn¡¯t manage to convince Satoshi and Saki to spit so they co-lead a group together.


    Keeping Akane and Yuji apart most of the day has really seemed to improve their relationship, but how they manage to hold onto it I still don¡¯t understand. At the moment I have Akane leading Yuzuki and Akihiro, then Satoshi and Saki leading only Kaori, and the final group is Yuji leading Chika, Hotaru, and Rin.


    That is another thing about Yuji and Akane¡¯s relationship I thought strange. I figured Akane would be against Yuji leading the three un-involved girls, but she was actually the one to suggest this match up. Yuji¡¯s flirting with the girls even seems to give her some sort of twisted comfort¡­


    I promised the girls that they could play with Kenta, so I decided to let him train with Yuji¡¯s group. I messaged them earlier telling them wait for us so they have been on standby in the village for a few hours.


    The first one I find is Chika. She is talking with Tatsuo and really laying it on thick. She is giggling while blushing rocking her body back and forth, but unfortunately she has still managed to make no progress with Tatsuo.


    Chika: ¡°Really Tatsuo-sama I think you do an excellent job of taking care of the village.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°No¡­ I really wouldn¡¯t be able to do anything without the guidance of Saki-san and Yuzuki-san at the temple, or especially without your Mistress¡­ I don¡¯t know what we would do without Inari-sama¡­ Speaking of Inari-sama.¡±


    ¡°Afternoon, sorry to interrupt.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°There was no interruption. Chika-san was just giving me a security report on the village. She really is a dedicated young lady.¡±


    ¡°Yes her reports... That always seems to be the highlight of her day.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°I haven¡¯t seen you in a while. Chika-san was telling me you were quite busy. Did you decide to take the afternoon off and get some fresh air?¡±


    ¡°Actually as much as I hate to, I must borrow Chika. Her group was going to take Takeshi for a bit of training so he doesn¡¯t get rusty by being cooped up in the house all day.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°We couldn¡¯t have that now could we? Your servants really are quite remarkable, and I wouldn¡¯t even mind training with them a bit.¡±


    ¡°I am sure Chika would love to give you some personal instruction some time.¡±


    Tatsuo: ¡°No, I really wouldn¡¯t want to be a bother¡­¡±


    Chika: ¡°Nonsense Tatsuo-sama, I really would love to!¡±


    Tatsuo smiles and pats Chika on the head. ¡°I might just take you up on that sometime then, when we are both less busy. Now if you¡¯ll excuse me I need to check with one of the farmers¡­ Something about some of the rice.¡±


    After he leaves Chika is beaming. ¡°Thank you Mistress!¡±


    ¡°Well I don¡¯t think he caught the notion, but good luck¡­¡±


    We then track down the others and then I send them on their way.


    ¡°Don¡¯t do anything I wouldn¡¯t do!¡±


    The girls giggle and all says. ¡°Yes Mistress!~¡±


    We finish out the rest of Kenta¡¯s training much in the same fashion, I have him switch groups a few times to get a hand of deferent styles of fighting, but for the most part it remains the same.


    Either the girls are keeping it a secret from me, or I have been too busy with Takeshi to worry about it, but I haven¡¯t caught a single one putting Kenta to good use. It¡¯s kind of a shame really, but I guess it¡¯s their loss as after tomorrow he will be off on his own somewhere in his own dungeon.


    I can¡¯t fault Daddy because it was the first year of training dungeon cores like that, but Kenta has managed to pass me by quite a few levels, although with my skills I still have him beat in strength. On his final day we set up his training dungeon and I give him the last remaining bit of the xp for his training for him to acquire as many skills as possible while we make the final preparations for tomorrow¡¯s evaluation.

 Dungeon Monster #10 (Lilahs Side Story)

    #10 opens her eyes for the first time surrounded by a dozen other beastkin like her. There are dogs, cats, even a squirrel, and a fox. Most are female like #10 but two or three beastkin that are male, but they don¡¯t have fluffy tails.


    #10 is different than the rest though she is quite a bit shorter, and younger. The males appearance is that of 20 years of age, but all of the female go down from there with #10 being the youngest. #10¡¯s appearance is that at least 3 years younger than the second youngest though.


    There are piles of ragged clothing about and all the beastkin are quickly put them on. All of it seems too big for #10 though so she grabs what looks to be a pillow casing, or sack with holes in it and pulls it over her small body.


    #10 then sees her master. #10¡¯s Master is a beastkin like those summoned, but she wears elaborate clothes. Her beastkin subspecies is that of some type of a weasel, and she is tall and lanky.


    Being a dungeon monster #10 knows the general idea of what her master was thinking when she was summoned, so even though she appears younger than the rest she is proud that she was summoned with special characteristics.


    #10¡¯s Master issues an ultimate command instructing everyone including #10 to never speak of Master¡¯s dungeon and then has the only well-dressed beastkin in the room walk around putting collars around everyone¡¯s neck.


    #10 is then transferred to a stable like building with the rest of the beastkin summoned with #10. #10¡¯s Master then steps outside, and after a while the door opens and everyone is instructed to step outside.


    While all the newly summoned beastkin file out of the building many more beastkin and humans, with poor clothing and sullen faces all bound together with chains, file back in the stable like building. When #10 steps outside Master grabs #10 by the shoulder.


    #10¡¯s Master: ¡°This is the one, I am sure this meets your requirements?¡±


    A human man standing next to Master then looks over #10 and says. ¡°And you are sure even at her age she is able to perform the duties I asked for?¡±


    #10¡¯s Master: ¡°How long have we been making these trades? Have I ever disappointed you?¡±


    Man: ¡°No, you haven¡¯t. This beastkin is quite special however, so everything has to be perfect.¡±


    #10¡¯s Master: ¡°I assure you I spent extra time seeing to your specifications on this beastkin.¡±


    Man: ¡°Very well. Now you go sit in the front I can¡¯t have you getting damaged.¡± ¨CHe says to #10.-


    #10 looks to her Master for permission, but she knows this was the purpose for her being summoned so when her Master nods #10 does as she is told.


    The man then loads up the rest of the beastkin in the back of a wagon with solid walls, roof, and a wooden door. Once all the rest of the beastkin are inside he locks the door, and then mounts the wagon next to #10.


    After the wagon sets out #10 decides to ask. ¡°Are you #10¡¯s new Master?¡±


    Man: ¡°For the moment. You better be all that I was promised.¡±


    ¡°#10 knows she was to be given to a new Master, but what does her new Master wish her to do?¡±


    Man: ¡°I have a buyer all lined up for you, a noble is paying a high price for a slave girl for their daughter. You are going to serve that purpose, so you better behave yourself and do exactly as you are told.¡±


    ¡°#10 understands, and she won¡¯t let Master down!¡±


    Man: ¡°Good, now first of all no speaking unless spoken to.¡±


    ¡°Yes Master!¡±


    #10¡¯s new master looks pleased, so #10 is pleased. She waits for her new masters orders, but he doesn¡¯t give any more. Even after several days of travel #10¡¯s new master hasn¡¯t spoken another word to her going about his business as they travel along on the wagon.


    #10¡¯s new master is human, but he must know everyone came from the dungeon because he hasn¡¯t fed us since he took us from our original master¡¯s dungeon. In fact he hasn¡¯t even opened the door on the wagon since then.


    Once we reach a human village #10¡¯s new master speaks with a man opening the wagon for the first time pulling all of the beastkin from the wagon. He tells #10 to not move while he shows the others off to a couple more men.


    From their exchange #10 learns that everyone refers to her new master as Beastkin Edward. #10¡¯s new master sells a few of the others there in that village before moving on. This goes on for a week until only 3 beastkin remain other than #10.


    When riding in to this village #10s New Master does something he hasn¡¯t done before. When stopping in a village overnight #10¡¯s New Master would stay in an inn while leaving #10 with the wagon and other beastkin in the stable. This time however in the morning before they leave #10¡¯s New Master brings her into the room.


    #10¡¯s New Master hands her a bucket full of water and says. ¡°Clean yourself up really well, we are going to meet your buyer today.¡±


    #10 quickly does as she is told. While #10 cleans herself up her New Master pulls out a large colorful dress full of frills and lace.


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°This dress is worth more than you are, but this sell has to go perfect, so whatever they tell you to do, you do it without question. Do you understand?¡±


    ¡°Yes Master!¡±


    #10¡¯s Master has to help #10 put on the dress because it is so complicated, but after she is dressed 10#¡¯s New Master makes sure everything from the tip of her long ears to the tip of her toes is perfect.


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°Perfect.¡±


    #10¡¯s New Master then leads her from the inn, and through town until they reach a large house easily two or three times the size of the inn they were at before. #10¡¯s New Master seems to be rather nervous.


    After be escorted into the house by a well-dressed beastkin in a collar much like the one around #10¡¯s neck, they are led to a room and told to wait. #10¡¯s New Master has grown even more nervous as he pick¡¯s over #10¡¯s appearance several more times making sure her hair and dress are perfect.


    #10¡¯s New Master makes her stand up straight then does so himself when another human man enters the room along with a human girl that looks to be a few years older than the appearance of #10, but she is dressed in the same fashion.


    Man: ¡°Mister Edward, I see you have the merchandise I requested?¡±


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°Yes sir! Her specifications are exactly as you requested.¡±


    The man looks to the girl beside him and says. ¡°What do you think?¡±


    Girl: ¡°Daddy! I said I wanted one the same age as me, not a little girl!¡±


    Man: ¡°She is your first one, I think she should be a bit younger, so that she can serve you for a long time.¡±


    Girl: ¡°Fine, but the next one you get me better be older!¡± ¨CShe then moves up to #10 looking her over. She then grabs #10 by the ears and pulls.- ¡°Come on you got work to do.¡±


    #10 looks to her New Master, but he nods and then seems quite excited as he talks to the man. #10 tries to keep up with the girl, but the girl¡¯s firm grasp on #10 ears is quite painful and makes it hard for her to walk normally.


    When the girl finally lets go of #10¡¯s ears they are standing in a elaborate bedroom that has everything a young girl could possibly ask for, but the room itself is quite a mess.


    Girl: ¡°Clean my room.¡±


    #10 nods and does as she is told. The room is in pretty bad shape and there is just so much stuff it takes quite a while. No matter how fast #10 works however the girl doesn¡¯t seem pleased with her progress.


    Girl: ¡°Is that the best you can do? You truly are worthless.¡±


    ¡°#10 is sorry Mistress, but #10 was told to take good care of her dress, but working in it is quite hard.¡±


    Girl: ¡°You are complaining? That dress is probably worth more than you, so the last thing I want to hear from you is complaints.¡±


    ¡°Yes Mistress¡­¡± -#10 then picks up the pace, but the dress is really awkward causing her problems.-


    #10 does her best, but it takes her a full hour to get the room completely clean, and her Mistress doesn¡¯t look happy about it.


    Girl: ¡°You truly are worthless!¡± ¨CShe starts to say something else but there is a knock at the door.- ¡°Well don¡¯t just stand there answer the door!¡±


    #10 quickly runs to the door answering it. There is a young woman at the door carrying several books with her, and she is quite surprised to see the shape of the room and #10.


    Young woman: ¡°Young Miss, are you ready for your studies?¡±


    Girl: ¡°No thanks to this stupid slave! It took her forever to clean up.¡±


    The young woman scratches #10 behind the ears, and then she moves over to the table in the middle of the room setting down her books. ¡°Well it looks like we can use the table here for a change, so shall we get started?¡±


    #10¡¯s Mistress doesn¡¯t look to happy but she sits down at the table. The young woman talks for quite a while but #10¡¯s Mistress doesn¡¯t seem to be paying much attention. Nobody told #10 what to do so she is just standing near by the entire time waiting.


    The young woman is helping #10¡¯s Mistress as she reads a book, but #10¡¯s Mistress seems to be having quite a bit of difficulty with it. From where #10 is standing she can see the words on the pages and it doesn¡¯t look like the words are that hard to her.


    The young woman notices #10¡¯s eyes darting across the page while her Mistress struggles on a word. The young woman then picks up the book and closes it.


    Young woman: ¡°That¡¯s good enough for today. I will leave the book here so you can practice between lessons.¡± ¨CShe then winks at #10 and hands her the book.- ¡°You can hold that for the young miss till she needs it.-


    The young woman then finishes her lesson with #10¡¯s Mistress and then leaves. After the young woman leaves #10¡¯s Mistress scoffs a flops down on her bed. After a while of still laying on the bed she rolls over looking at #10.


    Girl: ¡°What are you doing?¡±


    ¡°#10 wasn¡¯t given any instructions, so she was waiting on her Mistress¡¯s orders.¡±


    Girl: ¡°Why do you talk like that?¡±


    ¡°#10 doesn¡¯t understand.¡±


    Girl: ¡°That¡¯s exactly what I mean! Whatever, just get rid of the book and go to your room, I have no further use for you now.¡±


    ¡°Yes Mistress¡­¡± -#10 starts to turn but she stops.-


    Girl: ¡°Is there something else?¡±


    ¡°#10 doesn¡¯t know where her room is¡­¡±Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    Girl: ¡°You¡¯re useless!¡± ¨CShe says rolling out of bed, grabbing #10 by the ears, and drags her through the hallways. Once reaching a large door she opens it, shoves #10 through it and closes the door.-


    #10 is in a room with no light, and after feeling around it is also quite small. She can¡¯t make out her surroundings very well so she just finds a corner and sits in it holding the book to her chest until she goes to sleep.


    Even after #10 wakes up, it is still very dark¡­ She waits in the room for a long time before the door suddenly swings open.


    Girl: ¡°There you are! Where have you been?!¡±


    ¡°#10 has been in her room like the Mistress ordered.¡±


    Girl: ¡°It is mid-morning already! You are supposed to get up early and take care of my needs before I even get out of bed!¡±


    ¡°But Mistress didn¡¯t tell me what I needed to do.¡±


    Girl: ¡°Do I have to have to spell it out for you?! B-R¡­-K¡­ Food, you are supposed to get me my breakfast!¡±


    ¡°Yes Mistress.¡± -#10 jumps up and starts to walk into the hallway and stops.-


    Girl: ¡°Now what?¡±


    ¡°#10 doesn¡¯t know where to get Mistress¡¯s food at¡­¡±


    The girl gets angry grabbing #10 pulling her though the hallways till they find the man that is #10¡¯s Mistress¡¯s father.


    Girl: ¡°Daddy this isn¡¯t going to work!¡± ¨CShe says roughly throwing #10 to the ground by her ears.-


    Man: ¡°What is the matter?¡±


    Girl: ¡°She is useless, she isn¡¯t preforming her duties, and she even stole from me! Look that book in her arms she took that from my room!¡±


    #10 starts to get up off the floor brushing herself off, and says. ¡°But Mistress said¡­¡± But she is quickly backhanded by the girl knocking #10 back to the ground.


    Girl: ¡°And there she goes trying to lie again! I am told you she was a mistake!¡±


    Man: ¡°Fine, Beastkin Edward said they are guaranteed for 2 years, so if she isn¡¯t what we were promised I will make him replace her.¡±


    Girl: ¡°Good! And I want an older one!¡±


    The man then sends for #10¡¯s second master while the girl grabs #10 by the ears dragging her though the hallways. The girl tosses #10 into the same small room as before, but slams the door hard enough that it doesn¡¯t latch and it jars back open a bit letting a bit of light in.


    #10 doesn¡¯t understand what she did wrong¡­ She did everything she was asked¡­ She rubs her sore cheek from where her Mistress hit her and then looks at the book in her other hand. Her mistress put her here so she doesn¡¯t dare leave the room, so she sits in a way that the light shines over the book and opens it reading its pages.


    The story starts out nice with a monster from a dungeon taking a princess to his lair, but it gets dark quick when a prince shows up and starts killing all the dungeon monsters, takes the princess away from the monster, and even slays the monster. #10 then realizes it is supposed to be a happy story with the humans as the good guys and monsters are the ones are supposed to be the bad guys¡­


    #10 doesn¡¯t like the book and tosses it to the floor at her feet while hugging her knees. If humans say the dungeon monsters are the bad guys, does that make #10 a bad guy as well? Most humans don¡¯t know she is a dungeon monster though, so why are they still treating her so badly? If #10 could go back to her original master¡¯s dungeon she would show them.


    After a while of sitting in the room the door opens again and there stands #10¡¯s old master, Beastkin Edward, and he has an angry look on his face. He never treated #10 badly before, but now he grabs #10 by the ears like her Mistress did dragging her down the hallways and out of the building.


    Once #10 and Beastkin Edward are clear of the building he says. ¡°You were supposed to do exactly what they said! It was a simple task, one any slave would dream of having and you pissed it away!¡±


    ¡°#10 doesn¡¯t understand¡­ She did what her Mistress asked, but her Mistress wanted her to do things she didn¡¯t tell her how to do.¡±


    Beastkin Edward then backhands #10 across her other cheek. ¡°I told you to not speak unless spoken too! They even said you tried to steal from them! This isn¡¯t what I was promised! You costed me double what the normal beastkin cost, I had to fix your screw up by refunding the dukes money back to him, and even have to give him one of the others for free! I already had a buyer lined up for them!¡±


    #10 wants to apologize, but she is afraid to speak.


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°I at least managed to patch things up with the duke, so that at least seemed to work itself out, but now I am out nearly 500 gold because of you!¡± ¨CHe then kicks #10 telling her to head back toward the inn.-


    Things don¡¯t improve for #10 after that. Once back at the inn he takes the dress away from her, and then instead of putting her on or in the wagon he ties a rope around her wrists and to the wagon before making her walk behind the wagon.


    #10 can only keep up with the wagon for so long till she can no longer keep up and after falling over only then will Beastkin Edward throw #10 in the wagon for a few hours. He also takes pleasure in telling #10 what is going to happen to her at the brothel he plans to sell her at to make up at least some of the money he has lost on her.


    Things continue like that for #10 for the next week, spending more and more time being tied to the back of the wagon. If it wasn¡¯t for #10 still being bound to her Original Mistress¡¯s dungeon she would of never made it.


    They finally reach a small village in a forest and #10 is dragged out of the wagon again, along with the other two beastkin. In front of them is a woman in her mid-20s, with an attractive face but a devious crooked smile.


    The woman squeezes, prods, and manhandles the other two while inspection them closely, but when she gets to #10 she just says. ¡°What the hell is this? This is not the rabbit beastkin you told me about in your letter.¡±


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°I greatly apologize, you are right, I had another rabbit, but this one was a special order that fell through and I had to replace it with the other beastkin.¡±


    Woman: ¡°I will pay what we agreed on for the other two, but I have no use for a worthless slave like that.¡±


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°I am sure there are a few of your clients that wouldn¡¯t mind them a bit young, besides even if not you could have to clean and take care of other chores until she is old enough. I will even sell her to you at half price.¡±


    Woman: ¡°I was a slave to once remember. I want my girls at least old enough to know what they are getting themselves into, so no deal.¡±


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°I spent a great deal to come all the way out here in the sticks to deliver these to you.¡±


    Woman: ¡°And if you would have had the three you promised I would have bought them all, but it also quite a lot to get that goody two-shoes princess and escaped slave boyfriend of hers to let me do business with you.¡±


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°Escaped slave?¡±


    Woman: ¡°Yes the princess has a stray she seems to have taken a liking to. They call him Two-Twelve, and he was the one that made our transaction possible. Of course I had to use his gullibility to my advantage. He comes from one of those that really shelter their slaves. ¡±


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°I might have to speak with this ¡°Two-Twelve¡±.¡±


    Woman: ¡°If it turns into a profit for you just remember where you got the information, and I guess that means we have a deal on the cat and the fox?¡±


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°Indeed.¡± ¨CThe woman pays him and he gives her keys to the beastkin¡¯s collars. He then throws #10 back into the wagon locking the door.-


    After a while the wagon begins moving again, but it isn¡¯t but a few minutes before it stops. When the door opens Beastkin Edward looks angry, and he grabs #10 roughly by the arm pulling her from the wagon.


    Beastkin Edward mutters more to himself then anything as he says. ¡°45 gold¡­ out of the 500 gold you cost me.¡±


    Beastkin Edward then plasters a fake smile on his face as he pushes #10 into the building. He walks forward placing a key to #10¡¯s collar in a confused man¡¯s hand.


    Beastkin Edward: ¡°Yes, she is a little young I tried to tell Denova in 2 maybe 3 years she would be ready, but I couldn¡¯t convince her, and remember all sells are final¡­ Thanks for your business.¡±


    Beastkin Edward then leaves #10 with the confused man. The confused man looks around the room as several other humans are talking about Beastkin Edward and #10¡¯s Newest Master. He then says. ¡°Can you talk?¡±


    #10 is scared after everything Beastkin Edward told her, but she knows she has to at least speak when spoken to so she manages to say. ¡°Yes Master¡­¡±


    Newest Master: ¡°Well come on then, I need to figure out how to explain this¡­¡±


    He then starts to walk out of the building then stops to look back at #10, so she quickly hurries after him. #10¡¯s Newest Master looks deep in thought as he walks in long strides through town. He often looks back at #10 so she quickly speeds up to catch up with him.


    When they reach the edge of town #10¡¯s Newest Master scares her when he quickly stops and picks her up. She quickly closes her eyes tight as he starts to tickle the bottom of her feet. She lets out a small giggle but quickly covers her mouth with her hands.


    Newest Master: ¡°Well we got a bit to go, it looks like your feet will hold up alright, so let¡¯s go.¡±


    #10¡¯s Newest master then places her back on the ground as he starts walking up a trail into the forest and up the mountain. The trail is quite tough but after what #10¡¯s been through the last week this is nothing.


    Newest Master: ¡°Are you having any trouble?¡±


    ¡°No Master¡­¡±


    Newest Master: ¡°Alright, just a little further to go.¡±


    Once #10¡¯s Newest Master starts walking up to a cave, #10 feels the connection to her Original Mistress¡¯s dungeon break and she is bonded to another dungeon. #10¡¯s Newest Master then looks down at her with a confused expression and says. ¡°You¡¯re a dungeon monster?¡±


    #10 remembers the book and what humans do to dungeon monsters, so she begins to panic as tears fill her eyes. #10¡¯s Newest Master then looks down at #10 with a smile and says. ¡°How about Lilah? Yes, how does that sound? Your name is now Lilah.¡±


    ¡°Thank you master.¡± ¨CShe says but she is still quite worried about what exactly is going on.-


    It doesn¡¯t help calming #10 down when a creep smile appears on her newest master¡¯s face. Then without warning #10 is transferred to a dungeon core room.


    ¡°Master is a dungeon core?¡±


    Newest Master: ¡°That¡¯s right, and this dungeon is your new home.¡±


    #10 starts to think she can relax but then her newest master quickly picks her up and puts her on the bed. He casts [Clean] on #10 and then lifts the pillow case she was using as clothing off of her. Maybe what Beastkin Edward said about men applies to dungeon cores as well, so she tenses back up fighting back the tears with her eyes close waiting...


    A few seconds later however Lilah¡¯s has a dress is equipped onto her. It is nothing fancy but it¡¯s a simple one piece solid blue dress. After having to walk on egg shells because of the other dress she wore however Lilah thinks this dress is best.


    Newest Master: ¡°That¡¯s better isn¡¯t it?¡±


    Grateful that her newest master didn¡¯t do anything bad to her, and the fact she is back safe among a dungeon she can¡¯t help feel a bit of relief wash over her so she quickly says ¡°It¡¯s pretty, Master.¡± Then she jumps to her feet twirling in place.


    Newest Master: ¡°Ok, let¡¯s go meet your roommate.¡±


    ¡°Roommate, Master?¡±


    Newest Master: ¡°Yes right now we are pretty short of xp, so until we get more you will have to share a bedroom with Thirty-seven.¡±


    After everything Lilah has been though sharing a bedroom seems like the least of her problems, but she still wonders. ¡°Thirty-seven? Did Master not give Thirty-seven a pretty name like Lilah?¡±


    Newest Master: ¡°I actually tried once, but she turned me down. Anyway we are going now.¡±


    Lilah¡¯s newest master then transfers them to another room, it looks to be some sort of makeshift bedroom and sitting on a small cot holding an upside down stuffed animal is a woman with a blank stare. Once she notices Lilah however she quickly jumps to her feet, pets the stuffed animal, drops it on the cot, and extends her arms towards Lilah.


    Lilah looks up at her newest master confused. He just shrugs his shoulders and the woman darts across the room quickly grabbing Lilah dragging her back to the cot holding her tightly as she pets her like she was petting the stuffed animal.


    Newest Master: ¡°I guess you like your new roommate?¡±


    Thirty-seven then squeezes Lilah in a big hug, and Lilah is wondering what Thirty-seven¡¯s intentions are as she looks to her newest master for answers.


    Newest Master: ¡°Now be careful with her Thirty-seven she is a dungeon monster so don¡¯t go breaking her.¡±


    Breaking Lilah¡­ What is Thirty-seven going to do to her. ¡°m.m¡­mmMaster?¡±


    When Lilah speaks it only causes Thirty-seven to squeal and squeeze Lilah tighter.


    Newest Master: ¡°I have some serious hard work to do now, so Thirty-seven, be gentle with her ok?¡±


    The woman then nods easing up on Lilah but she starts petting her head again. Lilah waits for several hours but the woman doesn¡¯t say a word or move other than to pet Lilah¡¯s head. Every time Lilah asks Thirty-seven a question she just squeals and hugs her again, so Lilah gives up. Even when Thirty-seven goes to bed she doesn¡¯t turn Lilah loose.


    By morning the situation improves a little because Thirty-seven lets go of Lilah so she can sit in a chair, but even though Lilah has never eaten before Thirty-seven feeds her. She tries to tell Thirty-seven it isn¡¯t necessary but that just causes Thirty-seven to squeal and hug her again.


    The food is actually quite tasty and Lilah does enjoy it. Even better news comes when Lilah¡¯s newest master arrives soon later.


    ¡°It¡¯s time for me to head down to Tobes. Now I got Lilah to help me out with my work, so she is going to go with me.¡±


    Lilah¡¯s newest master¡¯s statement seems to really bother Thirty-seven.


    Newest Master: ¡°Now when I return I will bring her back, but once you start to be able to interact with humans, you can join us in Tobes and won¡¯t have to leave her side¡­¡±


    Thirty-seven then looks like she doesn¡¯t know what to do as she eventually gives Lilah a big hug then slowly lets her go. Lilah¡¯s newest master then transfers Lilah and himself outside of the dungeon. Thirty-seven¡¯s actions are rather strange so Lilah decides to ask her newest master.


    ¡°Is Thirty-seven alright in the head?¡±


    Lilah¡¯s newest master then laughs and says. ¡°Yes, she is alright in the head. She had a real difficult time, but she is starting to come around. Truth be told I am not bringing you along with me to help. I just thought if I told Thirty-seven you were going to go with me when I went down to Tobes it would make her try a little harder.¡±


    Lilah isn¡¯t sure what she is supposed to be doing so she asks her newest master. ¡°If master doesn¡¯t want Lilah to help with his work, what does master want Lilah to do then?¡±


    Newest Master: ¡°Just keep me company I guess, and don¡¯t forget to keep the fact I am a dungeon core a secret.¡±


    Lilah is confused now, but she does know the trouble that would befall her newest master if they found out about him so she says. ¡°Of course Master.¡±


    Lilah sticks with her newest master all day. Maybe dungeon cores are just far better than humans because her master never makes her do anything. She learns quite a bit about her newest master as well.


    Lilah¡¯s newest master has a boss monster that is a princess of the human kingdom his dungeon is in, she seems to be away gathering xp for his dungeon at the moment. Lilah¡¯s newest master doesn¡¯t treat her like the humans did, or even the way her original master did. At one point he even tells Lilah to take it easy and to have fun.


    Over the course of the next few days Lilah¡¯s day seems to go much in the same way. She spends her morning and evening in Thirty-seven¡¯s arms getting hugged and petted, and her days with her newest master in the human village.


    Lilah has decided that her newest master is her favorite master and is glad she found her newest master. Thirty-seven still hugs and squeezes Lilah, but Lilah has been able to have a few conversations with her now, if that is what you can call them.


    Lilah really starts to grow comfortable with her newest master and Thirty-seven, but she is still worried about her newest master¡¯s boss monster. Master said she is pretty scary, but is still a good person. When she arrives however Lilah is confused.


    She immediately starts to cry wrapping her arms around Lilah¡¯s Master and Lilah makes the mistake of repeating Master¡¯s words about her being scary. After she calms down she scratches Lilah under the chin and pets her like Thirty-seven does as she says. ¡°This little one must be the one you told me about, and what do you mean scary?¡±


    She then puffs her cheeks and looks at Lilah in a weird way so she can only say. ¡°Master?¡± Master¡¯s boss monster then looks to him questioning him as well, but he manages to deflect the question by talking about Thirty-seven.


    She doesn¡¯t seem convinced and doesn¡¯t let go of Master¡¯s hand as everyone travels through town to meet with Thirty-seven. Lilah hopes she didn¡¯t get Master in too much trouble¡­ Once they make it back to the dungeon Lilah decides that Lilah¡¯s newest master will be her only master from now on!

 Dawn and Twilight

    I was born along with my sister, and my sister was born along with me. We have been together this entire time and our training has been quite hard. Papa has been very busy due to him marrying his boss monster in the manner that humans do.


    I don¡¯t quite understand why he would go through such a thing, but I can understand the connection to someone in which you never want to be without them. That leaves the question of what are we going to do when training is over and we have to go our separate ways?


    After Papa got married my sister and I were taken by the elders to train elsewhere along with Var. Var reminds me a lot of Papa, so we get along alright. The elders took us to Elder Madam Erin¡¯s dungeon to finish out our last week of training.


    Madam Erin then presented us each with a training crystal and told us to form our dungeons for the last week of our training. All three of our dungeons are side by side so it is still no trouble visiting each other. Once our week is up the elders pull us to a large room.


    Madam Erin: ¡°I have to say I am quite impressed with the progress you all made this month. I believe training the new dungeon cores in this manner will greatly improve the survivability of future cores.¡±


    Dyson: ¡°I believe the continued survival of dungeons cores lies in dungeon cores like you three, so I expect to see great things from you all.¡±


    Elder Madam Erin then rolls out a parchment onto a table and it covers the entire table. Forests, mountains, flowing rivers, and even clouds seem to float over the large map on the table.


    Madam Erin: ¡°Whenever you three are ready you may choose the location for your dungeons.¡±


    Var, my sister, and I have talked about where we are going to place our dungeons, so it isn¡¯t a surprise when Var steps forward placing his dungeon not even a week away from Madam Erin¡¯s dungeon. Papa¡¯s dungeon is about the same distance away in the opposite direction, so maybe the dungeon cores that Madam Erin train, like to remain close to her.


    After all Papa chose a human to take as a wife, but even though my sister and I are birds, our builds are quite similar to Madam Erin¡¯s so maybe there is more to their relationship then they let on.


    My sister and I had a plan, after a revelation we discovered a few days ago, so when we step up to the map we both point to a single location at a mountain right at the meeting point between the human kingdoms of Clement, Livinston, and Adra.


    Madam Erin: ¡°Both of you?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Of course.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We are sisters after all.¡±


    Madam Erin: ¡°If you are sure¡­¡±


    Both: ¡°Indeed.¡±


    My sister and I are then pulled a great distance and arrive in an open area of the forest along a steep raised mountain. My sister and I both read the [Menu] in front of us and then look to each other and nod.


    Dawn: ¡°No going back now. Shall we get to work?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°There is a human village just west of here, so we better get started before someone stumbles across us without our dungeon to protect us.¡±


    My sister and I then get to work. The amount of xp we have is quite limited when we first start out but we have a plan in place for just that.


    Warning placing object [Iron Door] here will result in another access point to dungeon.


    I guess because going through sister¡¯s dungeon they would be able to enter mine from here as well, I was worried it wouldn¡¯t let us connect them though so I quickly accept and continue working. We are pretty confident in our plan but, just to be on the safe side we reserve a small amount of xp for consumption.


    We each placed a few rifts, but the majority of our monsters however are not from rifts. We then spend a long process of giving them names.


    Dawn: ¡°After naming all of these small fries, it¡¯s going to be a bit sad when the humans start taking them out.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Well they can¡¯t leave our dungeons unless they are named, so there isn¡¯t much we can do about it.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Alright all of you guys, I want you to enter Twilight¡¯s dungeon and defend it with your lives as if it is my dungeon.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°The same to all of you, I want you to enter Dawn¡¯s dungeon and defend it.¡±


    None of the monsters so far are sentient, so they have no objections as they start filling the rooms.


    Intruders have entered your dungeon.


    Dawn: ¡°So far so good.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°It¡¯s going to be a bit difficult when it comes to rifts, and once we start going a bit more, but for now this ought to work quite nicely.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°The minimum xp we can get for an intruder is 1 xp, so they should pay for themselves for the really weak ones quite quickly, but the others will take up to 100 days before they make up their cost.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°It should only take 50 days if you set the locks on the doors like I suggested.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Are you sure they will work? Locks on every door seem a bit excessive.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Their cost is negligible, and as long as the key is accessible then it won¡¯t cause trouble for the crystal.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I honestly just hung every key on the door.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Well they aren¡¯t meant to keep things out, so it should work. Once humans start entering the dungeons though, we should start coming up with clever ways to hide the keys.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Well I think this is the best we can do for now, you think we could visit the village tomorrow?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I don¡¯t know, the humans never said anything when we were with Papa or the elders, but they were quite nervous around us. Without them I don¡¯t know how humans will react to our appearances.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°As long as we take it slow and steady we should be alright.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°And make sure we don¡¯t lead any humans back here until we are good and ready for them.¡±


    How wrong we were¡­ After we arrived in the village we were quickly chased out. Even when we tried to show our adventurer IDs the villagers kept calling us monsters and wouldn¡¯t even listen to us. We decided to retreat back to our dungeons.


    We took several detours to make sure we weren¡¯t followed, and even thought it only took 20 minutes to reach the village it took us several hours to return, to make sure we were alone.


    The xp we got from each other¡¯s monsters was enough that we won¡¯t ever have to worry about our consumption, but it is still going to take quite a while before our dungeons are off the ground enough that we are ready for adventurers.


    Over the course of the next month we try several more attempts to talk to the villagers, but they won¡¯t have any of it. They have begun sending adventurers out looking for us, but luckily we are leading them in the opposite direction of our dungeons, so they are searching for us in the wrong areas.


    The xp we have been gathering from each other hasn¡¯t really been as helpful as we were hoping, because as soon as we start to build some back up we will summon more monsters. Eventually we will get in a way that the amount of xp we receive will be much more than we are putting out, but that may take a while.


    We have also decided to put adding any more monsters on hold for now, because the rooms have become quite full of monsters, so we need to save some xp up to increase our dungeon¡¯s size next.


    When we received a message from Mama saying Papa has disappeared we were quite worried about him, but we are barely able to take care of ourselves, so we don¡¯t even know how to respond to Mama, so we don¡¯t reply to her.


    Dawn: ¡°Shouldn¡¯t we do something though?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We can¡¯t even enter a village, how can we do anything to help Papa, when he could be anywhere?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°But we can fly! We could just stay high enough the humans couldn¡¯t bother us.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Then how would we be any help to Papa? Papa is a dungeon core, and he knows the risks. I am sure he wouldn¡¯t fault us for taking care of our own dungeons at a time like this.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°But I want to do something¡­¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Then get stronger! The only way we can be of help is get stronger. The Elder¡¯s seem to care for Papa as well, so I am sure they will do everything they can to help Mama.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I guess you are right. I just hope he is ok.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Me too.¡±


    There isn¡¯t anything we can do for Papa, so we decide that day to double down our efforts. Papa wanted us to succeed, so we need to get stronger, because if something can happen to a dungeon core like Papa, we wouldn¡¯t stand a chance.


    In the time between Papa¡¯s disappearance and the time he showed back up, my sister and I have been hard at working increasing our dungeons. We have started to intermingle our dungeons connecting them in strange ways.


    It makes moving monster with rifts quite hard, but most of our monsters are still non-rift monsters so it hasn¡¯t been a problem. We only use the rift monsters to level up each other¡¯s monsters. The weak monsters we have been flooding our dungeon with however reach max level before it is really of any benefit to us.


    Dawn: ¡°Don¡¯t you think we should summon our boss monsters now? If we leveled them up instead of the small fries we might gain more xp from one another.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We only gain a very limited amount of boss monsters. I want to put it off as long as possible to make sure they are good monsters.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°But we have 2 available already, couldn¡¯t we at least summon 1?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°You can if you want, but I want my boss monsters to at least be sentient, so I will wait.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°That¡¯s not fair! If I summon one, but you don¡¯t then you will get more benefit from it then I will!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Then just wait like I am then.¡±This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    Dawn: ¡°Fine, but as soon as we unlock monsters that are capable of being sentient I am summoning a boss monster!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°As long as it isn¡¯t something weird. I don¡¯t want your boss monster in my dungeon, even if it is sentient, if it is some kind of ugly fire lizard.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Then if you get some kind of ugly frog, I don¡¯t want it in my dungeon either!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Fine!¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Fine!¡±


    It¡¯s been a few months since Papa returned home, but we still haven¡¯t heard from him. Mama sent a message telling us that he lost his memories though, so we still don¡¯t know what to say. Madam Erin has checked on us a few times, but there hasn¡¯t been much to tell.


    Other than going out and flying over the forest to stretch our wings we haven¡¯t even left our dungeons in months. If I didn¡¯t have my sister to talk to I would have gone crazy already. How do all the older dungeons do it?


    I hear Elder Fredrick, and Elder Draco have never even seen humans without looking through a screen. I wonder what they do to keep their minds occupied¡­


    Dawn: ¡°You think we are ready for the adventurer¡¯s to discover our dungeons yet?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I think we have enough monsters to keep us safe for now, but they aren¡¯t rift monsters, so when they die we will be in a bad way. I think if we keep going like we are we should be ready in another year.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°A year?!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°What¡¯s the big deal?


    Dawn: ¡°Staying in the dungeon day in and day out is not boring to you?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We go out all the time.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°All the time?! Once a week is not all the time!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°You¡¯re so impatient¡­¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Then what do you do all the time when we are not talking?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I sleep.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°20 hours a day?!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We are dungeon cores.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I can¡¯t sleep that long¡­¡±


    Twilight: ¡°What you want to be like Papa?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Of course!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I think Papa creates way to much work for himself messing with human affairs¡­¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Then you want to sleep 20 hours a day?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We are dungeon cores, 100 or 200, or 1000 years from now we will still be going strong unless we are killed, so even at 4 hours a day that is far more than any human lives.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°What about finding a man to make you happy like Papa found in Mama?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I have got you, so until we get our boss monsters that will be sufficient.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°What about companionship? You don¡¯t want a man?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°The only one of our kind, is that whore that is in Papa¡¯s town. Do you really want that?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I am not saying him, but we can¡¯t have children anyway, so a human, or beastkin wouldn¡¯t be so bad would it?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°That is disgusting¡­¡±


    Dawn: ¡°You don¡¯t find humans or beastkin the least bit attractive?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Do you find a sparrow attractive?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Of course not!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We are just as closely related to a bird as we are a human, so what¡¯s the difference?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Well a human is sentient, and well, human.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°What about all that skin¡­  That is just¡­ -Twilight shudders at the thought.-


    Dawn: ¡°Then if there are never any more of our kind, do you mean you are not interested in companionship at all?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I don¡¯t know, I never thought about it. Maybe I will make due with a hippogriff. No, a griffon, he could pin me down with those large talons and then¡­¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Eww! Don¡¯t say any more, and you said a human was bad! How could you even think of doing that with a monster?!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°What do you think we are?


    Dawn: ¡°We are still beastkin, so that makes far more sense than some non-sentient monster!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Are you saying if a good looking phoenix male screeched at you, that you wouldn¡¯t shake your tail feathers at him?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ I mean phoenixes can be sentient, but still. It just doesn¡¯t seem right somehow.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Well I feel the same way as a human or beastkin, so that makes us even.¡±


    Dawn then remains silent only to shudder a bit. Dawn decides on that day she must at least learn to summon more of their kind, if for no other reason that she never has to think of her sister sleeping with some monster, ever again.


    My sister and I continue to work on our dungeons for the next few months, and have managed to start filling some of the rooms with more rifts. If it wasn¡¯t then cost of adding another floor being so high we would have made much more progress, but there is only so much of the mountain available between our two dungeons for us to grow into.


    By the time that marks 1 year since our birth we have still both managed to make it with 5 floors apiece however. Starting on the 4<sup>th</sup> floor we have added a few balconies and windows to the exterior rooms, just to give it the tower like look.


    It may be a bit of a risk once adventurers start arriving, but it makes our dungeon feel more alive instead of just drab holes in the ground. Besides on the 4<sup>th</sup> floor however they shouldn¡¯t be able to reach them from the ground, and when I spread my wings while standing on the edge of one of the balconies it makes it feel like it is worth it.


    Dawn: ¡°I wonder if Papa is training another dungeon core this year?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°He lost all of his memories, I am sure struggling enough with that to worry about training a new dungeon core.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°The Elders always seem to come calling on him though, so I don¡¯t know.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Well they didn¡¯t call us, so I think we should consider that lucky.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I still don¡¯t see how even after a year, that everything that goes on outside of our dungeons seems like it doesn¡¯t interest you.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We have to continue to expand and build our dungeons. We have our hands full with that as it is. I don¡¯t see any need to worry about what everyone else is doing.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Not even to see what Papa is doing?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Well¡­ He still hasn¡¯t contacted us, and I don¡¯t know. After he lost his memories it wouldn¡¯t be fair to try to poke our beaks in his business if he doesn¡¯t want anything to do with us.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°But we haven¡¯t even contacted him either!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°And say what? Hi we are your Avian daughters that you don¡¯t remember, why don¡¯t you travel 4 months and come pay us a visit?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°He has is teleport spell!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I don¡¯t know how close he has been to here, it still may take months for him to reach us. Besides he isn¡¯t really our Papa.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°We were born in his dungeon, and that is good enough for me! I just want to see him again¡­¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Yea¡­¡±


    Right before what would mark the 1 year since my sister and I started our dungeons we receive a message from Madam Erin.


    Madam Erin: (I have good news for you girls, I talked to your Papa, and he has some presents for you, next week after finishing up the evaluation of the new dungeon cores, I will bring him by so he can deliver them to you.)


    Dawn: ¡°Presents for us?! He hasn¡¯t forgotten about us!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°He lost his memories, so of course he has forgotten about us.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Then why else would Madam Erin say he has presents for us?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Well, just because he forgot doesn¡¯t mean he doesn¡¯t care. Maybe Madam Erin, or Mama told him about us, and he just feels bad because he can¡¯t remember us.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°We were just talking the other day about wanting to see him, so I don¡¯t care! Oh, but that means Papa is coming to our dungeons. We have a week to make them look their best!¡±


    Over the next week we drain the xp we have been storing up to expand our dungeons as much as possible. We have always focused on the monsters more than the rooms because that is what brings the xp back, but expending so much leaves us unable to fill quite a few of the rooms.


    Most of the monsters are not rift monsters so we just spread them out between the rooms, and with the number of monster to each room, it probably evened us out, compared to what a normal dungeon would have per room.


    Dawn: ¡°You were acting like it wasn¡¯t that big of a deal that Papa is coming, but you have been preening your feathers the last 2 hours now!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Not only Papa, but and Elder is coming to our dungeon, so forgive me if I want to look my best.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Don¡¯t get your feathers in a ruffle, or it will defeat the purpose of all that preening. I am not ashamed to admit I am glad to get to see Papa again.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I didn¡¯t say I was ashamed of Papa!¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I just got a message from Madam Erin! They are here!¡±


    My sister and I then quickly rush out to meet Madam Erin and Papa.


    We spent a few hours visiting with Papa, and it is sad he doesn¡¯t remember us, but he still seems like the same Papa. He scolded us for not sending message to him and Mama, so we promised we would send more.


    Papa even brought our big sister Inari, so we got to meet her as well, and we learned of our newest sister and her dungeon. I don¡¯t know how she is building a flying dungeon, but I wish we would have thought of that.


    Papa gave me and my sister each a pair of rings, one for helping us level up, and another for us to change our appearance. Now we should be able to go into the village without any trouble.  It was so nice to get to see Papa again, and even meet our older sister.


    Dawn: ¡°I wish they could have stayed longer¡­¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We got to see him again, and he does want us to message him and Mama, so we don¡¯t have to worry about being a bother to them.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°And look at these rings! I am going to go to the village first thing in the morning now!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Shouldn¡¯t we use the other ring to level up a bit more first to be on the safe side?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°If I look human we won¡¯t have nothing to worry about!¡±


    Dawn then takes the [Ring of Many Faces] and puts it on her finger¡­


    Twilight: ¡°You don¡¯t look any different.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I did just like they said.¡± ¨CDawn takes the ring off, and puts it back on several times, but still no change occurs.-


    Twilight: ¡°It must because we are Avian. We can¡¯t wear armor and clothes meant for humans, so that ring might be the same.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Then what about the other ring?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Be careful, Papa said that shape can¡¯t be changed one set.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Well if it works where the other didn¡¯t I want to go in the village!¡± ¨CDawn then puts on the room while focusing what she would image what she would look like as a human girl.-


    Dawn shrinks to almost half of her size, her wings disappear, and her clothes droop over her petite body. She is now in the appearance of a young human woman about 15 years of age, with flaming red hair that extends to her mid back.


    Twilight: ¡°You look just like Mama, you really could be Mama, and Papa¡¯s daughter looking like that.¡±


    Dawn had a little trouble getting used to walking in this smaller body with human feet, and she stumbles a few times without her wings to balance her.


    Twilight: ¡°Are you sure it was wise to use that ring to look human? To gather xp now you will have to use that body.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Well I am human now right?¡± ¨CDawn then puts on the [Ring of Many Faces] and returns to her normal shape.-


    Twilight: ¡°What did you do?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Now it¡¯s no problem. I can train as either a human or use the ring and train like this.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Can you use your wings and everything with both the rings on like that?¡±


    Dawn spreads her wings and flies around the room.


    Dawn: ¡°See no problem!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Well I don¡¯t share your enthusiasm for looking human. I do think it would be a good idea to be able to use human equipment while gathering xp, so maybe I should do the same with my ring.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°We are twins, so I am sure you will look the same.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I could look anyway I want though, so I don¡¯t have to try to look like Mama.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I didn¡¯t try to look like Mama, I just imagined what I would look like as a human.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Then how did you do it?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Just imagine what you would look like if you were human.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°You already said that, but how am I supposed to know how I would look like as a human?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Well humans are quite smaller, and have no feathers, or wings, so image what you would look like that.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Like a bird about to be stuffed in an oven!¡±


    Dawn sighs. ¡°Well we are twins, so just make yourself look like I did.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Well change back so I can see it¡­¡±


    Dawn takes off the [Ring of Many Faces] returning to a figure of a younger looking Belinda.


    Twilight: ¡°You must have done something wrong¡­ Because Mama only looks like that because she became Papa¡¯s boss monster, so if we really were her daughters wouldn¡¯t we look like she was back before?¡±


    Dawn: ¡°But we weren¡¯t born till after she changed, so it only stands to reason we would look like she does now.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°But then we would be babies as well.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Well we might be only a year old, but our appearance is of an Avian equivalent to 15 years to a human, so I went with that.¡±


    Twilight then focuses while putting on her ring. Her appearance much to the same looks just like a younger Belinda, the only difference instead of fiery red hair like Dawn and Belinda, her hair is a brilliant blue color.


    Dawn: ¡°I know my hair matched my feathers, but I didn¡¯t try for that, you didn¡¯t have to make your hair blue, most humans don¡¯t have blue hair!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I did the best I could, be glad I don¡¯t still have a beak¡­ It feels weird talking like this¡­¡±


    Dawn makes weird noises as she runs her finger up and down her lips while making noises. ¡°I don¡¯t know it¡¯s kind of fun.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I don¡¯t know I feel naked without my feathers¡­¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Have you looked at yourself, you practically are naked!¡±


    Twilight: ¡°You are wearing the same thing I am!¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Well we should summon some human clothes.¡±


    Dawn summons herself a very bold form fitting outfit that maintains modesty, without leaving much up to imagination. Twilight summons a pair of clothes much bulkier, and it even has feathers attached to it.


    Dawn: ¡°That is what you are going with? You don¡¯t really know much about humans do you?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Well I am not trying to seduce them!¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Our normal clothes are far more revealing then these, so how is it any better?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We also had our feathers!¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Maybe you should have gone with a bird beastkin appearance then, it may have been a bit more comfortable for you.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I did like you told me! Now you tell me this?!¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Sorry¡­¡±


    Twilight: ¡°It¡¯s too late now¡­ -Twilight then takes the human clothes off putting hers back on then puts on the second ring, returning to her normal shape.-


    Dawn: ¡°What we are not going to the village?¡±


    Twilight: ¡°This late? You can at least wait till morning before getting yourself into trouble, let¡¯s just begin training on some of each other¡¯s rift monsters.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°Fine, but we are going to the village tomorrow alright?¡±


    My sister and I then finish the rest of the afternoon training ourselves in each other¡¯s dungeons. It proves to be so much more beneficial to our dungeons then we even thought. Not only are we as dungeon cores gaining xp, but we gain the xp of the monsters we kill to take back to our own dungeon.


    The monsters we had training on the rifts in each other¡¯s dungeon did the same, but they were so much weaker it made it harder to do, but this way we can start adding far more rifts to our dungeons. At the end of the day though we are both quite exhausted.


    Dawn: ¡°Papa really helped us out with those rings.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°I am still worried about going to the village again, but I agree for at least gathering xp this should really speed things up.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I guess to thank Papa, we have to do like he asked and send messages to him and Mama far more often then.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°We didn¡¯t get to spend much time with Mama during our training, but if it makes Papa happy I am sure we can do it.¡±


    Dawn: ¡°I am going to bed, we got a big day ahead of us tomorrow.¡±


    Twilight: ¡°Good night¡­¡±


    My sister and I then retreat to our dungeon core rooms and go to bed for the night.

 Roxanne (Roxys Side Story)

    Even in my earliest memory I was still a slave, although my first master wasn¡¯t half bad it went downhill after that. After reaching about 14 years old I was sold to my second master as a sex slave for my second master¡¯s awkward son.


    Although the son wasn¡¯t a bad person I can¡¯t say that my first time was pleasurable, but if things remained like that I believe I would have been able to find a sense of happiness. However my second master had other ideas, after a while he decided why should his son get to keep me to himself and started to use me as he saw fit as well.


    Of course his son didn¡¯t want anything to do with me anymore after that, and the father soon got bored, so they sold me off. My 3<sup>rd</sup> master was a bit of a creep. I was still pretty young at the time and he treated me somewhat like a daughter, but that never stopped him from using me every chance he got.


    He would dress me in expensive dresses only to take pleasure in ripping them from my body. He would also throw me lavish birthday parties several times a month only to take pleasure in making it miserable for me.


    I don¡¯t know if it was when I began to get older, or just the fact I became accustomed to his treatment and no longer cried, but he too got bored with me and traded me off. After that I jumped around from slave trader to slave trader for the next few years.


    Once I became an adult I was able to perform more than just being a sex slave, and I even received a bit of schooling in that regard learning the [Clean] spell along with several other things considered secondary for an adult sex slave to have.


    Of course that drove my price up, but with the training I was able to get purchased one more time. The man that bought me this time however was horrible.  That had to be the worst four years of my life, and when he was through with me he gave me the scar to mark me as one of his old throwaways.


    Luckily it was the same scar that allowed Denova to buy me for a low price, and with her promise of being set free after paying off my debt I was greatly enthusiastic. Of course things aren¡¯t ever that easy, and I quickly found out I would be little more than a bar tender as Denova¡¯s clients always chose the younger girls. Only leaving me as a last resort on very busy nights¡­


    With that my debt was slowly going up instead of going down, so I gladly accepted a young, attractive, and enthusiastic feral beastkin girl when she asked me if I would take her on is a client. I had never had a female client before, but I asked for double the standard fee and she gladly paid.


    She was pretty na?ve, but although she seemed quite unexperienced, she seemed pretty sure of what she wanted. It was quite a unique experience to say the least and after some trial and error we both enjoyed ourselves quite a bit, which for me, was saying a lot.


    After that she started making visits almost daily. Even on the days she couldn¡¯t afford to pay for my services she would still stop by the bar area and at least grab a drink or two just to talk with me. I found out she was quite the prominent adventurer here in Tobes, so one day I made a joke saying she should take the commission that Denova placed for capturing a kobold up in the dungeon.


    I had no idea at that time, but that little joke had to be the event that changed my life forever, because the very next day she arrived with a female kobold in chains. The most surprising part was instead of taking her reward from the commission she asked Denova for my contract.


    Of course by then I already learned she herself used to be a slave, and even though she isn¡¯t one any longer she still has a complicated set of circumstances. The man she calls boss and the kingdom¡¯s princess initially threw a fit about her buying my contract.


    They made it sound like they were not comfortable with me being in their house, which at the time I found it ironic because as I understood the princess was the only one there that had never been a slave. They however did pay for me to stay at the inn.


    My new master visited me every day, and even though she wasn¡¯t making me do anything I don¡¯t want to, her ¡°boss¡± still made her release me after a few days. I had no idea what to do after that, but I did enjoy spending time with this girl called Zoey, so I decided to stick around for a while.


    I always talked about becoming an adventurer after I was free, but now that I am both I am still clueless on what to do next. Zoey has been helping me quite a bit, and she never seems to tire of being with me.


    Zoey was quick to ask me to move in with her after her boss and the princess built a new mansion in town. I was a little hesitant but Zoey¡¯s boss and the princess seemed to be ok with it. Zoey¡¯s boss and the princess were what I thought at the time, quite a unique bunch.


    I was quite conflicted for a while, Zoey made me happier than I ever have before, things were great here, and none of the experiences I have had with men would be something I would say was romantic, and yet still to say I would never have a man again¡­ I still don¡¯t know if I would want that.


    I then started to notice a few things off about Zoey¡¯s household¡­ The little rabbit beastkin Lilah disappeared for the entire day, almost every day. I didn¡¯t know where she went, but everyone acts like it is normal, and not only that but everyone seemed to have an obsession with the dungeon in the mountains.


    They even seem to always ask Two-Twelve¡¯s permission before mentioning anything about the dungeon¡­ I think then was when I started to think that Two-Twelve and Lilah were part of the dungeon.


    On a year of Faron¡¯s rest, as winter was just about to set in. Zoey, the Princess, and the other girls left to go train, asking me to help Two-Twelve keep an eye on things in Tobes. I had never been alone in the house without Zoey so needless to say things are a bit awkward.


    The princess¡¯s brother was in town and asked me of all people to lead him through the dungeon. I had been through most of it by now with Zoey and others, but to lead the kingdom¡¯s first prince into a dungeon. I was quite worried¡­


    Two-Twelve then volunteered to join us to give us a hand, and when we entered the dungeon he didn¡¯t even bother changing, only taking a sword with him. Even though he had never been through the dungeon before, he was strolling through it with as much care as strolling through the streets of Tobes. I finally got to see the dungeon¡¯s crystal that day, but I thought the entire situation was odd.


    After the prince left, I tried to stay out of Two-Twelve¡¯s way, but due to the winter the commissions had just about dried up, so I decided to get a job at the tavern. Two-Twelve then decided one day to go shopping for winter clothes. I wanted to try to save my gold for better equipment, so I can go with the girls next time, but things were going to get pretty cold soon, so I decided he is was right.


    Things didn¡¯t go as I expected though as he paid for the outfits including one that cost 4 times what I make at the tavern. He even spent gold on two outfits for Lilah that would take years before she could wear, but he insisted he would be able to resize it for her.Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    With Two-Twelve spending that much gold on me without asking for anything in return I felt I needed to repay him somehow, so I decided to help out more around the house. After the snow began to fall things really began to get strange.


    After a few short days Lilah¡¯s winter clothing had already been resized to fit her like a glove. Stranger yet is the pattern matches its original design perfectly¡­ I remember thinking if Two-Twelve is really that capable with a thread and needle, wouldn¡¯t it of made more sense to make it from scratch to begin with?


    Also even though Lilah went to ¡°work¡± every day, on the few days she had left before me there are no fresh tracks through the snow, so I began to wonder, just where is she disappearing to? After the talk I had with Two-Twelve, I began to wonder, that maybe the wild idea about the dungeon might not be far from the truth.


    When everyone returned to training I decided to have a long talk with Zoey about everything going on, and with what exactly goes on in this house.  As much as she adamantly told me how much she cared for me she also refused to answer my questions, and needless to say it put quite a wedge between us for a while.


    With their return also came the announcement that Two-Twelve was going to become the mayor of Tobes, and things really started to get busy after that. Tobes had its first ever festival, and the time I got to spend with Zoey was the happiest I had ever been.


    I never really gave much thought on love as I thought it was something I would never have, but even after the festival was over and things returned to normal I found myself never wanting to leave if it meant Zoey wouldn¡¯t be there with me.


    After the princess had her birthday party and I saw the beautiful necklace that Two-Twelve had made for her. I then realized why Zoey cared so much for these people. Even with everything I had been through when I saw the little wolf figurine on the princess¡¯s necklace I knew they actually thought of me as family.


    It was also enough to convince me with the stone representing Two-Twelve looked every bit like a miniature version of the dungeon¡¯s crystal. I knew then when they sat around the breakfast table talking about holding a training camp for the local adventurers. To state the fact I thought that Two-Twelve was part of the dungeon.


    There was an initial shock of me finding out, but their reaction was far different then I had imagined. I didn¡¯t quite know what to expect, but they seemed to even be relieved when I told them about it, and Zoey most of all seemed like a huge burden had been lifted from her shoulders.


    It wasn¡¯t long after them telling me everything about the dungeon that Zoey hatched a plan. It was fair to say that as much as I thought love was only a dream that I loved Zoey, but she knew I was still hesitant to never be with a man again.


    Zoey had told me about Bo before, but I never realized that he was part of the dungeon as well. The fact he was like a puppet was even more shocking, but most of all it was when Zoey asked Two-Twelve to let us have him that really confused me.


    Zoey had put in an uncharacteristically amount of thought into just what she could do to make us happy. Although I was hesitant at first it wasn¡¯t long till I realized it was her plan into asking me to marry her. I can say I probably would have told her yes even without the addition of Bo, but with Bo there all doubt in my mind was gone and I gladly accepted her proposal.


    I knew Two-Twelve and the princess allowed Zoey and I to be together, but I thought that once we announced that Zoey and I wanted to get married they would put a stop to it. Maybe it was just the fear that everything I had been though I was just waiting for the other shoe to drop. On the contrary though, they didn¡¯t even bat an eye when they congratulated us, and Belinda quickly started planning the event.


    I won¡¯t lie and say if I could go back and change the things that happened to me in the past that I wouldn¡¯t jump at the opportunity. As there are many things in my life I wish I didn¡¯t have to go through before I found Zoey. However if every bit of it was necessary for me to find Zoey, and lead me up to this moment, then I wouldn¡¯t change a second of it.


    Belinda spared nothing when putting Zoey and my wedding together, and although I can see she is doing it partly because she is preparing for what she hopes is her own wedding sometime in the future. She does still stop herself every now and then to switch gears to focus on what Zoey and I want.


    I can¡¯t say I am disappointed in the least. The wedding was far grander then I could have even dreamed about. The dress I wore alone was enough to purchase the contracts of every slave in Denova¡¯s brothel.


    It had to be the best wedding someone like me has ever had. The ceremony went off without a hitch, and the realization of all that has transpired is slowly starting to sink in. No matter what happened from now to the end of my life, as long as Zoey is by my side I knew I could be happy.


    Two-Twelve and Belinda had to go to the capital for a meeting, so Zoey and I tagged along so we could have our honeymoon there. By now I don¡¯t know why I was surprised, but I thought we still would have had to help Two-Twelve and Belinda while there, but when we arrived Belinda gave Zoey money and told us to have fun.


    I would say we did a lot in the capital, but other than a single day for shopping the only time we left the inn was to eat. We didn¡¯t bring Bo with us, but I think I just like the fact of having the option of being able to use him more than actually using him.


    I can¡¯t really blame Zoey but when I do use Bo she asks that she at least gets to participate, and I don¡¯t even mind. In fact after the first few times after using Bo I think even when Bo is involved I still pay far more attention to Zoey, so his absence in the capital wasn¡¯t even much of a loss.


    There was talks about adding me to Two-Twelve¡¯s dungeon before we left, but I wasn¡¯t sure all what it in tells, but as long as Zoey is there with me, and says it¡¯s ok, I am not too worried. When we make it back however Two-Twelve and Zoey take me a strange dark room.


    They tell me this is the place that Lilah goes to do her work, and that she can see the entire dungeon from here. After telling me what to expect I can¡¯t help be startled when a screen appears before me asking if I accept the terms of becoming one of Two-Twelve¡¯s boss monsters.


    Once I accept I see a bright flash of light, and before I realize it I feel like I am floating. I don¡¯t know how to describe the feeling, but it was like my entire body was being contorted, but there was no pain involved at all. Almost like I was being molded like a block of clay.


    It seems to take a lifetime, but it couldn¡¯t be more than a matter of a few seconds as I feel my feet touch ground again. My vision clears, and there seems to be far more light in the room now, with several open screens displaying different areas of the dungeon.


    I quickly notice something finding an extra weight to my head I reach to find my hair has not only got far longer but changed to a color of silver. I then quickly start investigating what else on my body has changed.


    After making a few comments about the changes my body went through Two-Twelve seems rather speechless, but Zoey quickly blushes and gets jealous of him looking at me without clothes, which I find rather cute.


    After a few jokes and explaining to me how everything with the dungeon works in more detail, Two-Twelve get sidetracked by one of the screens that appeared to him and after watching it for a while Zoey drags me off back to our bedroom.


    After joining the dungeon we had quite a few setbacks, and had to go though some hard times, but in the end I don¡¯t regret it for a moment.


    ¡°And that is the story of how I joined the dungeon.¡±


    I then kiss the forehead of the little silver haired baby boy sleeping in my arms, and set him into a bassinet next to the bed. Luckily he is still too young to understand any of it, but as I retell the story to him when he gets a bit older I might want to omit a few points of the story. In fact it is probably for the best if I hold off telling him that story till he is an adult¡­


    Zoey: ¡°Does that mean he finally went to sleep? Do you want to try for number 2 now?¡±


    ¡°It just took three hours for him to get to bed. You really want another one already?¡±


    Zoey: ¡°We need at least 3 more so when they go out adventuring with Scylla and Boss¡¯s kids they have a complete group!¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re not counting on me for all three are you?¡±


    Zoey: ¡°Well Scylla and Kline still haven¡¯t had another, and Boss and Belinda don¡¯t seem to be in a hurry so someone has to pick up the slack!¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re impossible! There is plenty of time.¡±


    Zoey: ¡°Then nothing¡­?¡± ¨CShe says with a pitiful face.-


    I roll over the top of her and kiss her lips. ¡°Now I didn¡¯t say that, but how about this. It¡¯s only fair you have the next one.¡±


    Zoey: ¡°But if I got pregnant then I couldn¡¯t wear the ring till after the baby was born.¡±


    ¡°To be in the unique position to have ones spouse understand what childbirth is like, I think I could manage.¡±


    Zoey: ¡°Well¡­ Maybe we should wait a while before the next one.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s what I thought.¡± ¨CI then slide the ring onto Zoey¡¯s finger and kiss her.-


    I don¡¯t know what lies ahead of us in the future, or what it will be like for our children, but what I do know is that in this moment. I am looking forward to what the future might bring.

 Dungeon Core #135 (Maeves Side Story) Chapter 1

    It may seem strange to the likes of humans, but I remember the time I was born. Not like it was that long ago, and for me it was like waking up from a long rest. None of us can be certain quite how it works, but when I was born I had all the knowledge I needed to get me started.


    I might be getting ahead of myself. Let me start over.


    I am Dungeon Core #135, and after opening my eyes I found myself to be the center of attention for quite a few people. I don¡¯t know about you but the saying naked as the day you are born applies to us as well, so to have so many gawkers naked body just after being born is a little more than uncomfortable.


    Luckily it isn¡¯t long before I receive some clothes, well at least a robe, from one of the boss monsters of the dungeon core in which I was born to. After my trainer introduces himself, his boss monster tells me she will take me to get some proper clothes, and so I follow her.


    I can¡¯t be certain but I feel by the stares of several in the room as I exit that I am somehow not up to their standard, and you would think it would be the men, but instead most of them looked rather embarrassed rather than disappointed.


    I can¡¯t say I was as voluptuous as some of the others, but with the exception of one or two, there isn¡¯t that great of a difference, maybe they are just intimidated by my height, or perhaps it was my race that was giving them trouble as most appeared to be some form of beastkin, but like the one training and his boss monster taking me to get clothes we share the Divine Being race, so I can¡¯t see how that would be shocking to them.


    I am led into a bedroom in the upstairs section of what appears to be a normal human¡¯s house. Now I was born with the knowledge that the one that trains me is quite different, and I know that this is his home, but it is kind of strange to see one of us living like this.


    After a few minutes of silence the woman that led me here finally makes a decision, and summons me a pair of clothes.


    Belinda: ¡°There, I think these will look quite lovely on you, and I am sure your daddy and the other will agree.¡±


    ¡°My daddy¡­?¡±


    Belinda: ¡°Well Two-Twelve, the dungeon core that will be training you. We have treated all the dungeon cores he has trained so far like our children as dungeon cores are unable to have their own. You can call him Daddy, or Papa, or whatever, but I think it gives us a special bond with the dungeons trained here.¡±


    ¡°That seems kind of odd, but I do know that with his unique nature, and the innovations he has made to the training process, if something like this is the cause I guess I will have to accept that.¡±


    I get dressed in the clothes she proved me with and it seems out of place. It really does seem to suit me quite well however, so it could be alright I guess.


    ¡°You don¡¯t think these clothes are a bit out of place for my training?¡±


    Belinda: ¡°You will have to go get and adventurer¡¯s ID first, and I want my daughter to look her best, besides your daddy will give you some equipment before you start. Now that we have your clothes sorted out, we just need to come up with a name for you.¡±


    ¡°Shouldn¡¯t we leave that to my trainer?¡±


    Belinda: ¡°Your daddy is not the best at that sort of thing, so he usually lets me choose.¡± ¨CShe looks me over a bit then with a bright smile proclaims.- ¡°You will be Maeve!¡±


    I take a look back into the mirror. Maeve¡­ I guess I could live with that name, it could have been much worse. This dungeon really does seem quite unique, but with the knowledge I was born with I know he is the best at training new dungeons, so I guess a few eccentric traits are to be expected.


    My training is only a month, so acting as their daughter for that time shouldn¡¯t be too hard, so when my ¡°mother¡± leads me back to the room in which I was born I spin in a circle and say ¡°Papa, what do you think?¡±


    I feel I just became the butt of a joke as the most of the women in the room find my reaction humorous. My trainer however doesn¡¯t miss a beat telling me I look lovely, and then mentions giving me a name. My ¡°mother¡± said he is bad at that sort of thing, and as he just uses his dungeon core as his name I think I will take her word for it.


    ¡°If it¡¯s ok with you, Mama wants to call me Maeve.¡±


    Two-Twelve: ¡°Maeve it is then.¡±


    After speaking for a minute a few of the others depart, and I see this really is quite the unique dungeon. Even after we leave the house heading into the town, the dynamic my trainer has with his monsters and the townsfolk really is something.


    After being presented with my adventurer¡¯s ID I am able to speak with my trainer for the first time alone. I find out he is not as serious about the entire mama and papa thing as his boss monster, but if that is what makes the dungeon cores he trains special it might not hurt to keep it up for the sake of his boss monster.


    I also find out that I might be able to reach a quite profitable quid pro quo type of agreement with one of the elders that might fancy my body. That isn¡¯t exactly the most ideal sort of agreement, but if the price is right, the benefits of having the assistance of an elder might make it worth it.


    We then return to their house and my trainer helps me select some equipment. I have a unique idea on the way in which I want my equipment, and surprising to me my trainer was able to match my ideals on the first try.


    He does worry me a bit about this armor he is having made for me consisting of not only elven but dwarven craftsmanship as well. I wish to remain as mobile as possible, and dwarves seem to have the idea the only protection is burying yourself under solid dwarven metal.


    Being a dungeon core I know the way in which dungeon cores are trained, and I also know the training technique is rather new due to my trainer¡¯s influence, so when he suggests switching me back to the old training method right off the start I am quite surprised.


    After forming my training dungeon however he gives me a massive amount of xp to take every skill I possibly can.  That alone puts me at one hell of an advantage, and after he uses an item he confiscated from a dungeon core that used it against him we begin my training.


    Fun isn¡¯t exactly how I would describe the training method, but it should give me quite an edge when starting off my own dungeon, with learning all those skills at level one, by the time I reach level 20 most of them will be maxed out and I will easily be stronger than 50 adventurers at my own level.


    I give it my all throughout the entire day, but my trainer seems a little dissatisfied with the amount of xp I have gathered for the day, so I suggest further training, but he insisted that his boss monster would get upset¡­ Just who is the one that runs this dungeon?


    I take a few new skills that become available due to my level gain, and my trainer asks me about the monsters I can summon. After that he suggests that I summon my boss monster to help me level, but I was hoping to wait for the summoning of my boss monster until I had the ability to summon elves.


    I manage to convince him and after the conversation I realize just how different from the normal dungeon he really is. He does claim to have an idea to help with my training, and we return to his home. My ¡°mother¡± has ironically prepared quite a feast to celebrate not only my birth, but my trainer¡¯s ability to survive for another year.


    Even the family dynamics of this rag-tag dungeon core and his monsters is quite interesting I find out after having to listen to a squabble between my ¡°mother¡± and her human siblings. After dinner my ¡°mother¡± shows me to a room for me to rest while my trainer prepares for tomorrows training.


    The next morning I loose myself to the comforts of this human bath my ¡°mother¡± told me about, and after taking more time then I should have I prompted to hurry by my trainer. After getting a bit of enjoyment out of teasing him we then prepare for my training.


    The training today is quite a bit more productive as my trainer recruits the help of my ¡°mother¡¯s¡± human brother and another friend of the family. My so called uncle is rather weak but him and his beastkin companion deal with the weaker slimes while the squirrel beastkin and I deal with the tougher enemies.


    Even though we are pretty much doing our own thing, with just the fact of being in a group together the xp we acquire is quite a boost over yesterday, and we make considerable progress. Things continue like the for the next few days until the squirrel beastkin¡¯s wife goes into labor.


    Watching the events unfold leave me to wonder. My trainer treats his dungeon less of a part of himself then he does maybe like a human would treat a job, while spending his free time typically in a way that perhaps a human would. Does that mean this human like behavior is the cause of his uniqueness and leads to the advancement of dungeon cores, or are the two things even related at all¡­


    Without the assistance of Kline, I reluctantly decide to summon my boss monsters that are available to me. The first boss monster¡¯s result is how I feared turning out in the fairy evolutionary line. The next one however is far more pleasing. It isn¡¯t exactly an elf like I hoped, but it is at least within the correct evolutionary line that should result in the unlocking of elves as I progress.


    In the end it may be more beneficial this way because having an elf boss monster won¡¯t necessary unlock them to be summonable, but as sentient elves progress indefinitely unlocking the race as a whole will mean I won¡¯t need to make them boss monsters anyway.


    After we resume my training and I test out what my boss monsters can do, I have the nymph that I named Syrinx hold off on gaining experience so the fairy in which I named Windy doesn¡¯t get left behind as a secondary boss monster.


    Even after a single day of training on returning to my dungeon Windy evolves. That should solidify her as my primary boss monster for now, and I can begin working with Syrinx till she surpasses her yet again. As long as I am careful about it and don¡¯t level one up to much where the other can¡¯t catch up I should be able to alternate them as my primary boss monsters and have them both evolve until they reach the end of their evolutionary lines.


    Using all the xp for my training to further teach me skills that I pick up while leveling us has caused us to completely run dry with still a week and a half of my training to go. I could gather xp from Papa¡¯s monsters¡­ Damnit now I am calling him that without even trying¡­ But with the assistance of Uncle Doug I haven¡¯t been acquiring xp for my dungeon that way.Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    Papa then suggests a rather troubling suggestion for the remainder of my training. He reassures me saying that attacking one of the Elder¡¯s dungeons should be fine, but I am not sure I am convinced. I am quite curious however about just how strong Papa is himself, so I reluctantly agree.


    As great as Papa is supposed to be I find his strength not any better than my own, either that or he is holding back quite a bit in my presence¡­ Before even a full week is up we are confronted by Elder Madam Erin.


    After a rough couple of minutes I had a fear that Elder Madam Erin was going to end us, but Papa manages to square things up with Elder Madam Erin and they start talking about the manner of my training.


    Elder Madam Erin sends for Elder Dyson and transfers us to a deeper section of her dungeon. After Papa introduces me to Elder Madam Erin she seems size me up, and has the same general consensus as those of Papa¡¯s dungeon, and that I am in some way lacking...


    Just talking about the cost of replicating the cuff we used for my training caused my head to spin, so if xp like that is nothing to an Elder, when Elder Dyson arrives I try to put on the charm in hopes I can really profit off his desire for a Divine Being.


    When he learns I am a Divine Being he seems pleased, but that is as far as it goes, because he seems far more interested in the succubus of Madam Erin¡¯s and in the news of my training leaving me to wonder if Papa wasn¡¯t exaggerating on just how much Elder Dyson was looking forward to a female Divine Being dungeon core.


    After a discussion about replicating the cuff I wore for my training with the Elders, Papa is forced to take us back to his dungeon to do just that.


    The succubus returns with us causing Mama quite a bit of anger, and after Papa retreats to make the items in question things are pretty awkward between Mama, the succubus, myself, and Kline¡¯s wife. Kline¡¯s wife excuses herself taking her baby and heading home, while Mama stares down the Succubus.


    The Succubus seems to care less about Mama¡¯s stares as she makes herself comfortable in the living room of Papa¡¯s house, and when Mama suggests I head to bed early I agree quickly to leave the tense situation.


    The next day Papa gives me quite a bit of xp and tells me to use it for spells or skills, and suggests I use the remaining of my time to train on his monsters to assist my boss monsters, and allow me to learn more skills.


    And like that my month of training has ended  I managed to scrape by reaching level 25 and raised up the strength of my boss monsters by quite a bit, like this I should have no trouble unlocking elves within a few months.


    While training alone I put a fair amount of thought into how I want to set up my dungeon, and just what makes Papa such an effective dungeon core, and on my final evening we have a celebration to mark the completion of my training, Papa asks me if I have a plan.


    The idea I have is completely out there and may very well fail, but if it does it will cost me my life, so I decide to keep it as secret as possible as not to worry Papa.


    After dinner I am presented with the sword that and elf boss monster of Papa¡¯s was working on for me, and it completely surpasses all my expectations. I also finally get a chance to see this elf/dwarven armor they have been working on. I have to say my opinion of the dwarf is quite higher now, she really seemed to put great thought into adding to the elven armor without just slapping dwarven plates on it like they tend to do.


    After everyone parts Mama pulls me to the side and tells me that she appreciates me going along with the whole Mama and Papa thing, and tells me I don¡¯t have to keep it up, but hopes I am willing to at least keep in contact with them after starting my own dungeon.


    I have to admit I don¡¯t actually think of them as my parents, but it isn¡¯t so bad. I mean I can tell how much they care for me and I them as well so even as being as close to actual parents a dungeon core can possibly have I see no reason not to continue to think of them as such.


    If my plan fails this could very well be the last night of my life, so after parting from Mama and Papa I take a nice long bath soaking till the water turns cold and then go to bed.


    The next morning we head to Elder Dyson¡¯s dungeon to start my evaluation, but instead we are met by the succubus of Madam Erin¡¯s dungeon. After telling us the location of the evaluation has changed we wrapped up tight by the succubus¡¯s arms and wings as we are pulled into her chest.


    With the displeasure on Papa¡¯s face and the reaction Mama had the other day about the succubus I can¡¯t help but to tease Papa about the situation, and Papa then leads me to the room in which I am supposed to be evaluated in.


    I am then introduced to the ones in the room, and then Elder Madam Erin enters the room along with another trainer and trainee. The trainer is one of Papa¡¯s other ¡°daughters¡± and she quickly greets him as Daddy and sizes me up while we are introduced.


    She seems to have the same expression as everyone else has about my appearance, and I am glad I have enough self-confidence to know I am and attractive woman, and I state as much to my ¡°sister.¡± She quickly apologizes and then gives the same rely everyone else has about Papa being unique¡­


    I have learned enough about Papa to know he is completely devoted to Mama, but just what is this secret standard that seemed to apply to all of those that Papa summons?


    My evaluation turns out to be less of that and more of just a meeting to discuss that the rings that Papa had made should be kept secret from everyone including the other elders, and we are then instructed to select the location of our new dungeons.


    The dungeon core that was in the room before we arrived seems to have no trouble selecting the location for her new dungeon, but I am quite nervous and my ¡°sister¡¯s¡± trainee seem reluctant as well. The relationship between them doesn¡¯t seem any less unusual then the one between me and Papa as their relationship seems to be more of a dungeon core and monster then that of two dungeon cores.


    He however eventually chooses a location rather close to Papa¡¯s dungeon and leaves me no choice but to select my own location now. This very well could be my last moments so I move up to the map, sigh, take a deep breath, and then begin looking over the map.


    I find a location over a small but quite deep bit of water that could serve as a decent location for a dungeon. With all my skills and level I don¡¯t know if I could survive a fall from a great height into the water, but it is better than nothing if my plan happens to fail.


    I slowly hold my finger in a location way up above the map over the water. Madam Erin questions my choice and I then confirm I indeed want to be placed in the sky¡­ What happens next is quite intense. After the draw of magic can be felt in my chest I am now in freefall as the ground is nowhere to be seen.


    The only reason I know which direction is up, because the rush of the wind as I head ever closer to the ground. I quickly open my [Menu] and try to set up my dungeon.


    Location of Dungeon #135 set to location sky. Setting dungeon location to sky will result in the placement of a standard sized room with a generalized appearance. This will also cause the consumption rate and the xp cost of additional rooms to be of higher cost. Do you wish to proceed?


    I don¡¯t care if I do eventually hit the water, this was far higher than I anticipated, so I seriously doubt I will survive impact, so I have no other choice to but to accept. A small island begins to appear, but it doesn¡¯t stop my freefall, so as a message appears before me I quickly try to transfer and land safely on the small section of land.


    It is a rather small area of grass and stone that is just peacefully floating in the air. With the light breeze blowing against my face it appears my plan has worked. I am a bit worried about the higher cost of consumption and higher xp cost, but it is to late to back out now. It is time to check over [Menu] and get to work.


    Small Wind Emerald placed at center of available area, Dungeon granted 50,000xp. 10xp removed do to consumption, if dungeon is reduced in size no xp will be refunded but the new xp consumption rate will take effect at the start of the new day.


    A single room is 10xp per day? That is an insane amount, not that I can¡¯t get that back quite quickly with my level I have to be able to find something to gather xp from first. It said my crystal was placed so I look around the small area and find a small stone that matches the color of my eyes glowing softly in-between the grass. I then decide to look over several of the other screens that have appeared and get to work.


    The first thing I need to do is increase the size of this area so I select to add more areas. Even maxing out another section of land it is only half the size you can get a typical room and yet it is double the cost. I might seriously need to find me a way to gather xp and quickly.


    I add more land and resize the original section, and after 25,000xp is spent I barely have a 200 foot by 150 foot area of grassland. It may be a while till I will need a dungeon core room so I decide to hold off on that for now and decide to work on the dungeon.


    Instead I am interrupted by Papa saying the Elders are having a fit about my dungeon. Well it is something that has never been done before so I can understand, but after I talk to him for a few minutes then the Elders start messaging me as well.


    They keep insisting to come to my dungeon, but I don¡¯t want them to see just a barren strip of grass, so I tell them to give me time to set it up first¡­ They don¡¯t like it but they finally agree to give me a few hours.


    That buys me a little time, so I then return to working on my dungeon. I want to add more to the surface, but without a dungeon core room I need a place to at least protect me from the elements so I add a small cave entrance. After only one more room I have to pay to add another floor which luckily unlike the rooms it doesn¡¯t cost double the price.


    Still after another 10,000xp for a new floor and another 6,000xp for a small but intricate system of cave tunnels, my xp consumption is already through the roof at 1/hour and I only have just under 9,000xp remaining.


    One of the screened mentioned my boss monsters so I bring it forward to read it through.


    Boss Monster Windy stored in Dungeon¡¯s Crystal, removing Boss monster from Crystal permanently binds boss monster to the dungeon. Monster can be broken down at 0xp but allows the summoning of a new boss monster.


    Boss monster Syrinx stored in Dungeon¡¯s Crystal, removing Boss monster from Crystal permanently binds boss monster to the dungeon. Monster can be broken down at 0xp but allows the summoning of a new boss monster.


    At the moment I can¡¯t afford to summon more flying monsters that could take me to down to the ground, and it would probably take both of them to do it anyway so I go ahead and pull them from the crystal.


    They seem happy to see me, but as non-sentient creatures it¡¯s not like it is actually true, more like a perceived reaction. I move the crystal down to the deepest part of the pitiful caves and move both Windy and Syrinx down to guard it.


    Now I just have to make my dungeon presentable. The grass blowing in the breeze is actually quite picturesque, but it is just a empty meadow, so let¡¯s give it a bit more character.


    Water sources seem to be quite a problem as a small quaint little pond cost as much as a room leaving me only just under 7,000xp left. A few cobblestone paths, a handful of small trees, drops me another 1,000xp.


    I already went down, so I can¡¯t add any rooms up here but adding buildings to the existing rooms should work, but opt to save a bit of xp by putting in some ruined buildings instead. It gives it a very lost village in the clouds vibe and am actually quite pleased with it.


    Now I don¡¯t have any xp for anything else and should save the last 4,832xp for consumption just in case I have trouble collecting more.


    I move over to one of the chairs I summoned in one of the ruined buildings and take a seat letting the feeling of the gentle breeze through my hair and across my face, wash over me. This really is quite nice. Well it better be, this will be my home for the rest of my life so I better enjoy it.


    I end up spending roughly 1500xp more on small aesthetically pleasing items to my dungeon while waiting for Papa and the Elder, and once I get word of their arrival I transfer myself to the opening of the cave crossing my arms and legs while leaning against the mouth of the cave.


    As they approach Papa looks quite astounded, but the Elders facial expressions are far more serious.


    ¡°What do you think so far?¡±


    We then have a conversation about my dungeon, and Papa seems quite worried about the xp I spent. I lie and tell him I summoned more monsters to protect my dungeon, but that seems to put him at a bit of ease.


    The conversation then shifts to the Elders arguing about Papa¡­ I can¡¯t help feel a bit jealous after all my hard work they are making it sound like Papa¡¯s accomplishment so I say.


    ¡°Damn Papa, it sounds like you have a couple fans¡­¡±


    The elders have seemed to reach a¡­ Well I can¡¯t say agreement, but a mutual understanding at least, and  Elder Dyson offers Papa a position to work alongside the Elders! Of course not as an Elder, but still I did all this work¡­


    ¡°Hey it¡¯s my dungeon! Don¡¯t I get something for my contribution to this?¡±


    Dyson: ¡°With your father joining up with us, maybe some of the benefits will trickle down to all of his daughters.¡±


    Not the most desirable outcome, but it is something at least so I look at Papa hoping he accepts.


    Papa: ¡°For one I wouldn¡¯t want to make any decisions without talking it over with my boss monsters, and secondly what would be in it for me?¡±


    They then discuss some of the details of it and I then look at Papa and try to act as daughterly as I possibly can while batting my eyelashes at him and saying. ¡°Papa¡­ If you decide to join with the elders I promise to be a good daughter, and help Papa with anything he needs!¡±


    Papa didn¡¯t buy it because he sighs and says. ¡°Well if that¡¯s all I am going to go check on Inari, and instead of sucking up to me Maeve dropping a message to Belinda every so often would go a lot further in making me happy then puppy dog eyes.¡±


    Well there are worse things he could of asked for so I flash a bright smile and enthusiastically say ¡°Understood!¡±


    I talk with Papa for only a few more minutes, and the Elders look around a bit, but they all then depart leaving me alone to my own devices among the clouds.

 Maeves Side Story Chapter 2

    It has been a few days since I started my very own dungeon in the clouds and when I woke up this morning I stepped outside stretching in the brisk morning breeze. I however notice something is a little off.


    When I choose my location I wanted to make sure if I couldn¡¯t place my dungeon in the air, and I somehow lived through the landing I would at least have a somewhat decent place to put my dungeon. Now it was relatively close to the coast, but it shouldn¡¯t be close enough to make the air feel salty in the breeze¡­


    I move over to the edge of my dungeon and peer over the side¡­ It¡¯s a long way down that, but all I can see is blue¡­ That can¡¯t be right, is my dungeon moving¡­? There has never been a dungeon like this one before so it isn¡¯t like I can ask someone, so I guess there is only [Menu] for me to rely on.


    With a bit of effort I finally find a bit more information after using the search function while asking about sky dungeons.


    Sky Dungeons: A Sky Dungeon is a unique type of dungeon that glides through the air. Unlike normal dungeon placed in or on the ground Sky Dungeons are capable of being moved through the air by the dungeon core or dungeon monster with the proper permissions.


    The speed in which a Sky Dungeon moves through the air varies greatly by the wind current. If the Sky Dungeon is directed to fly against the wind it is capable of very limited speed, but if it is directed to travel with the wind its speed increases in proportion to the speed of the wind.


    Although a Sky Dungeon can be directed to a full stop, it can never remain in one place for more than a day depending on the speed of the wind. Under absolutely no wind a Sky Dungeon may remain in place for exactly 24 hours, but even with small amounts of wind it reduces that time greatly, and under severe wind conditions it is impossible to maintain a full stop.


    A Sky Dungeon may also change altitude as well but this method varies greatly compared to horizontal movement. A Sky Dungeon always remains at the exact same height from the ground regardless of terrain. For example if flying over a valley the Sky Dungeon will sink, and flying over a mountain and the Sky Dungeon will rise.


    To change the height in which a Sky Dungeon remains above the ground the Dungeon Core or dungeon monster with the proper permissions, must access the Sky Dungeon¡¯s crystal and expend xp to raise or lower the height by 1xp per foot. However a Sky Dungeon can never be lowered to a distance under 100 feet.


    Additionally a Sky Dungeon will always remain perfectly level unless the tilt is changed by accessing the crystal in the same manner. The Sky Dungeons tilt can be altered by 1 degree per 100xp expended.


    Well, isn¡¯t this interesting¡­ I am definitely going to have to find me some sort of decent map, and a way to determine my direction. I was close to the east coast, while still relatively far from any of the others so I should probably try to head west to at least keep my dungeon above land or I might really get lost.


    After changing the direction my dungeon is moving, it is moving against the wind, but the wind is light enough I am hoping it will eventually return to land. So much for my plans of having Windy and Syrinx taking me down to the surface to gather a bit of xp.


    I must have not gone far off the coast because after a few hours of keeping an eye on it I see land slowly approaching in the distance. This height might still be a bit of a problem for my monsters to take me to the ground and back, but if it cost xp to change how high I am, there isn¡¯t much I can do about that right now.


    After giving me a ring for me to gain levels like using the cuff during my training I followed Papa¡¯s advice and didn¡¯t change my appearance at all just using the ring to gather xp, but maybe at that time I should have told him my plan and choose a form that was capable of flight. I could probably ask Papa to make me another one of those rings, but from what I heard about their cost it might take me a long time till I can afford it.


    I continue for the rest of the day fighting the wind to make it inland, and then continue to hold that course to make sure it doesn¡¯t accidently get pushed back out to sea when I leave the dungeon to gather xp.


    The next morning I have my dungeon do a full stop and after equipping my gear I have Syrinx and Windy help me to the ground. Going down is quite simple I just fall and my boss monsters just have to make sure I don¡¯t go splat, but the real test is when we go back up, and even when I finally reach the ground and look back up towards my dungeon I am starting to wonder is this is a good idea.


    I don¡¯t want to risk my boss monsters getting injured and killed or then I really won¡¯t be able to return home, so I send them back and try to get a lay of the land. By the looks of things I am pretty sure I am in Dalian so that is even more reason that it was a good thing I sent my boss monsters back.


    Well in truth if I had slave collars around them, Dalian might be the only kingdom I could get away using them normally, but I don¡¯t have any slave collars and I am sure there is some human politics about having monsters as slaves so I don¡¯t want to mess with that anyway.


    As I was coming down I seen a village off the way, but we tried to steer clear of it, because I didn¡¯t want them to see me just descending from the sky, but I don¡¯t know if I should worry about visiting the human village or just finding something to kill to get ahold of some xp.


    I was talking about needing a map and compass, and the village surely knows of good hunting spots so I decide the small detour will be worth it in the end, but if I happen to find something worth my time along the way I will just forget about the village.


    I unfortunately don¡¯t even encounter as much as a rabbit on the way to reaching the village, and it takes quite a bit more time than I anticipated on to arrive. If things keep going like this I might have to just call the day a bust and try again another.


    The village is finally in sight and it appears to be more of a modified fort then an actual village, and when I am spotted there is a horn blown and a bit of commotion can be heard from the village. Dalian is a kingdom ruled under tight military standards, but I am still not too sure to make of what is going on.


    My armor is quite different, and even my weapon might be perceived to be unusual as well, and then there is the fact I came up to the village not by a road but over the plains, so I am hoping this is just a quick misunderstanding that can quickly be wrapped up. I don¡¯t have time to waste being interrogated by the human soldiers.


    It doesn¡¯t seem as bad as I feared however because as I get closer it isn¡¯t soldiers that begin making their way to me but a few nervous farmers carrying farming implements as weapons.


    Farmer: ¡°Are you here from the Army?¡±


    ¡°No, no Army. I am just a traveling adventurer. ¨CI say while looking around trying to see just what is going on here.-


    Farmer: ¡°Not the Army¡­¡± ¨CHe says sounding rather discouraged.- ¡°But you are an adventurer, and your equipment not only looks specially made but quite expensive as well, maybe we don¡¯t need the soldiers.¡±


    Wow it looks like I rolled into town at the perfect time, that is if I can deal with whatever problem they are having quickly enough that my dungeon doesn¡¯t run off without me.


    ¡°Well it looks like you are having a bit of trouble¡­ You mind telling me about it, and perhaps I can help¡­For a price.¡±


    I could really care less about human money, but I think it is customary to demand payment as an adventurer, so I thought it in not give them any reason to doubt me.


    Farmer: ¡°Well the taxes are so high, and we have lost so much already¡­¡±


    ¡°Well as you said my armor and weapon is all custom made and things like that aren¡¯t cheap, I can¡¯t do something for nothing, but perhaps you should just tell me what the problem is before I make up my mind.¡±


    I am not even sure what I am saying now I am just talking out of my ass¡­


    Farmer: ¡°There was a group of cat-folk that somehow were able to free themselves from their collars and they positioned themselves at the old checkpoint tower. Every time they get low on supplies they have been coming into our village and they have just been taking whatever they want.¡±


    ¡°Cat-folk, aren¡¯t they all trained soldiers of the Dalian military?¡±


    Farmer: ¡°Not really soldiers they are used mainly as scouts or assassins, but we were sure when they didn¡¯t return to wherever they are supposed to be before shedding their collars, the Army would come looking for them, but it has already been months.¡±


    ¡°How many of these cat-folk are we talking about? And how far away is this checkpoint tower?¡±


    Farmer: ¡°We have never seen more than 4 or 5 at a time, and it is just 20 minutes or so up the road out of the north side of the village.¡±


    20 minutes there 20 minutes back, 2 hours back to my dungeon, and that doesn¡¯t even include the time to deal with the cat-folk. There are at least 5 of them and they are trained by the Army, so I don¡¯t even know if it is a good idea for me to try to handle this alone.


    If I don¡¯t do this though the entire day turns out to be a complete waste. ¡°I can¡¯t make any promises, because you are saying at least 5 soldiers trained in the art of seeing without being seen are my targets, so it might be even too much for me, but I will at least check it out and see if there is anything I can do.¡±


    Farmer: ¡°Thank you. Thank you so much sir!¡±


    I am quickly taken aback¡­ Sir?! Well I guess with this armor it is kind of hard to tell, and I don¡¯t have long hair, but clearly my face is that of a beauty, so what the hell does he mean sir?!


    ¡°What do you mean Sir?! I am by all accounts most definitely a woman!¡±


    Several of the other villagers that where gathered nearby begin to whisper and talk¡­ Even with my skills hearing it all is impossible, but I am able to pick up a few of them here and there.


    Villager A: ¡°A woman¡­ What does she think she is doing¡­?¡±


    Villager B: ¡°She is clearly a foreigner no respectable Dalian woman would be caught dead dressing like a man¡­¡±


    Farmer: ¡°Oh do excuse me madam¡­ We don¡¯t get many of your kind around these parts. We are sorry to have troubled you¡­¡± ¨CHe turns and starts walking away.-


    Is the entire world out to prove I am not feminine enough? I happen to be a very attractive woman, what the hell! Not only that but they find out I am a woman and then it¡¯s like I have some sort of disease or something.Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators!


    I knew Dalian folk where way behind on the times with not acknowledging the races other than humans as actual people, but to treat a woman as somehow less than a man? That even predates the dungeons! If I didn¡¯t need the xp so bad I would say damned the village and I hope the cat-folk wipe them out!


    No use going through the village so I work my way around it till I find the road heading north and stomp off down the road¡­ I must have been making a good pace because before I realize it I have reached the checkpoint tower, but instead of trying to sneak up I am already nearly too it. So much for the element of surprise.


    ¡°Listen up furballs! I am not Dalian, and I can care less about the village back there, so why don¡¯t you come on out here and talk to me woman to cat and maybe we can come to some sort of deal!¡±


    Voice from the tower: ¡°Give us that spear and the armor and then we will talk!¡±


    ¡°I tried to be reasonable. I was even going to let you keep raiding that backwards village back there if you made it worth my while, but the truth is I need xp, and I am not going home without it, so make your choice!¡±


    What happens next happens very quickly. A crossbow bolt comes tearing through the air, and quickly cursing I can¡¯t completely dodge the bolt, but it only managed to pierce my shoulder. It could have been anything arrows, rocks, hell magic and I could of dodged it easily enough, but who the hell uses crossbows!


    They are huge, cumbersome, and take forever to fire. After the first bolt you might as well just use it as a club for all the use it is, but these dumb cats decided to use them. The damage that one shot does if it hits is quite severe though so my shoulder hurts like hell.


    Worst case scenario there are far more of these cats then the villagers told me about and they each have crossbows, but now that I know about them I should fair far better, but luck appears to be on my side because as I draw my blade from my back I hear them cursing to one another inside.


    Cat: ¡°I thought you told me that this thing would drop a troll!¡±


    Cat 2: ¡°That¡¯s if you hit them in the head, not the blasted shoulder!¡±


    Cat: ¡°Shut the hell up! I aimed for his heart he just dodged!¡±


    Cat 2: ¡°You can¡¯t dodge a crossbow bolt!¡±


    Cat: ¡°Well he did!¡±


    They couldn¡¯t even tell the difference between a sword and a spear, so I will forgive them for calling me a he, but I am not forgiving this pain in my shoulder, so I quickly charge the tower.


    The tower is old, probably from some old war, the door is nearly rotted though, but even if it wasn¡¯t for that I could have easily busted through it, but instead I kick it clean of its hinges.


    ¡°Alright! Who¡¯s the pussy with the crossbow?!¡±


    They look quite shocked by my sudden entry into the tower and a large cat-folk man covered in grey and black fur quickly panics dropping the crossbow to the floor. All of them including the one shitting himself draws some sort of weapon from their waist.


    The villagers appear to have been off count by two as I can see 7 of these giant two legged cats closing the distance. With my weapon I fare much better with plenty of room to move around so instead of bottle necking them in the doorway I step back letting them come to me.


    I give them time to completely surround me, and in hindsight that probably wasn¡¯t the best idea given the fact I don¡¯t know the extent of their power, but by their reactions and lack of any type of armor I assumed they wouldn¡¯t be much trouble.


    ¡°Alright you over grown housecats, if any of you wish to live now is the time to tuck tail and run!¡±


    They begin to laugh and snicker, and then one of them chimes in. ¡°Hey this guy is a woman!¡±


    ¡°No shit captain obvious, but I think for that I will let you die last, as for the first to go¡­ Where did you go patches! ¨CI turn looking for the grey and black cat-folk man, and as soon as I spot him I leap.-


    My sword is very sharp and the blade alone is 8 feet in length and without pause or hesitation I run the entire length of it through the middle of the furball that fired the crossbow. Pulling the sword back out the way it went in would be quite a pain so after a quick twist and yank it moves from his stomach and exits just under his right arm nearly severing his entire torso in two.


    With my quick reaction they don¡¯t know if to shit or go blind and two of them bump into each other as they try to charge at me. A third one swings his puny steel sword at my head but after a spin and a jump I am standing outside the group and it even takes them a second to find out where I went.


    ¡°Did you lose something?¡± ¨CI say from behind them just to mock them.-


    Cat: ¡°You can¡¯t take us all bitch!¡± ¨CThey say turning to the sound of my voice and readying themselves.-


    ¡°I beg to differ!¡± ¨C I say launching myself back into the group swinging my blade around.-


    With my foot extended one way and my long sword I use the momentum of both to spin on my other leg severing the head off one more of the cats and cutting a second right in two, before a third cat blocks my blade with his sword.


    As soon as my blade is stopped I quickly leap into the air flipping over the cat the blocked my sword catching my heel in the back of his head and riding him all the way to the ground while whipping my sword around ending one more of the cat¡¯s lives.


    With ones face buried in the dirt with me standing on his back, and only two others left they hesitate. I know it¡¯s an expression, but one literally tucks his tail between his legs as he quickly turns and makes a run for it.


    ¡°Are you done playing cat and mouse already. It isn¡¯t any fun when you are the mouse is it?¡±


    The one left standing there doesn¡¯t know what to do, but the one I am standing on is trying to get me off of him. I kick him square in the jaw, and I don¡¯t know if I broke his neck or just knocked him out, but either way he isn¡¯t going to be an issue for a while.


    I look at the last remaining cat-folk man. ¡°Wait you are the one that called me a woman!¡±  He quickly begins to panic dropping his sword and starts backing up.


    Cat: ¡°Look, we were just trying to survive! We didn¡¯t even harm any of those villagers, they were so scared when they found out we didn¡¯t have any slave collars on they just let us take whatever we wanted! Why would we turn down something like that, so we found this old tower and just hunkered down!¡±


    ¡°I get all that, but the part I am fuzzy on is this crossbow bolt sticking out of my armor here, see?¡± ¨CI say ripping the bolt from my shoulder.-


    I don¡¯t know if a cat-folk man can sweat, but if they can this one most certainly is.


    Cat: ¡°It¡­It wasn¡¯t me! It was Patches!¡±


    ¡°Patches! His name really was Patches?! That is too funny, now you all don¡¯t seem high enough level to be much in the way of xp, so I could really care less about you lot, but I think I will take a look around at the things you took to see if there is anything worth my time.¡±


    Cat: ¡°Take whatever you want!¡±


    ¡°Oh I plan on it.¡± ¨CI say walking past him causing him to drop to his knees and begin cowering.-


    I then enter the tower and begin looking through the items they have amassed. The crossbow is worthless after the first shot and is a horrible weapon, but they are pretty rare, so it might be worth quite a bit of xp so I grab it, along with a few other items including a curious ring shines as green as my eyes.


    By the time I exit the tower the last cat-folk man has disappeared. The one I kicked around has been turned over, but I can now tell he is no longer breathing so I must have indeed broken his neck. I quickly check the bodies of the dead cat-folk but they don¡¯t seem to have anything interesting on them.


    I could really care less about the villagers after the way they treated me, and it seems I can take a short cut by passing the village entirely, so I make for the area in which I landed. It still takes just over 2 hours to return, and just before I arrived I messaged Syrinx and Windy to meet me there to pick me up.


    It takes me far longer to get back up to my dungeon then it did to the ground, but I finally manage to make it. Both of my boss monsters seem spent however, so if I find any more loot next time it might be a bit of a problem getting back.


    I quickly look over the monsters have returned from battle screen that appears and after a severe lack of xp gain I am pretty disappointed. It did result in more xp then my consumption is for a day, so even if the trip was a bust it didn¡¯t cost more than I made at least.


    Now that I am back in the comfort of my own dungeon I am starting to feel rather embarrassed at my behavior. The entire time I was with Papa I learned about the close bonds his dungeon has with humans and how it is crucial to the future of dungeon cores, and yet let a few humans that didn¡¯t know any better get the best of me and I ended up making a bit of a fool of myself.


    In any case it may be a good idea if I steer clear of Dalian for a while so after set my dungeon to start making its way south I decide to then check out my haul. The crossbow is worth about 300xp, but breaking it down is only a fraction of that, I don¡¯t know if Papa can make crossbows, but it is a pretty useless device so I decide to break it down for a bit of xp.


    The swords the cat-folk had were barely even steel weapons, so I figured the weight of them would have been too much. With the way Windy and Syrinx were after we arrived I believe I made the right call but now I am second guessing myself.


    Most of the other items I collected are broken down for a few points of xp here and there, but the real gem is the small emerald ring. It turns out to be a [Minor Ring of Storage] whish excites me to no end, but after playing around with it a bit I realize the minor in the name is definitely the most important word¡­


    The storage space within the ring can barely hold a few small items, but after I find out my sword is just thin enough that it can store it I might have a use for the ring after all. I can¡¯t say it¡¯s that big of a difference but not having to carry my sword on my back while worrying it if it is dragging in the dirt or not, is a little bit of a comfort.


    With the exception of the ring I break everything down resulting in just a few hundred xp even including what I gathered by the kills, which won¡¯t do me much good down the line, but it will at least keep me alive.  I then retire for the evening in hopes tomorrow will be a better day.


    I continue pushing my dungeon south for a while, but the wind never seems to go my way so the moving has been quite slow, I have figured out I can stagger the direction if it is going east or west and get a little more speed, but I still haven¡¯t covered a lot of ground.


    After two weeks I have finally passed over what had to be the border between Dailian and Exeter. Even if you wouldn¡¯t think so, or it isn¡¯t that apparent from the ground, but all the way up here, you can seem to see the difference in the kingdoms by the way the geography and habits of the habitants shape the land.


    If there is anywhere I can gather some xp it will be here in Exeter, so as soon as I get far enough away from the border I slow my dungeon until I see the appearance of a village down below. After finding a promising location the wind seems to be pretty light, so I issue a full stop and have my monsters take me to the ground.


    It maybe be too much for Windy or Syrinx, but as soon as I can unlock elves I hope I can get one to use to keep an eye on my dungeon, being able to judge the strength of the wind and change the direction of the dungeon to fit it I could possibly double my time on the ground, if not more.


    If my experience in Dailian taught me anything it is that the distance between objects from my dungeon are much further apart then they appear, so when I touch down on the ground I am way closer to the village then I was when I was in Dalian.


    I set off towards a road that I set down close to, and then reach the village a few minutes later. I might have cut it a bit to close this time because as I meet with guards to enter the village I hear talk of large monsters flying nearby.


    Guard: ¡°State your business in Exeltia.¡±


    ¡°Just an adventurer looking for some commissions.¡±


    The guard then asks to see my adventurer¡¯s ID so I present it to him. After eyeballing it for a minute he is looking at it rather suspiciously.


    Guard: ¡°A Divine Being hailing from Gowen? Are you the Gowen princess?¡± ¨CHe says eyeing my ID suspiciously.-


    ¡°You know Mama¡­?¡± ¨CI say without thinking.-


    Guard: ¡°I heard the Gowen princess was a young woman as well, you couldn¡¯t possibly be her daughter.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry¡­ Papa and her took me in and got me on my feet, they aren¡¯t really my parents, but I call them that.¡±


    The guard looks back at my ID for a moment.


    Guard: ¡°If it is a fake it is a really good one, but I am going to need a bit more conformation before I let you just wander around the village.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m a bit pressed for time¡­¡±


    Guard: ¡°Do you want in or not?¡±


    I let out a deep sigh. The guard then hands off my ID to another guard and after they speak quietly for a moment, which with my skills is far from low enough. I am escorted to the Adventurer¡¯s Guild.


    Tobes is apparently not the only city to mix the local politics with the adventurer¡¯s guild as it seems the adventurers guild also serves as a military outpost. I am taking to a guard whose armor is slightly improved compared to all the rest and I ID is handed off to him.


    They then discuss the same topic the two entrance guards did regarding the validity of my adventurer¡¯s ID. The apparent supervisor then dismisses the guard and then asks me the same thing the guard at the edge of the village asked.


    Guard Captain: ¡°Are you any relation to the Gowen Princess?¡±


    ¡°Well as that guard just told you I already said they are like family.¡±


    Guard Captain: ¡°You know it is a crime to use skills against Exeter soldiers do you not?¡±


    ¡°Well I can¡¯t just turn off my good hearing¡­ Now is it really that big of a deal if I am related to the Gowens or not? Can¡¯t I just take some commissions and be on my way?¡±


    Guard Captain: ¡°We can give you a red stamp, that will let you take standard commissions, but until we can confirm your identity you will not be able to take any commissions that may influence the village or kingdom.¡±


    ¡°Well I am just trying to line my pockets a bit as I pass though, so that is fine with me.¡±


    He then puts my ID into the device the guild uses to make them and a red Exeter¡¯s royal seal is added to the corner of my adventurer¡¯s ID. He then returns my ID to me and dismisses me¡­ That seems like a lot of red tape just for a small village like this, Exeter really does seem different then Gowen that is for sure.


    I wasted a bit of time, but maybe there is still a way for me to grab a quick bit of xp so I check the commission board until I feel a tap on my back and I quickly turn to find a man that barely taller than my waist.


    He is quite handsome, and I guess you can¡¯t really blame him for his height as he has a pair of pointed ears and light green hair indicating he must be an elf. As I turn he seems to be sizing me up.


    Elf: ¡°Excuse me, but are you the Gowen Princess I heard that was in town¡­?¡±

 Maeve Side Story Chapter 3

    After a small hiccup in Dalian I decided to head south, and once reaching Exeter I decided to give it another shot in collecting some xp for my dungeon. Although after arriving to town my adventurer¡¯s ID landed me in a bit of hot water, and for some reason they thought I was Mother.


    I managed to smooth things out, but apparently word traveled quickly and a young elf man has approached me asking if I am a Gowen Princess. I left things pretty rough in Dalian but at least I managed to acquire some xp. The way things are going it looks like I might have been better off in Dalian¡­


    ¡°I don¡¯t know where you heard that but I am no Gowen Princess, or any kind of Princess for that matter. I am just an adventurer that is quite short on time trying to complete a few easy commissions while I can.¡±


    Elf: ¡°But your race is Divine Being, only those close to the Gowen royal family have that distinction.¡±


    I sigh and say. ¡°Yes I know the royal family, but it is a long story which I am not going to repeat for every single person in this kingdom. As I said I am pressed for time so if you will excuse me.¡±


    Elf: ¡°But for the Prince of Exeter I suggest you make the time.¡±


    ¡°No offense shorty, but from what I heard from Papa about the Queen of Exeter he made no mentions of her being an elf. In fact from his descriptions of the Queen of Exeter I don¡¯t think you would even make up one of her arms.¡±


    Elf: ¡°Well I will give you that one because it isn¡¯t a crime to be ignorant, but choosing to remain so should be. Although my mother seemed blessed receiving most of the perks of being a half-elf she didn¡¯t suffer most of the drawbacks from the elf side. I however am only a quarter and I got the exact opposite.¡±


    ¡°Tough break, now will you excuse me? I really don¡¯t have a lot of time.¡±


    Elf: ¡°You really aren¡¯t here for me, are you?¡±


    ¡°Why would I be?¡±


    Elf: ¡°The deal with Duscae of course! When I heard of a Gowen Princess being in town I was sure it was my fianc¨¦ coming to introduce herself.¡±


    ¡°Sorry to disappoint you. Like I said I am just an adventurer.¡±


    Elf: ¡°But you said you knew the royal family so maybe you could at least tell me about my Tanya.¡±


    ¡°Well I never had the chance to meet Tanya, but if she is anything like Mindy I would say if it isn¡¯t too late to back out of the agreement, Exeter couldn¡¯t have gotten anything good enough to warrant that agreement.¡±


    Elf: ¡°I knew it¡­¡± ¨CHe says with a sigh collapsing in one of the nearby chairs.- ¡°I thought Mother was finally letting me do something good for the kingdom. Instead it was just Duscae ditching its unwanted Princess on Exeter¡¯s unwanted Prince.¡±


    ¡°The only thing shorter then you, is your self-esteem¡­ If you are the prince shouldn¡¯t you have some kind of guard or something, especially since you are well, like this?¡±


    Elf: ¡°We are inside the local garrison¡­ Besides I think if someone tried to kill me it would be to help my Mother not hurt her.¡±


    ¡°From what I heard the Queen seemed like a decent person.¡±


    Elf: ¡°My Mother is fine, but power is everything in Exeter, and when you are born small enough to fit in your mother¡¯s hand you are treated differently. I had everything done for me till I was old enough that it was no longer cute, and they just quit doing it. You don¡¯t just instantly learn all those things you should have been figuring out on your own all those years. Sure I was able to pick up on most of it easy enough because I watched them do it, but that doesn¡¯t do much for one¡¯s self-confidence.¡±


    ¡°And why is it exactly you are telling me all this?¡±


    Elf: ¡°I guess it was just nice to have someone to talk to for a change. Everyone in Exeter is always out for one more commission, or one more kill, and they never have time for someone who just isn¡¯t built that way.¡±


    ¡°I have been trying to walk away since you first walked up to me.¡±


    Elf: ¡°But you didn¡¯t you listened to me.¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t know it was an option. Being a prince and all I didn¡¯t know if you would send the guards to have me executed because I ignored you or something.¡±


    The elf laughs and then says. ¡°They would just tell me to do it myself, or I can¡¯t call myself my Mother¡¯s son. I know you said you didn¡¯t meet Tanya, but what can you tell me about her? I pictured her with long wavy golden locks, a cute smile, and a colorful poufy dress.¡±


    I sigh and pull up a chair. ¡°Well as far as I know all the Gowen Princesses have fiery red hair and a personality to match it. Mindy seemed to go for the more utility over style, and Mother seemed to like that sort of thing but the closest thing to a dress I saw her wearing was one of Papa¡¯s shirts early one morning while cooking breakfast.¡±


    Elf: ¡°Mother?¡±


    ¡°Sorry, Belinda Gowen, her and her husband took me in for a while. It was only a month but they took care of me so I call them Mother and Papa. It was a bit of a joke because we are all about the same age, but it just got to be a habit.¡±


    Elf: ¡°So that was when he used it unique skill to make you a Divine Being?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yea, I guess.¡±


    Elf: ¡°I read the report about it. Other than removing your favored element what exactly does it do?¡±


    ¡°Well I guess in my case it didn¡¯t remove my favored element, because mine is still wind, but I guess it is like a skill.¡±


    Elf: ¡°Like one of those hidden talents the Adventurer¡¯s Guild can show you with that stone thing they got? I have tried that three times, and no surprise here I apparently have no talent.¡±


    ¡°You can¡¯t expect to do nothing and gain a skill¡­ Have you ever done any combat training?¡±


    Elf: ¡°I have been smacked around a few times, been declared a lost cause, and they gave up on me¡­ If that counts.¡±


    ¡°You said this is a garrison as well as the Adventurer¡¯s Guild right? Surely they have some sort of training ground right?¡±


    Elf: ¡°Well sure, but what are you going to do?¡±


    ¡°Show me.¡±


    The small elven prince then leads me through the garrison, out a side door, and into a courtyard with several weapon racks and training dummies. Among the few guards stationed to the area there are a few more training in the yard, but for the most part it is empty.


    ¡°This should work, go grab you a weapon.¡±


    Elf: ¡°What kind of weapon?¡±


    ¡°Just what ever feels comfortable in your hand.¡±


    The small elven prince makes his way to the weapon rack trying to grab a huge two-handed sword, but it is easily one and a half times his size, and he can¡¯t even pick it up. He finally gives up and then tries grabbing a large double axe but has about the same amount of luck.


    ¡°Why don¡¯t you start small and work your way up to stuff like that¡­?¡±


    He then nods and stares at the rack for a minute he then grabs something and comes running back with a small dagger. For him it is easily a short-sword, but even still that might be a little too small.


    ¡°Well I did say something smaller¡­ Alright attack that dummy there.¡±


    He nods looking at the dagger in his hand, he then raises it above his head grabbing it with both hand and runs at the training dummy.


    ¡°Hold on shorty!¡± ¨CI say grabbing ahold of him and pulling the dagger from his hands.- ¡°This isn¡¯t some greatsword, it¡¯s a dagger. You might can do a little damage with slashes but you want to focus with small short jabs.¡±


    I lead him up to the training dummy and hand him back the dagger. ¡°Ok just keep it in one hand, and jab.¡±


    The small elven prince jabs alright, he throws his entire body into the jab and when the small blade hits the wooden training dummy he twists his wrist and starts to trip. I quickly grab him and stand him back up straight.


    ¡°Small light jabs. Like this¡± ¨CI say taking the dagger from him and swiftly jab three times with the dagger, all three jabs happen in a blink of an eye and with each one the blade sinks an inch into the wood. On the third jab I leave the blade sticking into the training dummy.- ¡°Like that swift, but light.¡±


    Elf: ¡°What do you mean light¡­? I put all my strength into it and it didn¡¯t even stick into the wood.¡± ¨CHe says trying to pull the blade from the wood, but he can¡¯t manage it.-


    Even after pulling on the dagger with both hands he still can¡¯t pull it out of the wood, so I reach over and give it a quick tug pulling it free and handing it back to him. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about power right now, focus on accuracy. See how my three jabs left a little triangle right there? Aim for the center of that triangle and jab.¡±


    When he jabs it doesn¡¯t even penetrate the wood at all, but worse yet he is at least 3 inches off. ¡°Again.¡±¡­ ¡°Again.¡±¡­¡±Again.¡±¡­


    On the fifth jab he finally hits within the triangle. ¡°I did it!¡±


    ¡°Congratulations, you hit a 3 inch, non-moving target, at point blank range, with a melee weapon and it only took you 5 tries¡­ Again.¡±


    The very next jab he misses again, but then hits, two more misses and then manages to hit two in a row. He keeps it up for a while, but still only hits about 3 out of 5. He has only been at it for a very short time and yet he is sweating quite badly and is breathing rather heavily.This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    ¡°Alright shorty take a break¡­¡±


    Elf: ¡°I am doing pretty well now right? I am managing to hit almost all of them.¡±


    ¡°Maybe for a human your size, but for a grown man 3 out of 5 is hardly ¡°almost all¡±¡­¡±


    Elf: ¡°Well it¡¯s harder than it looks!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s really not...¡±


    Elf: ¡°Fine I am useless, I give up.¡±


    ¡°Yes you are, but for that exact reason you shouldn¡¯t. If you give up everything just because you aren¡¯t good at it you will never be good at anything. You are already doing better than when you started. It still isn¡¯t good, but you just have to keep at it.¡±


    Elf: ¡°Even if I keep it up I will never be as good as Mother¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about how good anyone else is, there is only one person that you have to be better then, and that is the person you were the day before. So, what is it you are going to do shorty?¡±


    Elf: ¡°I have a name you know.¡±


    ¡°Then what is it?¡±


    Elf: ¡°Exavier.¡±


    ¡°Alright Exavier, what is it you are going to do now?¡±


    Exavier: ¡°I am going to kick my own ass!¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if I would put it quite like that, but grab the dagger and I will show you some more.¡±


    I take him back over to the training dummy and get him started on the basics. After a while of training some more he takes another break.


    Exavier: ¡°It really is quite the shame you didn¡¯t turn out to be my Tanya. You are the first person that I have talked to that hasn¡¯t looked down on me.¡±


    ¡°You can¡¯t really blame them with your height, and I am sure I am looking down on you more than most.¡±


    Exavier: ¡°You know what I mean¡­¡±


    ¡°I mean it¡¯s hard for me to think of you as anything other than a child that picked up a weapon for the first time, with your height and inability to do even the basics of combat.¡±


    Exavier seems shocked and depressed at what I just said. ¡°But I thought we were hitting it off?¡±


    ¡°By hitting it off you mean that I think you are a decent person, then yea, sure, but if you are talking about anything more than that. Combat is not the only thing you don¡¯t know anything about.¡±


    Exavier: ¡°Even as the Prince of Exeter, that doesn¡¯t that pique your interest in the slightest?¡±


    ¡°Any benefits of you as the Prince of Exeter went out the window when you laid out the ¡°unwanted son¡± and ¡°useless¡± act earlier. Besides don¡¯t you already have a fianc¨¦?¡±


    Exavier: ¡°My fianc¨¦ is 3 years older than I am not disillusioned that I will be getting some maiden, so I myself would like to get some experience before I made a total fool of myself in front of my wife.¡±


    ¡°Well this conversation turned quickly, and I am not for sale.¡±


    Exavier: ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I didn¡¯t really mean it that way, I just¡­ I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°You better get back to practicing.¡±


    Exavier nods and returns to the training dummy. After a while I switch out his dagger for an actual short sword and after a while of getting use to the additional weight he seems to be making better progress with it then he was the dagger. With the short sword he can do a bit more in the ways of slashing so I teach him the basics of that as well.


    During another break Exavier asks me. ¡°Do you mind showing me a bit of what you can do? I saw the way you handled that dagger, and even made short work of the short sword, so I would like to see what it is you can do without having to try to teach it to me, and just letting loose.¡±


    I get up from the spot I was sitting on and move over to a few of the training dummies moving them in a circle around me, I then use my ring to open the storage letting my sword slide from within till I catch the grip while Exavier¡¯s eyes seem to grow in size for every inch of the blade.


    Exavier: ¡°I have never seen something like that!¡±


    ¡°That is because I had it specially made.¡± ¨CI say while making sure each of the dummies are just out of reach of me and my sword with my arm fully extended.- ¡°Alright now, don¡¯t blink.¡±


    Exavier watches me with great enthusiasm as I finish my circle confirming the dummies are all far enough away. I then pull my sword up tight next to my body, take a short stance, and then launch myself from the ground.


    Leaping into the air while covering the entire distance between me and the first dummy I spin my sword while flipping my body slicing one of the dummies in two vertically, but before it even has a chance to hit the ground I spin around slicing it along with two other of the dummies horizontally.


    With one of the dummies in 4 pieces and 2 more in 2 pieces I launch myself at the next dummy. They aren¡¯t exactly soft targets, but with this sword Papa¡¯s elf made me they might as well be made of parchment.


    I continue to dance around the circle while twisting, spinning, and flipping till all of the dummies I set up are lying on the ground. Once the last dummy collides with the ground I activate my ring tossing my sword into the air then watch as it disappears from sight again.


    I get a standing ovation from Exavier, and apparently I gathered a few more spectators as several of the guards that were training or on duty clap as well.


    Exavier: ¡°That was quite impressive even for Exeter! I wonder if I could convince you to join me at Exelka. If you showed Mother your skills and told her you were willing to train me, I am sure she could make it well worth your time.¡±


    ¡°As I told you before, I am quite pressed for time and I¡­¡± ¨CI quickly look around and determine the sun has already begun to set.- ¡°Damnit! I¡¯m sorry shorty, but I¡¯m late. Keep up your practice and best of luck to you and your fianc¨¦.¡±


    I quickly rush out the garrison leaving Exavier standing there with a confused expression on his face. Even gathering xp I should have returned by now, and I up and wasted the entire day without accomplishing anything!


    I run through town while sending a message to Windy and Syrinx to start coming down to meet me, but my full stop has surely expired already so I don¡¯t know how far away they are going to be. I was heading southeast before issuing the full stop so has my dungeon continued moving southeast, or is it instead being carried in the direction of the wind?


    Once I reach the point in which I was dropped off I stop to check to see which direction the clouds are moving¡­ West¡­ Just perfect¡­ Now I still don¡¯t see Windy or Syrinx anywhere, so is my dungeon further southeast or is it heading west for the coast.


    I have to assume that since the full stop is only a temporary order, once it expires the dungeon will begin moving again in the direction it was previously heading so for now I have to hope it is heading south east.


    It has gotten dark enough now that traveling is getting rather difficult only slowing me further. I keep sending messages to Windy and Syrinx, but being non sentient there isn¡¯t much they can do except follow my orders.


    If one of them had a fire spell I could at least have them cast it in hopes of seeing the flame. I continue across the plains in a southeastern direction until I notice I am no longer alone. Wolves are of really no concern to me even if two of them may just be dire wolves, but the time it would take for me to battle with them in the dark might be enough for me to lose my bearings.


    When the wolves look like they are about to make their move I have no other choice then to pull my sword from my ring, and I quickly drag the end of the blade in the dirt making a quick but clear heading in case I get turned around in the fight.


    The first wolf to make its move is one of the younger ones as it cuts off from the pack surrounding me heading in to attack. My sword however has the reach advantage and when it leaps at me I cut it down in a swift and single action.


    The two dire wolves don¡¯t seem to like that very much as they break off from the pack trying to flank me. Normal wolves might of high tailed it after losing one of the pack but these dire wolves are far more aggressive and cunning.


    One of the dire wolves aims low going for my legs while the other one aims high leaping towards my face and chest. Dire wolves should be beyond someone of my level, but with this gear from Papa and all of my skills I should be able to manage two of them.


    I quickly dive out of the way of their pincer attack, but it doesn¡¯t stop them from instantly locking back on me, turning, and charging again this time both from the same direction. I am not to worried about the regular wolves hurting me, but if one manages to grab my arm at just the wrong time things might get a little difficult, so I try to keep to the center of the group diving past the dire wolves this time to not get to close to the edge.


    They quickly start to turn to attack for a third time, but this time I use the spear technique [Improved Whirlwind Swipe]. The fact it is a spear technique rather than a sword technique is strange because this seems much more effective as my sword cuts the legs out from under one of the dire wolves, but the other manages to evade.


    Even without legs the dire wolf isn¡¯t completely out, but long as I keep my distance it shouldn¡¯t be a problem and if it doesn¡¯t bleed to death first I will deal with it after the rest. The other dire wolf doesn¡¯t seem to be messing around now after nudging the legless dire wolf a few times with its snout.


    It lets out a high pitched howl that is painful to the ears and the normal wolves are charge at once. Magic isn¡¯t exactly my forte, and a few techniques here and there along with a few minor spells are about all I can manage, but even a simple spell is enough to deal with a normal wolf.


    I use few [Wind Cutter] spells, another spear, and even a sword technique, and it leaves the remaining dire wolf an me the only ones left standing. It nudges one of the dead wolves with its snout and locks its eyes with mine while growling loudly.


    ¡°Come on, you can¡¯t really expect to get the best of me by yourself now can you? A normal wolf would be smart enough to have cut their losses after the first one died, but not you¡­ Alright, show me what you got!¡±


    The dire wolf charges, and I quickly dodge to the side bringing my sword down in a fell swoop removing its head from its neck. The other dire wolf whimpers as it tries to hobble about without its legs.


    ¡°Sorry bud, but you attacked me, and you won¡¯t make it like that anyway so you might as well give me your xp.¡± ¨CI say then finish off the legless dire wolf.-


    I quickly clean my sword and store it back in my ring then quickly look for the mark I made in the ground. It takes a little bit of work in the dark but I manage to find it and quickly set back out in a southeastern direction.


    I don¡¯t know how much longer it took, it seemed like hours, but it could have only been a few minutes before I can make out the sight of Windy and Syrix. By the time I reach my dungeon I just lay on the grass looking up at the stars.


    I glance at the monster have returned from battle screen and then close it. I left my dungeon for the specific purpose to gather xp and yet the only xp I gathers was the bit I was trying to avoid while returning to my dungeon.


    It isn¡¯t exactly an earth shattering amount of xp, but it is enough to buy me a couple more days at least. I am going to have to think of a way to keep my dungeon from running off on me again. [Menu] said it would last up to 24 hours with no wind, but I still have yet to see a time the wind wasn¡¯t blowing at least a little bit.


    Over the course of the next few weeks I continue my trip south, and make a few more attempts to the surface. In the short time I can spend on the surface I haven¡¯t been able to gather much but it has been enough to keep me going at least.


    I also have found a way to increase the chances of my dungeon not running off on me. Before I leave my dungeon I make sure my dungeon is going in the opposite direction of the current wind, making it move very slowly. I then issue the full stop, so as long as the wind doesn¡¯t suddenly change directions if the full stop expires my dungeon will be moving at the slowest possible speed.


    That is of course unless the wind changes and really messes me up¡­ On one of my trips down to the surface I finally manage to get me a workable map, compass, and a few tools ships use to navigate at sea, but I don¡¯t know how useful they will be.


    When I pass near Madam Erin¡¯s dungeon it really gives me a measure of just how high I actually am¡­ Her dungeon is over 300 floors tall and it pierces the clouds and yet it still looks like it would take 2 of her dungeons to reach mine.


    I guess the first thing I need to do when I get of xp is lower the height my dungeon is at, because at this point it is just overkill. Seeing Madam Erin¡¯s dungeon below me also makes me feel grateful for Windy and Syrinx, as they have continued to be able to bring me all the way from the ground back up here quite a few times now.


    It has gotten quite cold the last few days, in fact it has gotten really cold¡­ Even as a dungeon core I have been spending my time inside the comforts of the cave. The clouds have made seeing the ground almost impossible as well, if it wasn¡¯t for seeing Madam¡¯s Erin dungeon sticking up past them, I would of probably overshot my target.


    But after another two days I set my dungeon up and then issue the full stop heading down to the surface. I came down in the middle of the trees, but I was able to see the small city in the forest as I came down.


    I am a bit off from where I was hoping to come down, but there isn¡¯t much I can do because of the clouds, I put it off initiating the full stop for as long as I could because I arrived half way through the night, but I am glad I didn¡¯t put it off any longer.


    It is still very early in the morning and the sun has yet to rise, but that makes my arrival shrouded in darkness. I make my way through the forest towards the small city, and it takes more than an hour with a light bit of snow beginning to fall.


    When I reach the small city people are starting to move about and I head straight for Papa¡¯s house. I surprise Papa with my visit, and get to spend a bit of time with him, but more importantly I manage to gain quite a bit of experience hacking and slashing monsters in his dungeon.


    Not only that but he uses his new position with the Elders to give me a bonus to gathering xp for an entire year.  Unfortunately since it was so early when I arrived it means I have to leave quite early as well, but I at least to visit with everyone a bit.


    Once I make it back on board my dungeon I change my destination heading back north, and with the freezing wind outside I remain in my little cave while I plan what to do with all this xp I just gathered.